Preface

Dear Customer:
Thank you for your trust in Geely and for choosing the Geely vehicle that features excellent
performance in safety, comfort, power, and economy. We hope to bring happiness and fun to
your work and life with our premium products and services.
Please read and follow the contents of the manual before using the car so as to help you
better understand and use Geely automobiles and ensure that your vehicle is always in good
technological state and maintain best performance in your future use. The more you know
about your vehicle, the more you will enjoy the fun and safety of driving.
If you find any problems in use, please contact Geely Service for maintenance as soon as
possible. You will be provided with high-quality services in vehicle maintenance and repair.
Please be sure to maintain your car on schedule in accordance with the requirements in this
manual.
This manual provides information on all models. Due to the variety of configurations and
models, the descriptions in this manual may differ from the actual configuration of your
vehicle. The vehicle you actually receive shall prevail.
This manual is an integral part of the vehicle. When selling or lending the vehicle, please
forward this manual to the new owner.
All the information in this manual is the latest information at the time of publication. If any
change is made in the future, supplementary notice will be issued in accordance with relevant
regulations.
Happy Life, Geely Drive!

Geely Automobile International Corporation

March 2022

All Rights Reserved. Without the written permission of Geely Automobile International
Corporation, this manual cannot be reproduced or copied in whole or in part.

Note: The cover and pictures in the manual are only for reference. All the pictures shall
be subject to the actual devices on the vehicle.
 Contents
Owner’s Manual and 41 Steering wheel 1
Vehicle Identification 41 Horn
7 About this Manual 41 Steering Wheel Heating*
7 Notes to Users 42 Steering Wheel Adjustment
8 Prompt Message 43 Steering Wheel Buttons 2
8 Graphic Abstracts 46 Rearview Mirror
8 Vehicle identification 46 Exterior Rearview Mirror
8 Vehicle Identification Number 48 Interior Rearview Mirror
8 Position of Vehicle Identification 49 Window 3
Number 49 Power windows
10 Vehicle Label
52 Sunroof
Instrument and Control 52 Panoramic Sunroof
4
13 Instrument and control device 59 Interior Lamp
13 Driver Side Overview 59 Front Interior Lamps
14 Passenger Side Overview 60 Rear Interior Lamps
60 Ambient lamp*
15 Combination Instrument
62 Glove Box Lamp 5
15 Combination Instrument
62 Trunk lamp
Overview
16 Dial gauge 62 Outdoor Lamp
19 Information Center 62 Welcome light*
28 Warnings and indicators 62 Exterior Rearview Mirror Ground 6
Lamps*
34 Head Up Display*
34 Heads Up Display (HUD) 63 In-vehicle Device
Introduction 63 Glove box
34 Head-up Display Settings 63 Storage Box 7
65 Sun Visor and Cosmetic Mirror
35 Light and Wiper Combination
Switch 65 Ticket Holder
35 Light Combination Switch 65 Center Armrest
38 Wiper Combination Switch 66 Cup holder
8
66 Backup power supply

1
 67 Wireless Charging for Mobile 99 Seat Belt Overview
Phones* 100 Why Seat Belt Can Serve for
68 Multimedia interface Protection
68 Charge Port 103 Three-point Seat Belt
68 Assist grips 105 Seat Belt Maintenance and
69 Coat and Hat Hook Replacement
69 String Bag 106 Airbag
69 Trunk Curtain* 106 Airbag Overview
70 Trunk 107 Position of the Airbags
71 External Device 110 Deployment of the Airbags
71 Roof Rack 112 Airbag Maintenance and
Replacement
A/C system
114 Child Restraints
73 Heating, Ventilation and A/C
114 Selection of Child Restrain
73 Front A/C control system
System
79 Rear A/C Control System*
116 Use of Child Safety Device
82 Ambient Light and Sunlight
119 Installation of the Child
Sensor
Restraint System
83 A/C Ventilation System
86 Air Vent Adjustment and A/C Starting and Driving
Maintenance 125 Key
87 Air Monitoring System* 125 Smart key
87 Air Conditioning Comfort
127 Anti-theft System
Reminder*
127 Engine Anti-theft System
Seats and Protective 128 Vehicle Locking and Unlocking
Devices 128 Locking and Unlocking
89 Seat
137 Vehicle Start
89 Front Seats
137 Start-and-stop Switch (PEPS)
94 Rear Seat
138 Start the Engine (PEPS)
96 Seat Heating/Ventilation*
139 Start Program Operations
98 Driver Seat Memory Function*
140 Engine Start-Stop System
99 Seat Belt 142 Vehicle Cannot be Started

2
 142 Driving
147 Three-way Catalytic Converter
147 Introduction of the Three-Way
Catalytic Converter
147 Requirements for Fuel
147 Requirements for Starting
148 Requirements for Driving
148 Exhaust Emission
148 Exhaust Emission Control
Device
148 Engine Exhaust
149 Fuel System
149 Requirements for Fuel
150 Safety Precautions at the
Gasoline Station
150 Fuel Filler and Refueling
152 Transmission
152 Automatic Transmission
152 Gear Information
153 Notice for Use
156 Braking and Electronic
Assistance System
156 Service Brake
157 Parking Brake
159 Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS)
159 Electronic Braking-force
Distribution (EBD)
159 Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) System
160 Brake Assist System (BA)
161 Traction Control System (TCS)
3
162 Hill Hold Control (HAC)
162 Hill Descent Control (HDC)
1
163 Emergency Braking Double
Flash (HAZ)
163 All-Wheel-Drive System
164 Parking Assist System
2
164 Parking Assist System
168 Panoramic Image System
170 Automatic Parking System*
175 Intelligent Driving System
3
175 Intelligent Driving System
Introduction
177 Cruise Control (CC) System
179 Automatic Speed Limit Control
System (LIM) 4
181 Adaptive Cruise Control
System (ACC)*
192 G-Pilot*
203 Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)* 5
206 Collision Mitigation Support
Front (CMSF)*
212 Traffic Sign Identification
System (TSI)*
215 Rear Side Radar Assist
6
System*
219 Active High Beam Control
System (AHBC)*
7
Fault during Drive
221 Hazard Warning Device
221 Hazard warning indicator
221 Warning Triangle
8
221 Fire Extinguisher*
 222 First Aid Kit*
222 Tire Pressure Gauge*
223 Jumper starting
223 Jump Starting of the Vehicle
225 Vehicle Towing
225 Towing of All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle
225 Towing Instructions
226 Towing ring
228 Replace tires
228 Tire
234 Replacement of Spare Tire
236 Replacement of Fuse
236 Fuse Position and Identification
237 Front engine compartment fuse
box
240 Indoor Fuse Box
244 Inspection or Replacement of
Fuse
245 Replacement of Bulb
245 Bulb Specifications
246 Emergency Handling
246 Vehicle Overheating
247 Vehicle Stalls
247 When the Vehicle Is Stuck
247 Road Accident Emergency
Response System*
Repair and maintenance
249 Maintenance and Service
249 Regular Maintenance
4
253 Front Engine Compartment
253 Front Engine Compartment
Hood
254 Front Engine Compartment
255 Engine Oil and Filter Element
256 Cooling System
256 Cooling System Introduction
256 Check the Coolant
257 Refill Coolant
259 Brake System
259 Overview
259 Travel of Brake Pedal
260 Brake fluid
261 Operation of steering system
261 Electric Power Steering (EPS)
262 Front combination lamp
262 Fogging On Front Headlamps
262 Battery
262 Maintenance of Battery
263 Inspection of Battery
263 Replacement of Battery
263 Long-term Parking
264 Washer Fluid and Wiper Blade
264 Washer Fluid
264 Wiper Blades
267 Vehicle Cleaning and
Maintenance
267 Exterior Cleaning
268 Interior Cleaning
Technical Data
271 Main Parameters of the Vehicle 274 Emission Level
271 Main Dimensions of the 275 Wheels and Tires
1
Vehicle 277 Oil and fluid
272 Mass Parameters of the 277 Recommended Fluids and
Vehicle Volume
273 Main Parameters of the Engine
274 Vehicle Power Efficiency 2

5
6
 Owner’s Manual and Vehicle Identification

About this Manual 8. Refitting or adding devices is not

allowed. Geely Auto assumes no
Notes to Users 1
responsibility for direct or indirect losses
1. The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-
caused by the modification or addition
lock Brake System (ABS). In emergency
of devices.
braking, be sure to press the brake
9. Do not install accessories that may
pedal hard rather than make inching
cause interference to the vehicle's radio
braking. 2
receiver or electrical system.
2. Check tire wear and tire pressure
10. When installing accessories, it is not
regularly as per the methods
allowed to cause harmful interference to
recommended herein and tire pressure
any legal radio communication service.
requirements.
Once interference is found, stop using it
3. Always use the oil and fluid 3
immediately and take measures to
recommended in this manual and
eliminate the interference.
conduct maintenance as per the
11. It is necessary to place the foot mat
Warranty and Maintenance Manual.
properly and use the foot mat of
4. The vehicle is equipped with airbags.
appropriate size. The mat at driver side
For the safety of children, do not use the
must not affect normal use of pedals. If 4
backward child restraint system on a
foot mat slides while the vehicle is
seat with frontal airbag protection
traveling, it may affect the movement of
(activated).
pedals and cause traffic accident.
5. For your driving safety, do not remove
12. The multimedia manual, an important
parts and components on your own. As
part of this manual, is used to introduce 5
anti-loosening agents may have been
the entertainment system of the vehicle.
applied on some fasteners of the
See the multimedia manual for detailed
vehicle, the removed fasteners shall not
operations of the entertainment system.
be reused.
13. The software version of the vehicle and
6. Do not park for a long time when the
settings may be updated later. Before 6
engine is not stalled, so as not to inhale
the upgrade, you will be informed to
vehicle exhaust gas in the vehicle which
obtain your consent. The information
may affect your health.
displayed after the upgrade may be
7. Do not rest or sleep in the vehicle when
different from the description in the user
the engine is not stalled. Avoid
accidentally stepping on the accelerator
manual delivered with the purchased 7
vehicle. The actual situation shall
pedal to avoid the engine to continue
prevail in terms of specific information.
idling at a high speed, causing the
exhaust pipe to become too hot and
causing the vehicle to catch fire,
affecting your life and property safety. 8

7
Owner’s Manual and Vehicle Identification

Prompt Message Vehicle identification

Warning Vehicle Identification Number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
Ignoring the warning may cause
always required when you contact Geely
serious injury or death. The stated
Service. If the engine or transmission is
steps or requirements must be strictly
concerned in your communication with
followed.
Geely Service, the engine number or
Notice transmission number may be required.
Steps and requirements stated in the
notice must be strictly observed.
Otherwise your vehicle might be damaged.

Description
Indicative descriptions for your better
use of the vehicle information.

Environmental Protection
Issues described are related to
environmental protection.
1. Engine Identification
Asterisk 2. Transmission Identification
The asterisk “*” symbol following a title or 3. Engine Information Label
name indicates that the configuration or Position of Vehicle
function described is only featured on Identification Number
certain models. Your vehicle may not
necessarily have it. Position of Engine Number

Graphic Abstracts

Indicate an object.

Indicate the motion direction of an

object.

Indicate the rotation direction of

an object.

Indicate that behavior is

prohibited or occurrence should
be prevented.

8
 Owner’s Manual and Vehicle Identification
The engine number is engraved on engine
body, behind the throttle valve (seen from
the front).
Position of Transmission
Number
8AT automatic transmission number is on
the nameplate next to the automatic
transmission control unit (TCU).
Position of Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
VIN is on the body bracket at the lower left
corner of the windshield, which can be seen
through the windshield.
9
1
VIN code is engraved on the beam under
the front passenger seat. Move the seat 3
back to the end and lift the protective cover.
Then it can be seen.
There are other places with VIN on the
vehicle:
• Trunk inner panel 4
• Inside glove box (if equipped)
• Upper part of left rear quarter window (if
equipped)
• Front floor tunnel
• Brake pedal 5
• Left B pillar inner panel
• Right B pillar inner panel
• Inner panel of the front engine
compartment hood
Please provide the VIN when you 6
contact Geely Service. If damage
occurs to the VIN on the vehicle, please
contact Geely Service in time.
7
Owner’s Manual and Vehicle Identification

Vehicle identification number Vehicle Label

Type 1

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

consists of 17 characters. It contains such
information as vehicle manufacturer,
production year, vehicle body variant,
number and manufacturing facility, etc. The vehicle label is located below the right
Read vehicle identification number central pillar and contains the following
The VIN can be read by using the diagnostic information:
instrument in Geely Service. Specific steps
• Country of manufacture
are as below:
• Manufacturer
1. Turn on the start and stop button;
• Vehicle identification number
2. Connect Geely vehicle diagnostic
• Brand
instrument to the OBD diagnostic
• Vehicle model
interface.
• Engine type
3. Activate the diagnosing program. to
• Number of occupants
read the VIN.
• Maximum engine net power
To read the VIN as per the method • Engine displacement
above, always do it through Geely • Maximum allowed total mass
Service. Otherwise, it may cause damage to • Production date
the vehicle.

10
 Owner’s Manual and Vehicle Identification

Type 2 The vehicle label is located below the left

central pillar and contains the following
information:
1
• Country of manufacture
• Manufacturer
• Vehicle model
• Production date
2
• Vehicle identification number
• Vehicle type

3
The vehicle label is located below the right
central pillar and contains the following
information:
• Maker name
• Whole vehicle type approval number
4
• Vehicle identification number
• Maximum allowed vehicle load
• Maximum allowed front axle full load
mass
• Maximum allowed rear axle full load
5
mass

Type 3

11
Owner’s Manual and Vehicle Identification

12
 Instrument and Control

Instrument and control device

Driver Side Overview 1

1. Defrost Vent LH 9. Wiper Combination Switch

2. Interior Door Handle 10. Accelerator Pedal
3. Seat Memory Button* 11. Brake Pedal 6
4. Vent LH 12. Headlamp Height Adjusting Knob
5. Light Combination Switch 13. Front Engine Compartment Hood
Release Handle
6. Combination Instrument 14. Trunk Unlocking Button*
7
7. Steering Wheel 15. Exterior Rearview Mirror Adjustment
Switch
8. Head Up Display (HUD)* 16. Power Window Control Switch

13
Instrument and Control

Passenger Side Overview

1. Start-and-stop Switch 9. Defrost Vent RH

2. Hazard Warning Indicator Switch 10. Front Occupant Window Control
Switch
3. Central Display 11. Glove Box
4. Front Speaker Cover 12. Glove Box Opening Button
5. Central Air Vent 13. A/C control Panel
6. Front Passenger Side Display* 14. Driving Mode Selection Switch
7. Vent RH 15. Shift Lever
8. Interior Door Handle 16. Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Switch

14
 Instrument and Control

Combination Instrument
Combination Instrument Overview 1

1. Speedometer 3. Engine coolant temperature gauge 4

2. Fuel gauge 4. Tachometer

The display mode of combination instrument display can be set on the multimedia
display.
5
The pictures of combination instrument are all schematic diagrams for reference only.
The actual vehicle shall prevail.

15
Instrument and Control
Dial gauge
Speedometer
The speedometer shows the current vehicle
speed by "km/h", with a maximum scale of
260 km/h.
You can drive at high speed under good
road condition. But for safety, stability and
comfort, it is better to control the speed
within 120 km/h on ordinary roads.
Fuel gauge
When the start and stop button is in Mode II
or the engine is started, the fuel gauge
indicates the remaining fuel in the fuel tank
and endurance mileage.
16
1. Indication of remaining fuel in the fuel
tank
The fuel gauge shows the amount of
fuel in the fuel tank. When the vehicle
runs on curve road or mountain road,
the indication of fuel gauge may be
slightly different from the actual fuel
level. Only on flat ground when the start
and stop button is in Mode II or the
engine is started, the indication of fuel
gauge is the actual fuel level.
It is reasonable to keep the fuel at more
than 1/4 volume of the fuel tank.
If the low fuel level alarming indicator is
on, please refuel as soon as possible.
After the fuel tank is filled, the low fuel
level warning indicator will automatically
go out. If the warning indicator does not
go out, please contact Geely
Automobile Service Station for
maintenance as soon as possible.
When going uphill or cornering, the fuel
in the fuel tank will flow and the low fuel
level alarming indicator may light up
earlier than usual.
Long-term running of the vehicle
under low fuel level can easily cause
premature damage to the fuel pump and
damage to the three-way catalytic converter
due to engine stalling.
2. Display the endurance mileage
The endurance mileage is used to
display the mileage can be traveled with
the current amount of fuel in the fuel
tank. The system calculates the
endurance mileage per second, and the
interface is updated every 10 seconds.
 Instrument and Control

The endurance mileage value is • Long-distance climbing in hot weather.

calculated in a rolling manner based on • Reduce the speed or stop after driving at
the fuel consumption per minute. Due to high speed.
1
various roads and driving conditions, • Use the air conditioning system in heavy
the displayed endurance mileage may traffic areas and let the engine idle for a
differ from the actual driving distance. long time.
The value is for reference only. After
Tachometer 2
each refueling, the last endurance
mileage will be reset. When the fuel
sensor is faulty, the interface displays
— km; Based on driving habits, the
endurance mileage is displayed 0 km at
least. The endurance mileage cannot be 3
reset manually.

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

4
The tachometer indicates the engine speed
per minute in rpm. The range of tachometer
is 0 rpm~8000 rpm, and 6500 rpm~8000
rpm is the red area of the tachometer.
5
It helps choose the right shift gear moment
(in manual mode) during driving to prevent
the engine from overloading or
overspeeding.
If the engine speed is too high during
When the start and stop button is at Mode II driving, the engine is easy to wear and
6
or the engine is started, the coolant consumes more fuel. In most cases, the
temperature gauge indicates the engine is more fuel-efficient when running at
temperature of engine coolant. The engine low speeds.
coolant temperature changes with air
Do not let the engine tachometer 7
temperature and engine load.
pointer stay at the red zone for long,
If the coolant temperature gauge points to
or it may cause serious damage to the
the red or the right side, you should stop the
engine.
vehicle and let the engine cool down.
The engine may overheat under severe
driving conditions, such as: 8

17
Instrument and Control

Overspeed Alarm On the multimedia display, click in turn:

Vehicle Settings → Driving Assistance and
Safety → Pre-collision Assistance. The
custom overspeed alarm function can be
enabled/disabled in this interface, and the
overspeed alarm value can be set.
Some configuration： The speedometer
shows that the vehicle speed is higher than
120 km/h, the buzzer sounds, and the
combination instrument displays a prompt
message: Over speed, Drive safely, and the
overspeed warning indicator lights up. This
reminds the driver to slow down and drive
When the speed indicated by the
safely. When the vehicle speed is less than
speedometer on combination instrument is
117 km/h, the alarm is released.
higher than the preset overspeed alarm
value, the buzzer will sound and the
combination instrument will indicate: The
speed is beyond the limit. Please drive
safely. This reminds the driver to slow down
and drive safely. The alarm speed setting
range is: 30~235 km/h. If the overspeed
alarm speed is set at 120 km/h, it will alarm
when speed is greater than 120 km/h, to
remind the driver to control the speed.
When the vehicle speed is less than 117
km/h, the alarm is released.

18
 Instrument and Control

Information Center
Display Screen Overview 1

1. Information menu Mode, Off-road Mode, Smart Mode or

• It displays Trip1, Trip2, vehicle status, Sports Mode, Sand Mode(if equipped). 4
tire status, door-open reminder and • Gear display: The current gear position
seatbelt-unfastened reminder. of the transmission can be displayed on
2. Clock the display screen. The following gears
• Clock: GPS time is displayed by default. can be displayed: R, N, D, M and P.
On the multimedia display, click in turn: 6. Menu 5
System Settings → System → Time. The • It displays the menu functions on the
system time, time format, date format, combination instrument, including
automatic setting, time zone and daylight communication records, maps &
time can be set in this interface. navigation, personalization kits and
3. Outside temperature warning information (highlighted). 6
• Outside temperature. The range is -40° 7. Current function information
C~85°C. • It displays the information of intelligent
4. Notifications driving function selection, intelligent
• Display information such as vehicle driving function identification and
notifications, multimedia audio source, intelligent driving function status. 7
weather, call, etc.
5. Driving mode and gear
• Driving mode: As per the driving mode
selected by the driver, it is displayed as
Comfort Mode, Economy Mode, Snow
8

19
Instrument and Control
Display Screen Settings
Do not adjust combination instrument
while the vehicle is running.
Be sure to activate steering wheel
multiplex before setting combination
instrument.
Steering wheel multiplex
Short press the menu button to open the
combination instrument menu. Then the
steering wheel multiplex function is
simultaneously activated, and the
combination instrument can be controlled
via the buttons on the right side of steering
wheel. When the combination instrument
menu is closed, the buttons on the right side
of steering wheel can only control the audio
source in multimedia.
1. Menu button: Short press this button to
open/close the combination instrument
menu. When the combination
instrument menu is opened, the control
of the steering wheel selection button is
on the combination instrument. When
the combination instrument menu is
closed, the control of the steering wheel
selection button is on the multimedia.
20
2. Left selection button: When the
combination instrument menu is
opened, short press this button to select
items leftward in the combination
instrument menu.
3. Selection button: Short press this button
to select or execute the highlighted
item, or to block general alarm
information. Roll the button to select the
previous or the next item.
4. Right selection button: When the
combination instrument menu is
opened, short press this button to select
items rightward in the combination
instrument menu.
Alarm Prompt Information on
Display
Alarm prompt information and fault
information will be indicated on the
combination instrument display. Some
information comes with sound signals and/
or illuminated icons.
Please pay attention to alarm prompt
information on the combination instrument
display, and take actions as per the prompt
information to avoid potential dangers.
Some alarm prompt information can be
hidden by pressing the selection button on
the right side of steering wheel. The current
hidden alarm prompt information can be
viewed via the alarm record in the
combination instrument menu. The alarm
prompt information will not disappear until
the fault is solved.
The driver shall pay attention to all
alarm prompt information. If any fault
is sent by alarm prompt information, please
contact Geely Service for maintenance as
 Instrument and Control

soon as possible. If the driver fails to deal

with the feedback in the alarm prompt
information, vehicle damage or personal
1
injury may occur.

ECU interface settings

ECU interface switching
2

• In addition, on the multimedia display,

• Short press RESET button on the left
side of the light combination switch to
cyclically toggle Trip1, Trip2, vehicle
status and tire status one by one.
• Every time the combination instrument is
powered on, the onboard computer
displays the last recorded information.
Onboard computer reset
• In the Trip1 or Trip2 interface of onboard
computer information, press and hold
RESET button at the left side of light
combination switch to reset the onboard
computer information of the
corresponding interface.
click in turn: Vehicle Settings → Vehicle 3
Settings → Onboard Computer Reset, to
select the onboard computer information
in this interface to be reset. The reset
mode of Trip2 can also be set as parking
reset or refueling reset. 4
Information on the ECU
Trip2
5
6
Trip2 shows the driving data information 7
since the last reset, including mileage, time
consumption, average fuel consumption and
average speed.
The driving data in Trip2 are as follows:
1. Mileage: The display range of this data
8
is 0~9999.9km.

21
Instrument and Control

On the multimedia display, click in turn: Settings, and the speed unit can be
System Settings → System → Unit adjusted to km/h or mph in this
Settings, and the mileage unit can be interface.
adjusted to km or miles in this interface.
Fuel consumption level differs by
2. Time consumption: The maximum travel
driving methods. Please drive
time displayed by this data is 99:59.
economically for energy saving and
When it detects that the engine is
environmental protection. Please refer to
running, the driving time starts to
Section "Economical Driving" in the Chapter
accumulate. When the engine is
"Starting and Driving" for details.
stopped or stalled, the calculation is
suspended. Trip1
3. Average fuel consumption: This value is
displayed in L/100km by default. After
the value is reset, when traveling within
300 meters, the average fuel
consumption will be displayed as –.-
(unit).
This information can help the driver
change their driving habits for the
desired fuel consumption. The interface
is updated every 10 seconds. To
measure the average fuel consumption
in a certain driving cycle, reset the
Trip1 shows the driving data information
average fuel consumption before
since the last reset, including mileage, time
measuring the fuel consumption.
consumption, average fuel consumption and
Fuel injection at idle speed will be
average speed.
accumulated in the single fuel
The driving data in Trip1 are as follows:
consumption.
1. Mileage: This display is updated every
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
0.1km or 0.1mile (based on the unit
System Settings → System → Unit
setting). The display range is
Settings, and the fuel consumption unit
0~9999.9km. When the maximum value
can be adjusted to L/100km, km/L, mpg
is reached, the subtotal mileage will be
(US) or mpg (UK) in this interface.
recalculated from 0.0km.
4. Average speed: After the engine is On the multimedia display, click in turn:
started, the average speed starts to be
System Settings → System → Unit
calculated. When the vehicle is stalled,
Settings, and the mileage unit can be
the calculation is suspended.
adjusted to km or miles in this interface.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
System Settings → System → Unit

22

2. Time Consumption: When it detects that
the engine is running, the driving time
starts to accumulate. When the engine
is stopped or stalled, the calculation is
suspended. After the engine is started,
time is accumulated on the original
basis. The data is updated every 60
seconds. The displayed maximum
driving time is 99:59.
3. The average fuel consumption is in L/
100km by default, which displays the
average fuel consumption after the
memory was cleared last time. This
information can help the driver adjust
his driving habits to achieve the desired
fuel consumption value. The interface is
updated once every 10 seconds. To
measure the average fuel consumption
in a certain driving cycle, reset the
average fuel consumption before
measuring the fuel consumption. After
resetting, the average fuel consumption
won't be displayed again until the
vehicle travels for some distance.
After each ignition, the average fuel
consumption uses the value at the last
exit.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
System Settings → System → Unit
Settings, and the fuel consumption unit
can be adjusted to L/100km, km/L, mpg
(US) or mpg (UK) in this interface.
4. Average speed: After the engine is
started, the average vehicle speed is
calculated. When the engine is stopped
or stalled, the calculation is suspended.
The display value is updated every 10
seconds.
23
Instrument and Control
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
System Settings → System → Unit
Settings, and the speed unit can be
1
adjusted to km/h or mph in this
interface.
Fuel consumption level differs by
driving methods. Please drive 2
economically for energy saving and
environmental protection. Please refer to
Section "Economical Driving" in the Chapter
"Starting and Driving" for details.
Vehicle status 3
4
5
1. Instantaneous fuel consumption: When
the vehicle is running, the instantaneous
fuel consumption is updated at a
frequency of once per second, 6
displayed in L/100 km.
When the engine is running and the
vehicle speed is less than 2 km/h, the
instantaneous fuel consumption is
displayed as "- -.-" L/100km. When the 7
accelerator pedal is not pressed and the
vehicle is taxiing, the instantaneous fuel
consumption is displayed as 0.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
System Settings → System → Unit 8
Instrument and Control
Settings, and the fuel consumption unit
can be adjusted to L/100km, km/L, mpg
(US) or mpg (UK) in this interface.
This interface can help the driver adjust
driving habits to achieve the desired
power consumption value.
2. Engine oil level: The oil level can be fed
back to the combination instrument via
the level sensor, and the current status
will be displayed on the combination
instrument display.
When the start and stop button is in
Mode II or the engine is started, toggle
the interfaces of the onboard computer
of the combination instrument to check
whether the oil level information is
normal.
3. Total mileage: It shows the total mileage
of the vehicle, which cannot be reset.
Tire status
The pressure and temperature of tires can
be displayed in real time on the combination
instrument display via settings.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
System Settings → System → Unit Settings.
The pressure unit can be adjusted to kPa,
24
bar or PSI in this interface. The temperature
unit can be adjusted to℃ or °F.
• Alarm of high tire temperature, flat tire
and low sensor power
When the alarm of high tire temperature,
flat tire and low sensor power is
activated, the corresponding alarm tire
flashes, with an audible alarm and a text
prompt.
• Low tire pressure alarm
When the low tire pressure alarm is
activated, the corresponding tire flashes,
and the status indicator of the tire
pressure monitoring system is constantly
on until the alarm is cleared, with an
audible alarm and a text prompt
interface. After the tire is inflated to the
standard pressure value in the cold state,
the low tire pressure alarm is released.
• System fault alarm
When the system failure alarm is
activated, the corresponding tire flashes,
and the status indicator of the tire
pressure monitoring system flashes for
60 seconds and stays on until the alarm
is cleared, with an audible alarm and a
text prompt.
When the vehicle is restarted after
stall, after the combination
instrument's self-check, if the tire pressure
value is displayed in gray, it means the tire
pressure value is the last recorded value.
When the vehicle reaches a certain speed,
the tire pressure will be displayed in real
time; If the status indicator of tire pressure
monitoring system lights up, pull over in time
and contact Geely Service for maintenance
as soon as possible!
 Instrument and Control

Driving Habits Guidance If any of the front engine compartment hood,

four doors and the trunk is not properly
Energy-saving guidance 1
closed, alarm information will appear on the
combination instrument to prevent
accidental door opening during driving.

3
Combined with the current road conditions,
accelerator pedal and brake pedal, etc., the
combination instrument shows the position
of the fuel-saving guide sign. 4
• At the fuel-saving driving, the guide sign
is blue, and close to the current speed,
such as gentle driving.
• Energy-saving guidance will only be
displayed when the vehicle is in economy 5
mode.

Reminder of Not Closing the

Doors

25
Instrument and Control

Menu Information and Settings

First-tier Menu Second-tier Menu
Communication record —

Maps & Navigation —

Simplicity

Personalization kits Tech

Dynamics

Alarm Information —

26
 Instrument and Control

Menu Information • If menu items are excessive beyond the

screen area, a progress bar will be
Enter the menu setting page. 1
displayed on the right side of screen,
Short press the menu button on the right
indicating the extra menu items.
side of steering wheel to open the
combination instrument menu, and then the • Select to return to the previous level, and
buttons on the right side of steering wheel the returned interface or menu items are
control the combination instrument. consistent with those before entering.
• Enter from high-tier menu to low-tier
2
Use menu
1. Menu toggle menu, the highlight bar is on the first
• When the combination instrument menu item by default.
menu is opened, toggle the first-tier In the menu setting interface, if no button
function display (i. e., the first-tier operation in 10 seconds, the menu exits
automatically. 3
menu) via the left/right selection
button on the right side of steering
wheel.
2. Menu selection
• After the first-tier function display is
4
activated, turn the selection button
up/down on the right of steering
wheel to select the second-tier
display (i. e., the second-tier menu).
Press the selection button to enable/
disable or set the function.
5
3. Selected state
• The menu items are highlighted
when selected.
• Press the selection button to enable
the function or enter the next menu.
6
• The left/right selection button can
toggle the first-tier function display.
When the menu is opened and there
are pop-ups such as alarm/caller ID or
active safety related prompts, the menu will
7
be automatically closed.

Menu setting instructions

• Enter the menu interface, and the
selection bar points to the first item by 8
default.

27
Instrument and Control

Warnings and indicators

Warnings and indicators

If the vehicle detects that one or several warning lamps or indicators need to be lit, the
system will display the relevant lamps or indicators on combination instrument.

28
 Instrument and Control

Introduction of Warnings and Indicators

Icon Name Description 1
Position lamp is on
Position lamp status indicator
Position lamp is faulty

High beam lamp status indicator High beam lamp is on 2

High beam lamp fault indicator High beam lamp is faulty

Low beam lamp status indicator Low beam lamp is on

3
Low beam lamp fault indicator Low beam lamp is faulty

Active high beam lamp is on

Active high beam control (AHBC) indicator*
4
Active high beam lamp is faulty

Manual leveling fault indicator Manual leveling function is faulty

Rear fog lamp working indicator Rear fog lamp is on

5
Left turn signal indicator Left turn signal is on

Right turn signal indicator Right turn signal is on

6
Low speed emergency brake
assist system is off

Low speed emergency brake assist system Low speed emergency brake
status indicator* assist system is working

Low speed emergency brake 7

assist system is faulty

Engine emission trouble warning indicator Engine emission is faulty

Engine system fault warning indicator Engine system is faulty

8

29
Instrument and Control

Icon Name Description

Low engine oil pressure warning indicator Low engine oil pressure

Airbag Trouble warning indicator The airbag system is faulty

High engine coolant temperature warning

High engine coolant temperature
indicator
Engine start-stop system is
activated
Engine start-stop system status indicator
Engine start-stop system is
working

Cruise Control System is on

Cruise Control System (CC) status standby
indicator*
Cruise Control System is activated

Collision mitigation support front (CMSF) Collision mitigation support front

system fault warning indicator* system is faulty

Lane keeping assist system is

activated, but the system has not
Lane keeping assist (LKA) system status started to adjust.
indicator*
Lane keeping assist system is
faulty

Rear side medium-range radar is

working

Always on: Temporary fault of rear

Blind spot monitoring status indicator* side
medium-range radar
Flash: The calibration of rear side
medium-range radar
is not completed

Performance loss/temporary
degradation of Electric Power
Electric Power Steering (EPS) status Steering
indicator
Electric Power Steering (EPS) is
faulty

30
 Instrument and Control

Icon Name Description

Always on: The tire pressure of 1

one or more tires is low
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
Flash and then always on: Tire
status indicator
pressure monitoring system is
faulty

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) is

on standby
2
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) status
is unavailable
indicator*
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) is
activated or under overspeed 3
state

G-Pilot is on standby

Both horizontal/vertical
adjustments are unavailable 4
G-Pilot status indicator*
Vertical adjustment is active, while
horizontal adjustment is inactive

Both horizontal/vertical
adjustments are active
5
Electronic Stability Control System
Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) (ESC) is faulty
status indicator Flash: Electronic Stability Control
System is working

Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) Electronic Stability Control System

OFF indicator (ESC) is off 6
Hill descent control is temporarily
unavailable

Hill descent control (HDC) status indicator Hill descent control is active
7
Hill descent control is enabled

Low fuel level warning indicator Low fuel level

Brake system status indicator Brake system is faulty 8

31
Instrument and Control
Icon Name
Brake system status indicator
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) trouble
warning indicator
Seat belt warning indicator
Electronic parking brake system (EPB)
status indicator
Auto Hold (HOLD) status indicator
Warning level indicator
Battery charging trouble warning indicator
Automatic speed limit control system (LIM)
status indicator*
Transmission status indicator
32
Description
The electronic brake force
distribution function is faulty, or the
brake fluid level is low, or the
brake fluid level sensor is faulty, or
the electronic power assist has no
power*, or the hydraulic power
assist function is weakened*
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is
faulty
Front-row seat belt is not fastened,
please fasten it
Always on: Electronic parking
brake function is enabled.
Flash: Electronic parking brake is
working, or electronic parking
brake system is faulty
Auto Hold is activated
A serious fault has occurred which
may affect the drivability of the
vehicle
Fault alarm information/notice
exists, and the corresponding text
appears on the combination
instrument display
Battery charging is faulty
Automatic speed limit control
system is on standby
Automatic speed limit control
system is activated
Automatic speed limit control
system is activated, but the
system is under driver's control
Transmission is faulty
 Instrument and Control

Icon Name Description

Transmission status indicator

Transmission performance is 1
degraded

Brake lamp fault warning indicator Braking lamp fault

Economy Mode indicator Economy Mode enabled

2
Comfort Mode indicator Comfort Mode enabled

Sport Mode indicator Sports Mode enabled

3
Smart Mode indicator Smart Mode enabled

Snow Mode indicator Snow Mode enabled

Off-road Mode indicator Off-road Mode enabled 4

Sand Mode indicator* Sand Mode enabled

When the start and stop button is in Mode II or the engine is started, some warning
lamps will perform self-check and be on for a few seconds before going out. If any fault 5
makes warning lamps constantly on or light up during driving, please pay attention to it and
contact Geely Service for maintenance as soon as possible. Otherwise severe casualty or
property loss may occur.

Black icons in the table are displayed as white in the combination instrument display.
6

33
Instrument and Control
Head Up Display*
Heads Up Display (HUD)
Introduction
Heads Up Display (HUD) is mounted in the
instrument panel in front of driver. The
displaying area of HUD is about 4 m below
and ahead of windshield, presented by
virtual image. Driver can turn it on/off, up/
down, or adjust the brightness, etc.
Head-up Display (HUD) Image
Information
1. Intelligent driving system (ADAS)
2. Vehicle speed
3. Alarm information prompt
4. Bluetooth call display
5. Road speed limit information
34
Head-up Display Settings
Set HUD
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → HUD
(head-up display). In this interface, HUD
(head-up display) can be turned on/off, and
the brightness and height of HUD display
can be adjusted. Snow Mode can also be
enabled for clear display of HUD when
driving in snow.
Height adjustment
Click and activate the brightness and height
adjustment in the HUD setting interface.
Push up/down the selection button on the
right side of steering wheel to increase or
decrease the displayed height. After the
adjustment, press the selection button on
the right side of steering wheel to save the
setting and exit.
Brightness adjustment
The brightness of HUD can be intelligently
adjusted as per ambient light. If manual
adjustment is required, click and activate the
brightness and height adjustment function in
HUD setting interface. Then press the left/
right selection button on the right side of
 Instrument and Control

steering wheel to increase/decrease the Light and Wiper

brightness. After the adjustment, press the Combination Switch
selection button on the right side of steering
1
wheel to save the setting and exit. Light Combination Switch
The visibility of HUD is affected by the
following conditions:

2
• Polarizing filter or polarized sunglasses
may affect the visibility of HUD images,
making the image dark or unclear.
• In extreme sunlight, the image part may
gradually disappear briefly and then
3
recover, which is normal.
• If light is blocked by foreign objects on
the trim cover of HUD, the image display
may be affected.
1. Light control switch
• The front windshield of HUD display is a
2. Fog lamp control switch
3. Light switch handle (control high/low
4
kind of special glass. If it needs to be
repaired, please go to Geely Service for beam and left/right turn signals)
replacement. Operations of Light Combination
• Rainstorm or wet road surface may affect Switch
the imaging, which is normal.
5

7
Position lamp
When the engine is started, turn the light
control switch in direction B till the mark
points to position , and rear position
lamps and daytime running lamps light up.
Turn the light control switch in direction A till
8

35
Instrument and Control
the mark points to position , and rear
position lamps and daytime running lamps
will not turn off.
Low beam lamp
Turn the light control switch in direction B till
the mark points to the position, and
low beam lamps light up. Turn the light
control switch in direction A till the mark
points to the position or , and the low
beam lamps will be off.
High/Low beam switch
With the low beam turned on, push the light
switch handle to the extreme position in
direction E to turn on the high beam lamps.
Push the light switch handle in direction E
again to the limit position, and high beam
lamps are off.
High beam lamps flash
Toggle the light switch handle in direction F
to the limit position, and high beam lamps
flash. Release the light switch handle, and
high beam lamps will automatically turn off;
Repeat the operation to flash high beam
lamps.
Automatic headlamp*
Turn the light control switch in B direction till
the switch mark points to AUTO, and the
headlamp automatic lighting function is
activated. The automatic light system
automatically turns headlights on/off based
on external light intensity. The automatic
light system can identify environmental road
conditions such as darkness and tunnels,
for automatic control of position lamps and
low beam lamps. When the vehicle enters
the tunnel, the position lamps and low beam
lamps will be automatically turned on, and
when the vehicle exits the tunnel, the
position lamps and low beam lamps will be
36
automatically turned off. When the external
environment is dark, the system will also
light up position lamps and low beam lamps.
Under the automatic working mode,
the system features the manual
override. If there is a light signal input, the
system will exit the automatic light mode.
Active high beam lamp*
The active high beam lamp can be turned
on/off through the light combination switch.
In the automatic light mode (i. e., AUTO),
turn the light control switch in direction B
until the mark points to the position .
The active high beam control system is
activated, the knob automatically returns to
AUTO, and the active high beam (AHBC)
status indicator on the combination
instrument lights up in white. Turn the light
control switch to the position again or pull
the handle of the light switch in direction F
by two gears, and the active high beam
control system will be turned off, and the
knob will automatically return to AUTO.
Right turn signal lamp
Turn the light switch handle in direction C to
the limit position, and the right turn signal
lamp flashes. After turning, the light switch
handle will automatically return, and the
right turn signal lamp is off.
Left turn signal lamp
Rotate the light switch handle in direction D
to the limit position, and the left turn signal
lamp flashes. After turning, the light switch
handle will automatically return, and the left
turn signal lamp is off.
Lane changing function
Briefly turn the light switch handle in
direction C or D to the middle gear. Release
 Instrument and Control

it and the handle will automatically return, Daytime running lamp

and the right/left turn signal lamp will flash.
Rear fog lamp
With the low beam lamps turned on, press
the fog lamp control switch to turn on the
rear fog lamps. Press the fog lamp control
switch again and the rear fog lamp turns
off.
Headlamp Height Adjusting Knob
Turn on daytime running lamp 1
After the vehicle is started and the low beam
lamp is off, the daytime running lamp will be
turned on.
Turn off daytime running lamp
When the low beam lamp turns on, the
2
daytime running lamp automatically turns
off.
For the configuration where the daytime
running lamp is integrated inside the
headlamp, when a turn signal lamp is
working, the daytime running lamp on the
3
relevant side will temporarily go out.

Follow Me Home
Enable Follow Me Home
4

1. Headlamp Height Adjusting Knob

This knob is used to adjust the illumination
5
height of the headlamps.
The height adjusting knob of headlamps has
four gears: 0, 1, 2, 3.
Please adjust the knob position according to
the load status:
6
0: Only the driver is in the vehicle.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
1: Only the driver and the front passenger
Vehicle Settings → Lamps → Lamp Signals.
are in the vehicle.
Select any timing in the setting interface of
2: The vehicle is fully occupied and the trunk
Follow Me Home, and Follow Me Home is
is fully loaded.
3: Only the driver is in the vehicle, and the
activated. 7
trunk is fully loaded.

When adjusting the illumination height

of the headlamps, it is not allowed to
cause glare to the drivers on the opposite 8
side.

37
Instrument and Control

Follow Me Home timing

On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Lamps → Lamp Signals.
Select the timing in the setting interface of
Follow Me Home as demand. The timing
options are 30s, 60s, and 90s. When Follow
Me Home is enabled, the timer is set to the
preset timing. Before timeout of this timer, if
any door (including trunk) is opened, the
timer will be reset to the preset time. If all
doors are closed (including trunk), the timer
When the vehicle anti-theft is released and will be reset to the preset time.
Follow Me Home is not disenabled in the Wiper Combination Switch
multimedia display, Follow Me Home can be
activated in two ways below:
• When the light combination switch is in
non-AUTO position and the vehicle is
stalled, turn the light control combination
switch in the arrow direction to the limit
position, and then release it to activate
Follow Me Home.
• At night, when the light combination
switch is in AUTO position, Follow Me
Home will be automatically activated
after the vehicle is stalled.
1. Wiper control handle
Disable Follow Me Home
2. Automatic wiper sensitivity adjustment
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
knob
Vehicle Settings → Lamps → Lamp Signals,
and then click "OFF" in the Follow Me Home If there is dust, ice or sand on the
setting interface to turn off Follow Me Home. windshield, clean it up before using
Follow Me Home will be temporarily the wiper. Do not use the wiper when the
disabled if any of the following conditions is windshield is dry. Otherwise, it may scratch
met: the windshield and affect the service life of
• The start and stop button is not turned wiper blade.
off.
• Timeout.
• High beam lamp lights up.

38

Operations of Wiper
Combination Switch
Inching wiping of front wipers
Toggle the wiper control handle in direction
B and release the handle. The handle will
automatically return to O position and the
front wiper will perform inching wiping.
Turn off front wipers
When the wiper control handle is at O
position, the front wiper is off.
Automatic wiping of front wipers
Toggle the wiper control handle in direction
A to AUTO position, and the front wiper
wipes intermittently. The wiping speed is
automatically adjusted by the wiper control
system as per rainfall.
The sensitivity of wiper system to rainfall
can be adjusted by rotating the automatic
wiper sensitivity adjustment knob. When the
scale bar pointed by the mark narrows
down (in direction C), it indicates that the
sensitivity of the wiper system to rainfall
turns weak.
Low-speed wiping of front wipers
When the wiper control handle is in O
position, turn two gears in direction A, and
the front wiper wipes at a low speed.
39
Instrument and Control
High-speed wiping of front wipers
When the wiper control handle is in O
position, turn three gears in direction A, and
1
the front wiper wipes at a high speed.
Front windshield wiper nozzle heating*
When the vehicle is started and the ambient
temperature is low (about <4℃), the nozzle
heating function is automatically activated. If 2
the ambient temperature is higher than
about 4℃, the heating function will be
automatically turned off.
Front windshield washing
Turn the wiper control handle in direction D, 3
and the wiper will wipe as the front
windshield washer sprays water. After the
wiper control handle is released, the washer
will stop spraying water and the cleaning will
be over, and the wiper will continue to work 4
a few times and then reset.
Front Wiper Service Position
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Wiper.
Enable the front wiper maintenance position
5
function in this interface. Please refer to the
section "Wiper Blade" in the chapter "Repair
and Maintenance".
Wiping and brushing of rear wiper
6
7
8
Instrument and Control

Press , and the rear wiper intermittently Rainfall Sensor

wipes. Press , and the rear wiper
continuously wipes. If the button is in the
center, it indicates that the rear wiper stops
wiping.
Reversing-linked rear wiper

The sunlight sensor is integrated with the

rainfall sensor and the ambient light sensor.
The rainfall sensor is installed behind the
front windshield. It can adjust the action of
wipers based on the rain amount on the
On the multimedia display, click in turn: windshield.
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Wiper.
Please keep the rainfall sensor area
Enable the rear wiper associated with
clean, to avoid affecting the sensitivity
reversing function in this interface. After this
of the rainfall sensor and the use of wipers.
function is enabled, when the front wiper is
working (low-speed wiping, high-speed
wiping), put the shift lever into R position,
and the rear wiper will automatically enter
the continuous wiping mode.
Washing of rear windshield
Turn the wiper control handle in direction A,
and the wiper will wipe as the rear
windshield washer sprays water. After the
wiper control handle is released, the washer
will stop spraying water, and the wiper will
return to the original position after several
wipes.

40

Steering wheel
Horn
Press the horn icon area (as shown by the
arrow) on the steering wheel and the horn
will work.
The horn icon area on the steering
wheel is also the cover plate of the
driver seat airbag. Due to the special
functional requirements of the driver seat
airbag, do not press or hit the driver seat
airbag cover plate violently when using the
horn, to avoid the deployment of the driver
seat airbag and personal injury.
41
Instrument and Control
Steering Wheel Heating*
Enable/Disenable Manually 1
3
When the temperature in vehicle is low and
the engine is started, on the multimedia
display, click in turn: Air Conditioning →
Seat → Heating, and then set the steering 4
wheel heating in this interface.
When 1 indicator lamp below the steering
wheel heating adjustment button lights up, it
indicates that the steering wheel heating is
at a low level; When the 3 indicator lamps
5
below the steering wheel heating
adjustment button light up, it indicates that
the steering wheel heating is at a high level;
When all 3 indicator lamps below the
steering wheel heating adjustment button go
6
out, it indicates that the steering wheel
heating is off.
After the temperature of steering wheel
reaches the set temperature level, the
steering wheel heating system will
automatically control the temperature
7
fluctuation, to maintain the temperature of
steering wheel at the target level.
Instrument and Control
Enable/Disenable Automatically
When the temperature in vehicle is low and
the engine is started, on the multimedia
display, click in turn: Vehicle Settings →
More Settings → Automatic Heating of
Steering Wheel, and the automatic heating
of steering wheel is enabled. The steering
wheel heating level can be adjusted on the
manual enabling interface.
• When the steering wheel heating
function is enabled, it is at the 3rd level
by default.
• The automatic heating of steering wheel
is on by default when the vehicle is
started.
• When the ambient temperature is higher
than the heating target temperature, the
heating will automatically turn off in 100
seconds.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
vehicle is traveling. Otherwise
casualty or property loss may occur.
42
After adjusting the steering wheel's
position, make sure that the steering
wheel is locked. Otherwise casualty or
property loss may occur.
1. Steering wheel locking lever
Adjust the steering wheel to a proper
position as per following steps:
1. Adjust to a proper driving position.
2. Turn the steering wheel to the straight-
line running position.
3. Release fully the steering wheel locking
lever.
4. Use both hands to hold firmly the
steering wheel and adjust it back/forth
(direction B), up/down (direction A) to
the optimal position.
5. After adjusting the steering wheel to a
proper position, fully fold the steering
wheel locking lever to lock steering
wheel in the new position.
Steering Force Setting of
Steering Wheel
The driver should choose an
appropriate steering mode according
to driving skill and road conditions.

When the start and stop button is in Mode I
or Mode II, on the multimedia display, click
in turn: Vehicle Settings → Quick Control →
Steering Force of Steering Wheel, and then
select the required steering force in the
steering force adjustment interface. In
addition, the linkage of steering force and
driving mode can be enabled in the steering
force setting interface. After the function is
enabled, the steering force of steering wheel
will match the selected driving mode.
Three steering forces of steering wheel are
optional in the steering force setting:
• Lady: compared with standard mode, the
steering assistance increases. It feels
gentle and flexible.
Standard mode: moderate steering
• 6
assistance, moderate steering feeling.
• Gentleman: compared with standard
mode, steering assistance decreases. It
feels firmly heavy.
43
Instrument and Control
Steering Wheel Buttons
Left Steering Wheel Controls 1
(Type I)
3
1. Menu switch button: switch leftward the
G-Pilot/Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC)/ Automatic Speed Limit Control 4
System (LIM).
2. Intelligent driving button: resumes
cruising at the last exit speed (available
in G-Pilot/Adaptive Cruise Control
System (ACC)/ Automatic Speed Limit 5
Control System (LIM) functions).
3. Inter-vehicle time distance adjustment
button: adjust the following distance of
cruise (only available in G-Pilot/
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
functions).
4. Menu switch button: switch rightward
the G-Pilot/ Adaptive Cruise Control
System (ACC)/ Automatic Speed Limit
Control System (LIM) functions.
7
5. Speed adjustment and confirm button:
• Push this button upward to increase
the cruise speed.
• Push this button downward to
decrease the cruise speed.
8
Instrument and Control
• Press this button to activate and
confirm the G-Pilot/ Adaptive Cruise
Control System (ACC)/ Automatic
Speed Limit Control System (LIM)
functions.
6. CNCL button: cancel the G-Pilot/
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)/
Automatic Speed Limit Control System
(LIM) functions.
Left Steering Wheel Controls
(Type II)
1. Menu switch button: switch leftward the
Cruise Control System/Automatic
Speed Limit Control System functions.
2. Cruise control resume button: resume
cruise at the last exit speed.
3. Menu switch button: switch rightward
the Cruise Control System/ Automatic
Speed Limit Control System functions.
4. Speed adjustment and confirm button:
• Push this button upward to increase
the cruise speed.
• Push this button downward to
decrease the cruise speed.
• Press this button to activate and
confirm the Cruise Control System/
44
Automatic Speed Limit Control
System functions.
5. CNCL button: cancel the Cruise Control
System/Automatic Speed Limit Control
System functions.
Right Steering Wheel Controls
1. Left selection button: When the
combination instrument menu is
opened, short press this button to select
items leftward in the combination
instrument menu. When the
combination instrument menu is closed,
short press this button to toggle to the
previous song or channel. Press and
hold this button to rewind the song.
2. SRC button: Short press to switch
multimedia audio source.
3. Mute button: Short press this button to
switch to the mute mode. Short press
this button again to exit the mute mode.
4. Right selection button: When the
combination instrument menu is
opened, short press this button to select
items rightward in the combination
instrument menu. When the
combination instrument menu is closed,
short press this button to toggle to the
 Instrument and Control

next song or channel. Press and hold
this button to fast forward the song.
5. Custom function button: The function
opened by this button depends on the
settings in the multimedia display.
the combination instrument. When the
combination instrument menu is closed,
the control of steering wheel selection
1
button is on the multimedia.

On the multimedia display, click in turn:

Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings →
4
Steering Wheel Custom Button, and
then select the function to be linked with
the custom button as demand.
6. Selection button: When the combination
instrument menu is opened, roll the
5
selection button to select the previous/
next item in the combination instrument
menu. Press this button to select the
corresponding menu item. When the
combination instrument menu is closed, 6
roll the selection button to adjust the
volume of multimedia audio source, and
press this button to block general alarm
messages or pause the multimedia
audio source. 7
7. Menu button: Short press this button to
open/close the combination instrument
menu. When the combination
instrument menu is opened, the control
of steering wheel selection button is on 8

45
Instrument and Control

Rearview Mirror Do not touch the exterior rearview mirror

when it's adjusted, to avoid personal injury.
Exterior Rearview Mirror
Do not adjust the exterior rearview
Adjustment of the Exterior
mirror while the vehicle is running.
Rearview Mirrors
Otherwise casualty or property loss may
occur.

Before driving the vehicle, the exterior

rearview mirrors must be deployed
and adjusted correctly.
The exterior rearview mirror adjustment
switch is on the trim panel of the driver side
door.

1. When the start and stop button is in

1. Exterior rearview mirror adjustment
switch
Objects seen from exterior rearview
mirror is farther than the actual
distance. Adjust your driving posture before
adjusting the exterior rearview mirrors.
When the exterior rearview mirror is frozen,
do not operate the adjustment switch of
exterior rearview mirror or scrape the ice on
the rearview mirror with a sharp tool.
Instead, use the heating function of exterior
rearview mirror to remove the ice on the
surface of exterior rearview mirror. Then
adjust the exterior rearview mirror.
Mode I or Mode II or the engine is
started, rotate exterior rearview mirror
adjustment switch so that the mark
on the switch points to L (left) or R
(right) to select the left/right exterior
mirror;
2. Toggle the exterior rearview mirror
adjustment switch back/forth, left/right
to adjust the angle of exterior rearview
mirror glass;
3. After adjustment, reset the exterior
mirror adjustment switch to the initial
position (0).
Folding of the Exterior Rearview
Mirrors
The exterior rearview mirror is foldable for
your convenience to drive through narrow
roadways and park the vehicle.

46

Electrically foldable exterior rearview
mirrors
When the start and stop button is in Mode I
or Mode II or the engine is started, rotate the
exterior rearview mirror adjustment switch
so that the mark on the exterior rearview
mirror adjustment switch points to the
position , and the exterior rearview mirror
is folded. Rotate the exterior rearview mirror
adjustment switch to other positions to
unfold the exterior rearview mirror.
Anti-play of exterior rearview mirror
When the exterior rearview mirror is
frequently folded/unfolded, the exterior
rearview mirror will enter the anti-play mode
for 2 minutes. In the anti-play mode, the
exterior rearview mirror cannot be
electrically folded.
Auto unfolding of exterior rearview
mirrors
When exterior rearview mirrors are folded, if
the vehicle speed is greater than or equal to
50 km/h, exterior rearview mirrors will
automatically unfold.
47
Instrument and Control
Folding of Exterior Rearview
Mirrors after Vehicle Locking*
1
3
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings →
Exterior Rearview Mirrors. Enable/disable
the folding of exterior rearview mirrors after
vehicle locking in this interface. 4
When the exterior rearview mirror
adjustment switch is in the unfolded position
and the exterior rearview mirror is in the
folded state triggered by the locking action
of the vehicle, the exterior rearview mirror 5
will automatically unfold after the vehicle is
unlocked or the engine is started.
When the exterior rearview mirror
adjustment switch is at the unfolded position
and the exterior rearview mirror is in the 6
unfolded state, the exterior rearview mirror
will automatically fold after the vehicle is
locked.
Electrical Heating & Defrosting of
Exterior Rearview Mirrors 7
Press the Exterior Rearview Mirror/Rear
Windshield Defrosting and Defogging button
on the front air-conditioning control panel,
and the button indicator lights up. The
8
heating of exterior rearview mirror and the
Instrument and Control

defrosting of rear windshield are activated Mechanical dimming interior rearview

simultaneously, and are automatically mirrors
deactivated in 5-15 minutes. The time
depends on the ambient temperature. The
lower the ambient temperature, the longer
the heating time. For details, see the section
"Heating, Ventilation and A/C" in "A/C
System".
Interior Rearview Mirror
Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjustment
Do not adjust the interior rearview
mirror while the vehicle is running.
Push the bottom handle of the interior
Otherwise casualty or property loss may
rearview mirror to change the angle of view
occur.
to realize the dimming function, pull the
handle back to return the interior rearview
mirror to the normal position, and discharge
the dimming function.
Electronic dimming interior mirrors*

The interior rearview mirror is fixed on the

front windshield. It can be rotated to adjust
the angle of view.

After the engine is started, the interior

rearview mirror senses the intensity of
incident light through the light sensor to
trigger the electronic glare-free function.
If the electronic glare-free function is
activated, the interior rearview mirror will
automatically perform anti-glare according

48
 Instrument and Control

to the incident light at the rear. When the Window

start and stop button is off or the shift lever
Power windows 1
is engaged in reverse gear, the electronic
glare-free function automatically turns off. Do not leave children, incapacitated
adults or pets in the locked vehicle
The electronic dimming function of
with windows closed. They may suffer
interior rearview mirror works only
personal injury or death due to the high
when the incident light at interior rearview
temperature and the inability to open the 2
mirror is not affected by other objects.
doors and windows.
It is forbidden to paste stickers or install a
dashboard camera in front of the interior Do not try to test the anti-pinch
rearview mirror, so as not to affect its function with your body, otherwise, it
function. may cause personal injury or death.
When the window is closed and the top of
3
The electronic glare-free interior
the window is less than 4 mm from the
rearview mirror is equipped with
window frame, the anti-pinch function may
sensors. Do not hang anything on the
not work.
interior rearview mirror or use glass
detergent. Otherwise the electronic glare- 4
free interior rearview mirror may not work
properly.

1. Window Switch FL 6
2. Window Switch RL
3. Window Locking Switch
4. Window Switch FR
5. Window Switch RR
7
Manual Operation
Open: Press down the window switch to the
manual lowering gear (first gear) and hold it,
to open the window.
8

49
Instrument and Control
Close: Pull up the window switch to the
manual lifting gear (first gear) and hold it, to
close the window.
When the window is manually opened or
closed, release the switch and the window
will stop moving.
Automatic Operation
Open: Press down the window switch to the
automatic lowering gear (second gear) and
then release it, to automatically open the
window.
Close: Pull up the window switch to the
automatic lifting gear (second gear) and
then release it, to automatically close the
window.
While the window is automatically opened or
closed, if the window switch is pressed
down or pulled up again, the window will
stop moving.
Window Locking Switch
Window locking switch is on the driver side
door, behind the window switch.
Press the switch to disable the open/close
operation on rear windows. When the
locking function is activated, the window
locking indicator lights up, and the rear
window can still be opened/closed by the
driver side window switch.
To resume the operation of rear window,
press the window locking switch again to
unlock. The window locking switch indicator
will go out, and the locking function will be
turned off.
50
Power Window Thermal
Protection
If the window is operated repeatedly in a
short time, it may cause the power window
control switch to fail due to the protection of
the motor life. Wait for a while, and the
power window operation will be recovered.
If the waiting time for automatic
recovery is long and you need to
operate the window immediately, you can
power off and restart the vehicle to operate
the power window.
Forbidden to Open Windows at
High Speed
When the vehicle speed is greater than 180
km/h, the four windows will be forbidden to
open.
Anti-pinch Function
During the automatic closing operation, if an
obstacle is caught at the anti-pinch area, the
window will automatically stop and return to
the initial state. If the window is violently
impacted, this function may work even if no
objects are caught. If the anti-pinch function
of power windows does not work properly,
adaptive-learning of power windows is
required.
At the moment before the window is
completely closed (the top of glass is
less than 4 mm from the window frame), if
something gets stuck, the anti-pinch
function may not work.
Do not try the anti-pinch function by
intentionally letting the window catch
any part of the body. Otherwise it may
cause serious injury or even death.

Adaptive-learning of Anti-pinch
Power Window
Window self-learning without position
In this case, the window has no automatic
closing function, and it can be manually
closed or automatically/manually opened.
Self-learning method is as follows:
Pull up the window switch until the window
is fully closed, and continue to pull up the
switch and hold for 3 seconds, and then
release it. Then the power window will have
the automatic closing and anti-pinch
functions.
Window self-learning without
initialization data
In this case, the window has no automatic
closing function, and it can be manually
closed or automatically/manually opened.
Self-learning method is as follows:
1. Pull up the window switch until the
window is fully closed, and continue to
pull up the switch and hold for 3
seconds, and then release it;
2. Press down the window switch until the
window is fully opened, and continue to
press the switch and hold for 3 seconds,
and then release it;
3. Pull up the window switch until the
window is fully closed, and continue to
pull up the switch and hold for 3
seconds, and then release it. Then the
power window will relearn the window
initialization data, and has the automatic
closing and anti-pinch functions.
Window position upward deviation self-
learning
In this case, the window cannot be fully
closed automatically (when the window
51
Instrument and Control
glass runs to the fully closed state, the anti-
pinch function will be triggered and it will
return).
1
Self-learning method is as follows:
1. Pull up the window switch until the
window is fully closed. After the window
triggers the anti-pinch function and
returns, release the switch. Pull up the 2
window switch until the window is fully
closed within 5 seconds. After the
window triggers the anti-pinch function
and returns, release the switch;
2. Pull up the window switch until the 3
window is fully closed within 5 seconds,
and continue to pull up the switch and
hold for 3 seconds, and then release it.
Then the power window has the
automatic closing and anti-pinch 4
functions.
If the power window does not work normally
after the above operations, contact Geely
Service for maintenance.
Delay Operation Function 5
No door is opened. Within 120 seconds
after the start and stop button is turned off,
window operations are available via the
window switch.
6
Open/Close Windows Remotely
via Smart Key
When the start and stop button is off, and
the fuel filler cap, sunroof, trunk, front
engine compartment hood, and four doors 7
are all closed, press and hold the unlock
button on the smart key, and the four
windows will open simultaneously; Press
and hold the lock button on the smart key,
8
Instrument and Control

and the four windows will be closed Sunroof

simultaneously.
Panoramic Sunroof
Auto Window Closing in Rain
When the vehicle is stalled and locked for
guard status with sunroof and power
windows opened, the vehicle can
automatically close the sunroof and power
windows if it suddenly rains.

If the window/sunroof doesn't perform

self-learning, the window cannot be
automatically closed in rain.

Timeout Auto Window Closing

When the vehicle is stalled and under guard
status for 28 hours, if the sunroof or power
window is open, the vehicle will
automatically close the power window,
sunroof, and sunroof sunshade.

The sunroof switch is at the light control

panel on the front compartment roof.

The sunroof switch can still be

operated within 2 minutes after the
vehicle is stalled.

• When the vehicle is running, all

occupants should keep their heads,
hands and other parts of their body away
from the opening of sunroof, or otherwise
the occupants may be injured in

52

emergent brake or unexpected
accidents.
• When the sunroof is operating, do not put
your head and other parts of your body
out of the sunroof.
• Check that smart key is not left inside
before leaving the vehicle.
• Do not leave kids in the vehicle alone, to
avoid severe accidents in case that they
play with sunroof switch.
• When closing the sunroof, make sure
that all occupants' heads, hands and
other parts of their body are away from
the opening of sunroof.
• Do not sit around the opening of sunroof.
If children have any accident related
to the sunroof in the vehicle, the
guardian shall be responsible.
When there is frozen ice on the
sunroof, do not open the sunroof so
as to avoid damaging the sunroof parts due
to overloading of sunroof.
Operating Conditions of Sunroof
Before the sunroof is operated, the start and
stop button should be in Mode I or Mode II.
Temperature requirement
• When the temperature is -20~85℃: the
sunroof and sunshade are fully functional
for normal operation, responding to
smart key and voice commands.
• When the temperature is -30~-20℃: only
the manual closing of sunroof is
available, no anti-pinch function. No
response to smart key and voice
commands; only manual operations are
available for sunroof sunshade, no
53
Instrument and Control
automatic operation and anti-pinch
function. No response to smart key and
voice commands.
1
Sunroof opening/closing
Automatic operation of sunroof
When the sunroof shade is fully opened,
push the sunroof switch rearward to the limit 2
position and release it. The sunroof glass
will automatically operate to the fully open
position.
Push the sunroof switch forward to the limit
position and release it, and the sunroof 3
glass will automatically operate to the fully
closed position.
During the automatic running of sunroof
glass, if the switch is operated in the
opposite running direction, the sunroof glass 4
will stop running.
Quick operation of sunroof
Push the sunroof switch rearward to the limit
position twice in a row and then release it,
and the sunroof glass and sunroof
5
sunshade will automatically open
simultaneously .
Push the sunroof switch forward to the limit
position twice in a row and then release it,
and the sunroof glass and sunroof
sunshade will automatically close
6
simultaneously.
Press the switch again during the quick
operation of sunroof glass, and the sunroof
glass will stop running.
Manual operation of sunroof 7
When the sunroof shade has been fully
opened, push the sunroof switch rearward
to the first gear, and the sunroof glass will
be opened manually. After the sunroof
8
Instrument and Control

switch is released, the sunroof glass will open the sunroof manually/automatically
stop running. again, and the sunroof glass will run to the
Push the sunroof switch forward to the first fully open position.
gear, and the sunroof glass will be manually
Uplift Opening/Closing
closed. After the sunroof switch is released,
the sunroof glass will stop running.
Open/close sunroof via the multimedia
display

Uplift opening
Press the end of sunroof switch upward,
and the sunroof uplift is activated.
Uplift closing
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
If the sunroof is in the uplift position, press
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control →
the end of sunroof switch downward and the
Sunroof and Sunshade, and then slide to
sunroof is closed.
open/close the sunroof as demand in this
When the uplift opening/closing of sunroof, it
interface. During the opening or closing of
cannot be suspended by the sunroof switch.
sunroof, the multimedia display will also
The sunroof glass will automatically operate
show the sunroof animation.
to the full uplift or fully closed position.
The animation does not represent the
Remotely Close the Sunroof
actual opening.
When the start and stop button is off, and
Comfortable Position of Sunroof the fuel filler cap, trunk, front engine
When the sunroof glass is at about 70% of compartment hood, and four doors are all
full openness, the wind noise of vehicle is closed, press and hold the lock button on
the lowest when the vehicle travels at high the smart key, and sunroof will operate and
speed. fully close.
When the vehicle speed is greater than 5
km/h, open the sunroof manually/
automatically, and the sunroof will operate
to the comfortable position first. Operate to

54

Anti-pinch Protection
Uplift an-pinch
• When the sunroof glass is uplifted and it
meets barrier, the uplift action will stop.
• When the sunroof glass is closed at the
uplift position and it meets barrier, the
sunroof glass will return to the fully uplift
position.
Anti-pinch of sunroof glass and
sunshade
• When the sunroof glass or sunshade
slides to open and it meets barriers, it will
retreat 5mm or to the fully closed
position.
• When the sunroof glass or sunshade
slides to close and it meets barriers, it will
retreat 200mm or to the fully opened
position.
When the sunroof is running, if the
anti-pinch occurs once, the anti-pinch
function and the automatic running function
will be suspended within 10 seconds (i. e.,
the sunroof can only be operated manually
at the time). 10 seconds later, the anti-pinch
function and automatic operation function
will be recovered.
Auto Window Closing in Rain
When the vehicle is stalled and locked for
guard status with sunroof and power
windows opened, if it suddenly rains, the
vehicle can automatically close the sunroof
and power windows.
If the window/sunroof doesn't perform
self-learning, the window cannot be
automatically closed in rain.
55
Instrument and Control
Timeout Auto Window Closing
When the vehicle is stalled and under guard 1
status for 28 hours, if the sunroof or power
window is open, the vehicle will
automatically close the power window,
sunroof, and sunroof sunshade.
Icebreaking 2
When anti-pinch is triggered once by the
sunroof glass/sunshade, the icebreaking
function will be activated, and anti-pinch will
no longer be available when the sunroof
glass/sunshade is operated in the same
3
direction again.
After the icebreaking function is activated,
the system will only support the manual
operation, and the automatic operation
command of the switch will also be regarded 4
as manual operation command.
When the following events occur, the ice-
breaking function will be released and the
anti-pinch function will be reactivated:
• 10 seconds after the anti-pinch 5
operation.
• After the next operation stops.
• Operate the switch in the opposite
direction.
• Remote control operation. 6
Sunroof Self-learning
Sunroof self-learning conditions
When the temperature is greater than 0℃,
the start and stop button is in Mode II and 7
the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h, the
sunroof self-learning is available.
It is recommended to perform self-
learning when the engine is started.
8
Instrument and Control
There are four kinds of sunroof self-learning,
namely, sunroof self-learning without
position, sunroof self-learning with position,
sunroof self-learning with position deviation
and sunroof false-anti-pinch self-learning.
Sunroof self-learning without position
In this case, the sunroof has no opening
function and automatic operation function. It
can only be manually closed.
Self-learning method is as follows:
1. Push the sunroof switch forward to the
first position (Do not release it during it.
Do not push the sunroof switch to the
limit position).
2. Then the self-learning logic of sunroof is:
the sunroof glass and the sunshade will
run until fully closed → fully opened →
fully closed.
3. When the sunroof glass and sunshade
are fully closed for the second time
without any further operation, the
sunroof self-learning is completed.
Sunroof self-learning with position
Then the sunroof can be operated manually
or automatically.
Self-learning method is as follows:
1. Run the sunroof glass and sunshade
both to the fully closed position and then
release the sunroof switch.
2. Push the sunroof switch forward to the
first position and hold it for 10 seconds
or above.
3. Then the self-learning logic of sunroof is:
the sunroof glass and the sunshade will
run until fully closed → fully opened →
fully closed.
4. When the sunroof glass and sunshade
are fully closed for the second time
56
without any further operation, the
sunroof self-learning is completed.
Sunroof self-learning with position
deviation
Then the sunroof cannot be automatically
and fully closed (when the sunroof glass
runs to the fully closed position, the anti-
pinch function will be triggered and it
returns).
Self-learning method is as follows:
1. Push the sunroof switch forward to the
limit position and release it, and the
sunroof glass will automatically operate
to the fully closed position, trigger anti-
pinch and return.
2. Within 10 seconds after triggering the
anti-pinch and returning, push the
sunroof switch forward to the first
position to trigger the icebreaking
function, so that the sunroof glass runs
to the fully closed position. Then the
sunroof will stall (the motor stall noise
can be heard).
3. Release the sunroof switch, and push
the sunroof switch forward to the first
position again, and the sunroof will stall
again.
4. Push and hold the sunroof switch
forward for 10 seconds or above.
5. Then the sunroof position is actively lost,
and it enters the without-position status.
6. Start the self-learning again, and the
subsequent self-learning method is
consistent with "sunroof self-learning
without position".
 Instrument and Control

Sunroof false-anti-pinch self-learning Sunroof Sunshade

During the automatic closing, if there is no
barrier, the sunroof automatically triggers
1
the anti-pinch and returns.
Self-learning method is as follows:
1. Push the sunroof switch forward to the
limit position and release it, and the
sunroof automatically triggers anti-pinch 2
and returns.
2. Within 10 seconds after triggering the
anti-pinch and returning, push the
sunroof switch forward to the first
position to trigger the icebreaking The opening/closing of sunroof glass and
3
function, so that the sunroof glass runs sunshade can be operated by the sunroof
to the fully closed position. switch on the front compartment light control
3. Start the self-learning again, and the panel.
subsequent self-learning method is Automatic operation of sunroof
consistent with "sunroof self-learning sunshade 4
with position". Push the sunroof switch rearward to the limit
position and release it, and the sunshade
Maintenance
will automatically operate to the fully opened
Maintenance of sunroof glass position.
Use glass cleaner to clean the glass panel Push the sunroof switch forward to the limit 5
of sunroof. Do not use viscous cleaners! position and release it. The sunroof glass is
Maintenance of sunroof closed first, and the sunshade will
• If the vehicle often uses sunroof in windy automatically operate to the fully closed
and dusty environments, wet sponges status.
can be used regularly to clean the dust During the automatic running of sunroof 6
and soil around the glass strips. sunshade, if the switch is operated in the
• If the vehicle is parked or the sunroof is opposite direction, the sunshade will stop
not used for a long term, strips around running.
the sunroof can be cleaned with fine Quick operation of sunroof sunshade
talcum powder or specific lubricant for Push the sunroof switch rearward to the limit
7
the strips. position twice in a row and then release it,
• When washing the vehicle, check and the sunroof glass and sunroof
whether the sunroof strips, drain holes sunshade will automatically open
and grooves are covered by dust, leaves, simultaneously .
branches and other foreign matters. Push the sunroof switch forward to the limit
8
Clean them up if any. position twice in a row and then release it,

57
Instrument and Control

and the sunroof glass and sunroof enabled in this interface. Only when the
sunshade will automatically close sunroof is fully closed will the sunshade be
simultaneously. automatically closed upon vehicle locking.
Press the switch again during the quick
The animation does not represent the
operation of sunshade, and the sunshade
actual opening.
will stop running.
Manual operation of sunroof sunshade Do not squeeze the sunshade to
Push the sunroof switch rearward to the first avoid the sunshade being damaged
position, and the sunshade will be manually or falling off.
opened. Release it and the sunshade will
When the vehicle is parked for a long
stop running.
time, it is recommended to close the
When the sunroof glass is fully closed and
sunshade. It is best to park it in the garage
the sunshade is fully opened, push the
to prevent temperature rise in vehicle due to
sunroof switch forward to the first position,
long-term exposure to the sun and damage
and the sunshade will be closed manually.
to the interiors.
Release it and the sunshade will stop
running.
Open/close sunshade via the
multimedia display

On the multimedia display, click in turn:

Vehicle Settings → Quick Control →
Sunroof and Sunshade, and then slide to
open/close the sunshade as demand in this
interface. During the opening or closing of
sunshade, the multimedia display will also
show the sunshade animation.
In addition, the automatic closing of
sunshade when the vehicle is locked can be

58
 Instrument and Control

Interior Lamp After the four doors are unlocked via smart
key or touched and unlocked via door
Front Interior Lamps 1
handle, if any door (excluding trunk) is
Front Interior Lamps opened before the interior lamp goes out,
the interior lamp will be constantly on from
the time when the door is opened. After the
engine is started, all the four doors are
closed, and the interior lamp will go out 2
quickly. If the start and stop button is in
Mode II and all the four doors are closed,
the interior lamp will go out slowly. If the
start and stop button is in Mode 0 or Mode I
and all four doors are closed, the interior 3
lamp will slowly go out in 30 seconds. The
door control function of interior lamp can be
1. Left interior lamp switch disabled in the multimedia display.

2. Interior lamp switch Avoid using front interior lamps when

3. Right interior lamp switch driving at night. Bright light may affect
4
driver's operation and cause traffic
Operations of Front Interior
Lamps accidents.

Press the left/right front interior lamp switch,

Compartment Lamp Door-control
Function 5
to separately and individually turn on/off the
left/right front interior lamp; Press the
interior lamp switch and front/rear interior
lamps can be simultaneously turned on/off.

When using the door-control function

of interior lamps to turn on the left/
6
right interior lamp, the corresponding lamp
can be turned off by pressing the left/right
interior lamp switch.
When the four locked doors are unlocked at
night and the welcome light is triggered, the 7
interior lamp will automatically light up. If the
The door-control function of compartment
door is not opened, the interior lamp will be
lamp is enabled by default. To disable it, on
constantly on. During which, if it is locked
the multimedia display, click in turn: Vehicle
via smart key or touched and locked via
Settings → Lamps → Gated lights, and then
door handle, the interior lamp will go out.
disable door-control lamps in this interface.
8

59
Instrument and Control

Turn on Rear Interior Lamps

• In a dim environment, when the four
doors and the trunk are closed, turn off
the start and stop button and the
compartment lamp will turn on gradually.
• In a dim environment, when the four
doors and the trunk are closed, unlock
and trigger the welcome light function
and the compartment lamp will light up
automatically.
• In a dim environment, when the door-
control function is enabled, if any door is
opened, the compartment lamp will turn 1. Rear Interior Lamps
on gradually.
2. Rear interior lamp switch
Turn off
Press the left/right rear interior lamp switch,
• With the four doors and the rear doors
and the corresponding rear interior lamp can
closed, after starting the vehicle, the
be turned on or off.
interior lamps gradually go out.
Press and hold the left/right rear interior
• With the four doors and the rear doors lamp switch, and the brightness of rear
closed, when the lock command is interior lamp can be adjusted.
received at stalling, the compartment
lamp goes out gradually. If the interior lamp switch is in ON
• The start and stop button is in Mode II, position, please turn off the interior
the compartment lamp will go out lamps after leaving the vehicle to avoid the
gradually when all doors are closed and battery from draining.
some doors are not locked.
Ambient lamp*
• If the start and stop button is in Mode 0 or
Mode I and all four doors are closed, the In the multimedia display, when the
interior lamp will slowly go out in 30 brightness on the mode interface of
seconds. ambient lamp is set to level 0, the ambient
lamp will not light up.

60
 Instrument and Control

Door Ambient Lamp • Farewell ambient lamp: After the vehicle

is stalled, the ambient lamp will slowly go
out.
1
Ambient lamp mode

3
Door ambient lamp is installed on the door
trim panel of driver side and front passenger
side.
In the ambient lamp mode setting menu,
Ambient Lamp Settings
custom mode or driving-related mode can
be selected. 4
• Custom mode: After selecting the custom
mode, the lighting mode of ambient lamp
can be set as pure color or breathing.
When pure color is selected, the color
and brightness of ambient lamp can be 5
customized.
• Related to the driving mode: After the
driving-related mode is selected, the
lighting mode of ambient lamp will be
related to the selected driving mode. 6
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Lighting → Ambient
Lamp Mode. The ambient lamp mode can
be enabled/disabled in this interface.
Welcome ambient lamp and farewell 7
ambient lamp can also be enabled/disabled
in the lighting interface.
• Welcome ambient lamp: After the vehicle
is unlocked, open the driver side door,
and the ambient lamp will light up and 8
breathe with a certain frequency.

61
Instrument and Control

Glove Box Lamp Outdoor Lamp

Welcome light*

When the glove box is opened, the glove

box lamp will light up, and when the glove
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
box is closed, it will go out automatically.
Vehicle Settings → Lamps → Lamp Signals,
Trunk lamp
and then enable the welcome light function
under the setting interface. The vehicle is
unlocked, and the low beam lamp, position
lamp and compartment lamp light up.
Exterior Rearview Mirror
Ground Lamps*

When the trunk is opened, the left trunk

lamp lights up automatically.

When the welcome light is turned on, the

vehicle is unlocked or Follow Me Home is
activated, the exterior rearview mirror
ground lamps light up.

62
 Instrument and Control

In-vehicle Device The hook can only be used for

hanging light and portable items, and
Glove box 1
the maximum load shall not exceed 2kg.

Storage Box
Storage Box on Door

3
The glove box is located at the front
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Press the glove box button inward to open
the glove box. Push the glove box back 4
inward to close it. All four doors have storage boxes at the
Hook in glove box lower part of the four door trim panels for
storage of small items.

Front Storage Box

Upper storage box of auxiliary console 5
(Type I)

The hook is at the upper edge of the inner

side of glove box cover. To use it, open the
7
glove box and then flip the hook out. When it
is not in use, flip the hook to the locking
position inside the glove box to fasten and
fix it.

63
Instrument and Control

Upper storage box of auxiliary console Rear Storage Box

(Type II)
Type 1

This vehicle features an open storage box at

Type 2
the upper part of the auxiliary console,
which can be used directly.
Lower storage box of auxiliary console

An open storage box is designed at the rear

part of auxiliary console for storage of small
items.
A storage box is designed at the lower part
of auxiliary console for storage of small
items.

64
 Instrument and Control

Sun Visor and Cosmetic closed, the mirror lamp will automatically go
Mirror out.
Ticket Holder 1

3
The driver's side and front passenger side of
this vehicle are equipped with sun visors. It is used for placing small and light objects
Turn down the sun visor, or pull it out of the (e.g., invoices).
bracket and rotate it towards the door to Center Armrest
prevent glare. 4
Front Center Armrest
The cosmetic mirror is equipped in sun
visor. Push the mirror cover plate left/right to
use it.

Cosmetic Mirror Lamp

5

A console box is designed under the center

This vehicle features the cosmetic mirror
lamp. When the mirror cover plate is pushed
open, the mirror lamp will light up
automatically. When the cover plate is
armrest of the front row seats, which can be
seen by turning up the center armrest.
7
Opening the front center armrest may
affect the movement of driver's arm,
which may result in accidents and injuries.
The storage box in the center armrest
should always remain closed during driving. 8

65
Instrument and Control

Rear Center Armrest Do not put any open cup on the cup
holder while driving! Otherwise, drinks
may be spilled when braking, and the
vehicle and electrical devices may be
damaged.

Rear Cup Holder

The rear center armrest is in the middle of

rear seatbacks. Pull it downward to open
and use it.
Cup holder
Front Cup Holder
A rear cup holder is on the rear center
armrest. Turn out the center armrest to use
it.
Backup power supply
Auxiliary Console Backup Power
Supply

A cup holder is designed on the auxiliary

console for teacups, drinks or other items.
Push the cup holder cover plate backward
to use it.

When using the cup holder, avoid

sudden vehicle starting or braking to
prevent spills. If the drink in the cup is hot, The backup power supply is in the storage
the driver or passengers may be scalded. box at the lower part of auxiliary console.
The backup power supply can be used to

66

connect electrical devices with a maximum
power limit of 120W.
Trunk Backup Power Supply
The backup power supply is equipped inside
the trunk on the left trim panel of the trunk.
The backup power supply can be used to
connect electrical devices with a maximum
power limit of 120W.
Wireless Charging for Mobile
Phones*
The mobile phone wireless charging device
is in the storage box at the upper part of the
auxiliary console.
67
Instrument and Control
1
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → More Settings, and then 3
enable/disable the mobile phone wireless
charging in this interface.
To use the mobile phone wireless charging,
enable the wireless charging on the
multimedia display, and ensure that the coil 4
in the mobile phone is aligned with the coil
at the center of charging board. Because
the coil position of each mobile phone is
different, it may be necessary to adjust the
placement position of the mobile phone. 5
Do not place any metal objects, such
as coins, rings or keys between the
mobile phone and the charging board.
Otherwise it will affect the charging of the
mobile phone and cause metal objects to be 6
extremely hot.
7
Instrument and Control

Multimedia interface Rear Charging Interface

The vehicle is equipped with 1 USB
multimedia interface in the storage box at
the lower part of auxiliary console for data
transmission and charging.
Charge Port
It is forbidden to use high-power
electrical devices for USB charging
box.
The rear charging interface is at the lower
part of the rear storage box of auxiliary
console. This interface only has the
charging function.
Assist grips

Front Charging Interface

Assist grips are designed on front

occupants' side and both sides of the rear
seats, and can be used by passengers
under special conditions. Interior grab
handle is fitted with spring device so that it
The front charging interface is in the storage
will return to original position after it is
box at the lower part of auxiliary console.
released.
This interface only has the charging
function.

68
 Instrument and Control

Coat and Hat Hook Type 2

1

Coat and hat hooks are designed on the

3
String bag is on the back of the front seat
assist grips on both sides of the rear seats used to contain small objects like
for passengers to use. newspapers, maps, etc.
Do not hang heavy objects on the Do not place heavy or sharp objects in
coat and hat hook, to avoid damaging the string bag, to avoid damaging the 4
the hook. bag.
Do not hang clothes with hangers
Trunk Curtain*
onto the coat and hat hook. Otherwise
the protectiveness of the airbag may be
affected. 5
String Bag
Type 1

The trunk of this vehicle features the

retractable curtain, which can effectively
7
shield the items in the trunk.

The retractable curtain is only used to

shield items. Do not place any objects
on it or fix heavy objects with it to avoid
8
damaging the curtain.

69
Instrument and Control

Steps to use the curtain: Loading High Objects

1. Grab the handle in the middle of the
When loading a high object, the height of
curtain, pull the curtain out directly and
the object must not exceed the height of the
cover the whole storage area.
seat backrest, and be sure to fix the object
2. Insert the clamps at both sides of the in the vehicle to ensure driving safety.
curtain into the notches on the pillar trim
panel. Loading Large Objects

Trunk When loading large objects, the length of

objects must not exceed the compartment
length, and be sure to fix the object in the
vehicle to ensure driving safety.

Pull the ring upward to flip the trunk lid.

Lie down the rear seatback and the trunk
space can be enlarged for storage of big
items.

Do not put pets in the trunk.

Loading Heavy Objects

If the weight of loaded goods exceeds
the loading capacity of the vehicle, or
the weight distribution in the vehicle is
uneven after being loaded, the handling
performance of the vehicle will be greatly
affected and the driving safety will be
impaired. Luggage in the storage area will
move in case of a traffic accident or
emergency braking. Try to place objects at
lower and forward position. Place them as
close as possible to rear seat back.

70
 Instrument and Control

External Device
Roof Rack 1

3
Roof rack is on both sides of the roof.

The roof rack of this vehicle is a load-

bearing rack with a maximum load of
50 kg. Please use it in strict accordance with 4
relevant requirements. If any damage,
please contact Geely Service.

71
Instrument and Control

72
 A/C system

Heating, Ventilation and A/

C 1
Front A/C control system
Instrument Panel A/C Control
Panel

A/C Control Panel in Multimedia

Display 5

73
A/C system

1. Temperature adjusting button 13. Maximum air volume button

Temperature adjustment button,

2. Air volume adjustment/OFF button 14. front passenger side

Driver side temperature adjustment

3. MODE button 15.
button

4. AUTO button 16. Synchronization button

Air outlet mode window blowing

5. A/C button 17.
button
Internal/external circulation switch
6. 18. Air outlet mode face blowing button
button
Front windshield defrosting/
7. 19. Air outlet mode foot blowing button
defogging button

Exterior rearview mirror/rear

8. windshield defrosting and defogging 20. Rear A/C control activation button*
button
Front windshield electric heating
9. AUTO button 21.
defrost button*

10. A/C MAX button 22. Energy-saving button

11. OFF button 23. G-clean button*

12. Air volume adjustment button 24. AQS status display*

In the A/C control panel on the multimedia display, the air outlet mode window
blowing button, the air outlet mode face blowing button and the air outlet mode foot
blowing button can all be used independently or combined as demand.

74
 A/C system

Description of the Front A/C When the engine is not started, the
Control System Buttons blower can run for two minutes each
time the air conditioner is started, and
1
1. Temperature adjusting button
the blower stops running if it exceeds
Adjust the temperature in vehicle.
two minutes.
Temperature adjustment button. Turn
3. MODE button
down to decrease the temperature and
Press this button, and it will cyclically
turn up to increase the temperature.
switch among 7 air outlet options: 2
The temperature adjustment button
blowing face, blowing face/blowing foot,
changes the temperature by 0.5℃ each
blowing all, blowing foot, blowing foot/
scale, and the temperature adjustment
blowing window, blowing window,
range is 16℃~28℃.
blowing face/blowing window, with air
When the set temperature is lower than
coming out from corresponding vents. 3
16℃ , the display shows LO and the air
For a comfortable experience, it is
conditioner is in the coldest position.
recommended to use the face blowing
When the set temperature is higher than
mode when cooling in summer, and use
28° C, the display shows HI and the air
the foot blowing, foot blowing/defrosting
conditioner is in the hottest position.
When the air conditioner is off, operate
when heating in winter or AUTO 4
function in all seasons.
the temperature adjustment button and
When the air conditioner is off, operate
the air conditioner is activated.
the MODE button and the air
2. Air volume adjustment/OFF button
conditioner is activated.
Air volume adjustment/OFF button is
used to manually set the air volume of
4. AUTO button 5
Based on the somatosensory
blower. Turn down to decrease the air
temperature, adjust the temperature
volume and turn up to increase the air
button to select the temperature. Press
volume. The air volume could be
AUTO button, and the air conditioner
adjusted between level 1-9 when the A/
C system is not in AUTO or Front
will automatically control the 5 functions: 6
internal/external circulation, air outlet
windshield defrosting/defogging state.
mode, air volume, A/C and AQS (if
In AUTO or Front windshield defrosting
equipped) to achieve the desired
state, the air volume can be adjusted
temperature. At the time, if you
between level 1-5. When the air volume
manually adjust the MODE button or 7
is level 1, turn down the Air volume/OFF
press AUTO button again, the AUTO
button, the fan blower will be off, and
button indicator will go out, and continue
the air conditioner system is turned off.
to automatically control the remaining
When the air conditioner is turned off,
functions that have not been manually
Turn up the Air volume/OFF button and
adjusted, to reach the desired
the air conditioner is activated. 8
temperature as much as possible.

75
A/C system
When the air conditioner is off, press
AUTO button, and the air conditioner
will be activated and enter the full-
automatic control mode; the
temperature is set to the state before
the air conditioner is turned off.
5. A/C button
Press this button to turn on the air
conditioner, and the A/C button indicator
will light up. Press this button again, the
button indicator will go out, and the
compressor will be turned off.
When the air conditioner is off, press A/
C button and the air conditioner is
activated.
If the air conditioning performance is
lower than expected, check the
surface of air conditioning condenser
(located in front of the radiator) for dirt or
insect accumulation. Please go to Geely
Service for cleaning.
An obstruction placed in front of the
front compartment hood will reduce
the airflow into the condenser, thereby
reducing the performance of air conditioner.
6. Internal/external circulation switch
button
Press this button to manually switch
between external circulation (fresh air)
and internal circulation. In the automatic
air quality control system (AQS) mode,
the internal/external circulation vent
status is automatically adjusted
according to the outside air quality.
When the air conditioner is off, press the
internal/external circulation switch
76
button, and the air conditioner is still off,
but the internal/external circulation will
be switched.
7. Front windshield defrosting/defogging
button
Start the vehicle and guide the airflow
toward the front windshield to quickly
clear the fog or frost on the front
windshield. For optimal effect, clear all
ice and snow from the front windshield
before defogging. Turning the air
volume adjustment button while
defogging will increase or decrease the
air volume to accordingly, and the air
outlet mode is kept as the defrosting
mode.
When the front windshield defrosting/
defogging is used, A/C and external
circulation (cannot be manually
adjusted) will be automatically turned
on, and the air volume will be
automatically adjusted to level AUTO 5.
Please do not turn off A/C for a better
defrosting/defogging effect.
When the air conditioner is off, operate
the front windshield defrosting/
defogging button and the air conditioner
is activated to execute the front
windshield defrosting/defogging
function.
When the vehicle is started, for some
models, press the button for the first
time to turn on the electric heating
function of the front windshield, and
press it again to activate the electric
heating and the defrosting/defogging
function of the front windshield at the
same time.

8. Exterior rearview mirror/rear windshield
defrosting and defogging button
Press this button to turn on/off the
exterior rearview mirror/rear windshield
defrosting/defogging function. When the
exterior rearview mirror/ rear windshield
defrosting/defogging function is
enabled, the button indicator will light
up. Press this button again to turn off
the exterior rearview mirror/rear
windshield defrosting/defogging
function.
Do not use any scraper or sharp tool
to clear frost or other substances on
the inside of the front/rear windshield. To
avoid damage to the rear windshield
defogger grill. Repair caused thereby is not
covered by warranty. Make sure all objects
are at a safe distance from the rear
windshield.
9. AUTO button
Select to turn on/off the automatic air
conditioner.
10. A/C MAX button
Touch the A/C MAX button, and the set
temperature is automatically adjusted to
the minimum, and the air volume to the
maximum.
11. OFF button
When the air conditioner is working,
press OFF button and the running of the
entire A/C system will stop.
12. Air volume adjustment button
Press "-" or "+" button at two sides of air
volume value, to set the air volume
higher or lower by 1 level.
77
A/C system
13. Maximum air volume button
Touch the button to adjust the current
air volume of blower to the maximum.
1
14. Front passenger side temperature
adjustment button
Adjust the temperature on the front
passenger side. Touch ∧ or ∨ above
and below the temperature value, to set 2
the temperature higher or lower by 0.5°
C. The temperature setting range of air
conditioner is 16°C-28°C. When the set
temperature is above 28℃, it is "HI",
and LO below 16°C. 3
15. Driver side temperature adjustment
button
Adjust the temperature on the driver
side. Touch ∧ or ∨ above and below
the temperature value, to set the 4
temperature higher or lower by 0.5° C.
The temperature setting range of air
conditioner is 16°C-28°C. When the set
temperature is above 28℃, it is "HI",
and LO below 16°C. 5
16. Synchronization button
Touch the button to turn on the single-
zone mode. The button icon will be
highlighted, and the front passenger
side temperature and the rear 6
passenger side temperature will be
adjusted as per the driver side; Click the
synchronization button again and the
button icon won't be highlighted, and it
enters the three-zone mode. At the 7
time, the driver side temperature
adjustment button is no longer related to
the front passenger side temperature
and the rear passenger side
temperature.
8
A/C system

17. Air outlet mode window blowing button 24. AQS status display*
Touch the button to select the air outlet When the automatic air quality control
mode as the window blowing. system (AQS) is activated, the icon of
18. Air outlet mode face blowing button AQS status will be highlighted.
Touch the button to select the air outlet
mode as the face blowing.
19. Air outlet mode foot blowing button
Touch the button to select the air outlet
mode as the foot blowing.
20. Rear A/C control activation button*
Touch the button, and the multimedia
display will jump to the rear A/C control
interface.
21. Front windshield electric heating defrost
button*
When the vehicle is started, touch the
electric heating defrosting button of the
front windshield. The button lights up,
and the electric heating defrosting
function of the front windshield is
activated. After heating for a period of
time, it will automatically be deactivated
and the button will go out. Heating time
depends on the outside temperature, 1
minute at least and 10 minutes at most.
22. Energy-saving button
Touch the button to turn on/off the A/C
energy-saving mode.
23. G-clean button*
Touch the button, and the air
conditioner will automatically activate
the purification function, perform real-
time air quality check, and automatically
switch the internal and external
circulation according to the exhaust, so
as to isolate the unsatisfactory air
outside.

78
 A/C system

Rear A/C Control System*

Rear A/C Control Panel 1

A/C Control Panel in Multimedia 4

79
A/C system

Rear temperature adjustment

1. AUTO button 6.
button*
2. MODE button 7. Rear lock button

3. Temperature down button 8. Air outlet mode face blowing button

4. OFF button 9. Air outlet mode foot blowing button

5. Temperature up button 10. Front A/C setting activation button

In the rear A/C control panel on the multimedia display, the air outlet mode face
blowing button, the air outlet mode foot blowing button can be used independently or
combined as demand.

80

Description of the Rear A/C
Control System Buttons
1. AUTO button
Press AUTO button, and the icon will
be displayed on the rear A/C control
panel, while the icon of air outlet mode
will not be displayed. Press MODE
button, and the air outlet mode will be
displayed on the rear A/C control panel,
while the icon will not be displayed.
When the air conditioner is off, press
AUTO button, and the air conditioner
will be awakened to work, and enter the
full-automatic control mode; the
temperature is set to that before the air
conditioner is turned off.
2. MODE button
Press MODE button, and the air outlet
mode will switch among 3 modes: face
blowing, face blowing/foot blowing and
foot blowing, and the icon on the rear
A/C control panel will be turned off.
When the air conditioner is off, press
MODE button and the air conditioner is
awakened to work.
3. Temperature down button
Press the temperature down button and
the temperature decreases by 0.5° C;
And the current temperature value is
displayed on the rear A/C control panel.
When it is below 16°C, it is displayed as
LO.
When the air conditioner is off, press the
temperature down button and the air
conditioner is awakened to work.
81
A/C system
4. OFF button
When the air conditioner is working,
touch OFF button and the rear air
1
conditioner is turned off.
5. Temperature up button
Press the temperature up button and
the temperature increases by 0.5° C;
And the current temperature value is 2
displayed on the rear A/C control panel.
When it is above 28°C, it is displayed as
HI.
When the air conditioner is off, press the
temperature up button and the air 3
conditioner is awakened to work.
6. Rear temperature adjustment button*
Adjust the rear row temperature. Touch
∧ or ∨ above and below the
temperature value, to set the 4
temperature higher or lower by 0.5° C.
The temperature setting range of air
conditioner is 16°C-28°C. When the set
temperature is above 28℃, it is "HI",
and LO below 16°C. 5
7. Rear lock button
Touch the button to lock the rear A/C
control panel. Then the buttons on the
rear A/C control panel are ineffective.
8. Air outlet mode face blowing button 6
Touch this button to select the air outlet
mode as the face blowing.
9. Air outlet mode foot blowing button
Touch this button to select the air outlet
mode as the foot blowing. 7
10. Front A/C control activation button
Touch this button, and the multimedia
display will jump to the front A/C control
interface.
8
A/C system

Ambient Light and Sunlight

Sensor

The ambient light and the solar radiation

sensor behind the front windshield sends
the measured sunlight radiation intensity,
and the air conditioning system will evaluate
this signal to control the temperature in the
vehicle. At the same time, the signals
collected by the sensor are also used to turn
on/off the automatic lights.

Keep the sensor area clean. Do not

paste foreign objects such as stickers
on it. Otherwise, the automatic temperature
control system and automatic lights will not
work properly.

82
 A/C system

A/C Ventilation System

Air Inlet 1

Clear any foreign matters on the air inlet at the lower part of the front panel Otherwise, they
will block the airflow from entering the vehicle.

83
A/C system

Air Vent
Front air vent

1. Side defrosting vent 4. Side air vent

2. Front windshield defrosting vent 5. Central air vent
3. Center compensation air vent 6. Front foot side air vent

84
 A/C system

Rear air vent

1. Rear air vent 2. Rear foot side air vent

85
A/C system
Air Vent Adjustment and A/C
Maintenance
Air Vent Adjustment
The airflow direction can be adjusted by
changing the direction of the grill up/down,
left/right. When the vent grill is adjusted to
the left /right limit position, the
corresponding air vent can be closed.
Air Conditioning Filter
Air conditioning filter is behind the glove
box. It can effectively block and filter dust,
pollen, powder and other tiny particles
(0.3μm level) in the air inhaled into the
vehicle, and it has sterilization function.
86
To keep its optimal filtering effect, please
check and replace filter elements regularly
in accordance with the Warranty and
Maintenance Manual.
A/C System Maintenance
• If the vehicle is parked in the burning sun
for a long time, the interior temperature
will increase sharply. Under such
circumstance, open all windows first to
discharge hot air out of vehicle and then
touch A/C MAX button. When it cools
down in vehicle, close the windows, and
adjust the temperature in vehicle as
demand or press AUTO button directly (if
equipped).
• In damp weather, don't directly blow cold
air onto the front windshield, to avoid
condensation of mist outside the
windshield due to temperature difference
inside and outside the vehicle.
• When driving on road with heavy dust,
please close all windows, and interior
circulation mode is recommended.
• Do not smoke while the air conditioner is
working, otherwise, it will cause eye
irritation.
• Don't let leaves or other debris block the
air inlets.
• Keep the space under the front seats
clear to facilitate air circulation.
The air conditioning system contains
high-pressure refrigerant. To avoid
injury, please contact Geely Service for
maintenance.
 A/C system

Long-term Storage Air Conditioning Comfort

Reminder*
Whenever the vehicle is to be stored or out 1
of service for two weeks or longer, please
turn on air conditioner and keep it running in
exterior circulation and maximum air volume
mode for 5 minutes with the engine idling.
This allows the A/C system to be fully
2
lubricated and minimizes the possibility of
damage to the compressor system when the
system is restarted.
Air Monitoring System*
3
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → More Settings. Enable/
disable the air conditioning comfort
reminder in this interface.
During the operation of air conditioner, if the 4
performance of air conditioner is affected
due to open windows or sunroof, relevant
information will be prompted on the
multimedia display to remind the driver to
close windows or sunroof. 5
1. G-clean button
2. AQS status display
Touch G-clean button, and the air
conditioner will automatically turn on the
purification function, perform real-time air 6
quality check, and automatically switch the
internal and external circulation according to
the exhaust, so as to isolate the poor air
outside. When the air quality monitoring
AQS is activated, the status icon of AQS will
7
be highlighted. AQS air quality sensor is
active by default.

87
A/C system

88
 Seats and Protective Devices

Seat button. Gently press or lift the headrest

again until a click is heard, to ensure that
Front Seats 1
the headrest is locked in place.
Front Seat Headrest Adjustment
Do not adjust seats while driving. So
as not to lose control of the vehicle
and thus cause personal injury or death.

Power Seat-Driver 2
The driver seat is adjustable in six or eight
directions. The driver seat of some models
have the electric lumbar support
adjustment. The adjustment switch is on the
left side of seat.
3
Do not place any object under the
power seat or obstruct the movement
Adjust the height of the headrest so that the
of the seat. Otherwise, the seat adjustment
top of the headrest is flush with the top of
motor may be damaged. 4
the occupant's head. This position reduces
the risk of neck injury in a crash.

Before driving the vehicle, be sure to

install and adjust the headrest
correctly to avoid personal injury or death in
5
the event of an accident.

6
1. Seat forward/backward/cushion height/
cushion angle adjustment switch
2. Backrest angle adjustment switch
7

To raise/lower the headrest, press and hold

the adjustment button on the side of the
headrest. Lift up or press down the headrest
to the desired height, and then release the 8

89
Seats and Protective Devices
Forward/backward adjustment of seat
Pull the seat forward/backward and height
adjustment switch back and forth in the
direction of the arrow, and the seat will
move backward and forward.
Or click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat
Adjustment. Then click Slip/Height in the
driver's seat adjustment interface to adjust
the seat back and forth as demand.
90
Cushion height adjustment
Push the seat forward/backward/cushion
height/cushion angle adjustment switch in
the arrow direction, the seat cushion height
goes up/down.
Or click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat
Adjustment. Then click Slip/Height in the
driver seat adjustment interface to adjust the
cushion height as demand.

Cushion tilt adjustment*
Push the seat forward/backward/cushion
height/cushion angle adjustment switch in
the arrow direction, the front end of seat
cushion goes up/down.
Or click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat
Adjustment. Then click Cushion Tilt in the
driver seat adjustment interface to adjust the
cushion tilt as demand.
91
Seats and Protective Devices
Backrest angle adjustment
3
Pull the backrest angle adjustment switch in
the direction of the arrow to adjust the
inclination of the backrest.
Or click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat
6
Adjustment. Then click Backrest in the
driver's seat adjustment interface to adjust
the backrest angle as demand.
7
Seats and Protective Devices
Electric lumbar support*
Press and hold the front/rear end of seat
lumbar support adjustment switch to
strengthen/weaken the lumbar support.
Press and hold the top/bottom of seat
lumbar support adjustment switch to adjust
the height of lumbar support.
When the seat back reaches the ideal
lumbar support strength or position, release
the seat lumbar support adjustment switch.
Manual Seat - Passenger
The front passenger seat is adjustable in
four directions. The adjusting handle and
adjusting rod are respectively on the right
side and front side of the seat.
92
1. Seat forward/backward adjusting rod
Hold the seat forward/backward
adjustment lever and pull it up. Then
lean against the seat lightly, slide the
seat to the desired position, and release
the adjusting rod until the seat slide rail
gives a clicking sound and the seat is
locked.
2. Backrest angle adjusting handle
To adjust the backrest backward, lift the
backrest angle adjusting handle to
unlock the backrest. Gently lean back
against the backrest so that the
backrest rotates backward to the
desired position. Put down the backrest
angle adjusting handle and the backrest
is locked.
To adjust the backrest forward for an
angle, lean against the backrest tightly,
and lift the backrest angle adjustment
handle. When the backrest is unlocked
and move forward to the required
position, put down the backrest angle
adjustment handle, and the backrest is
locked.
When the backrest is unlocked, lean
against the backrest tightly, or the
quick return of backrest may cause personal
injury or even death.
During driving, the backrest should
not be tilted excessively. Otherwise, it
may cause personal injury or death in the
event of a collision.
In the event of a vehicle accident, the seat
belt can provide maximum protection only
by maintaining the correct sitting posture.
 Seats and Protective Devices

Power Seat - Passenger*

The front passenger seat is adjustable in six 1
directions. The adjustment switch is on the
right side of seat.

Or click in turn on the multimedia display:

Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat 3
Adjustment. Then click Slip/Height in the
front passenger seat adjustment interface to
adjust the seat back and forth as demand.
1. Seat forward/backward and height Cushion height adjustment
adjustment switch 4
2. Backrest angle adjustment switch
Forward/backward adjustment of seat

6
Push the seat forward/backward/cushion
height adjustment switch in the arrow
direction, the seat cushion height will go up/
down.
Pull the seat forward/backward and height
adjustment switch back and forth in the 7
direction of the arrow, and the seat will
move backward and forward.

93
Seats and Protective Devices
Or click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat
Adjustment. Then click Slip/Height in the
front passenger seat adjustment interface to
adjust the cushion height as demand.
Backrest angle adjustment
Pull the backrest angle adjustment switch in
the direction of the arrow to adjust the
inclination of the backrest.
94
Or click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Quick Control → Seat
Adjustment. Then click Backrest in the front
passenger seat adjustment interface to
adjust the backrest angle as demand.
Rear Seat
Rear Seat Headrest Adjustment
Press the adjusting button on the side of the
seat headrest and move the headrest up
and down until you hear a click to ensure
that the headrest is locked in place. Press
and hold the adjusting button to push in or
pull out the headrest.

Rear Seat Backrest Adjustment
Unlocking handles are installed at the two
sides of rear seat backrest. Press down the
handle and push the backrest backward to
adjust the backrest to the 2nd position.
Press down the handle again and pull the
backrest forward to adjust the backrest to
the 1st position.
Push forward/backward the top of
backrest to ensure the backrest is
securely locked. Otherwise, the seat belt
may not opera normally.
Folding of the Rear Seat
Backrest
Rear seats consist of the left rear seat and
the right rear seat, which features 4/6
folding function. The trunk space is enlarged
for the storage of big items.
Unlocking handles are installed at the two
sides of rear seat backrest. Put the headrest
of rear seat to the lowest position. Press
down the handle to fully fold the
corresponding backrest.
After the backrest is folded, be sure to leave
some space between the rear seat headrest
and the front seat.
95
Seats and Protective Devices
Unfolding Rear Seat Backrest
Flip the backrest backward and push hard 1
backward until the red mark on the
corresponding unlocking handle disappears,
so as to lock it. Otherwise, the seat belt may
not opera normally.
When the vehicle is running, 2
passengers are not allowed to sit on
folded seats or in the trunk. The seats
should be properly used. When the backrest
returns to the original position, the following
precautions shall be considered to prevent 3
injuries upon collision or emergency
braking:
• Push forward/backward the top of
backrest to ensure the backrest is
securely locked. Otherwise, the seat belt
4
may not opera normally.
• Make sure the seatbelt is not twisted or
stuck under the seat, but well positioned
for use.
5
When the child seat is placed in the
rear seat, the child seat and its
installation guide sheath must be removed
before the rear seat backrest folding
function can be used.
6
7
8
Seats and Protective Devices
Seat Heating/Ventilation*
Front Seat Heating/Ventilation*
On the multimedia display, click in turn: Air
Conditioning → Seat, and then set the front
seat heating/ventilation function in this
interface.
1. Select the seat heating adjustment
2. Select the seat ventilation adjustment
3. Setting button
On the same seat, seat heating and
seat ventilation cannot run
simultaneously.
Front Seat Heating
On the multimedia display, select the seat
heating adjustment. Select the seat to be
adjusted, touch the heating adjustment
button on the corresponding seat.
When 1 indicator lamp below the seat
heating adjustment button lights up, it
indicates that the seat heating is at a low
level; When the 3 indicator lamps below the
seat heating adjustment button light up, it
indicates that the seat heating is at a high
level; When all 3 indicator lamps below the
seat heating adjustment button go out, it
indicates that the seat heating is off.
96
If your body can't feel pain or
temperature due to drugs, paralysis,
palsy or other diseases, please do not use
the seat heating function. Otherwise, it may
cause burns to the body.
• Do not kneel on the seat or put the seat
under concentrated load, to avoid
damaging the elements of the seat
heating unit.
• Do not clean the seat by wet washing.
• It is recommended to activate the seat
heating function when the vehicle is
started so as to greatly reduce the power
consumption of battery.
• If the voltage of battery is too low, the
seat heating function will be
automatically turned off so that the
vehicle can have sufficient power.
• When the seat heating function is active,
seat cushion must not be placed on the
seat.
Front seat ventilation
On the multimedia display, select the seat
ventilation adjustment. Touch the seat to be
adjusted, and then touch the ventilation
adjustment button on the corresponding
seat.
When an indicator lamp below the seat
ventilation adjustment button lights up, it
indicates that the seat ventilation is at a low
level; When the 3 indicator lamps below the
seat ventilation adjustment button light up, it
indicates that the seat ventilation is at a high
level; When all 3 indicator lamps below the
seat ventilation adjustment button go out, it
indicates that the seat ventilation is off.
 Seats and Protective Devices

Front seat heating/ventilation timing Rear Seat Heating*

function
1

3
1. Select the rear left seat heating
On the multimedia display, click in turn: Air adjustment
Conditioning → Seat → Setting, and then
2. Select the rear right seat heating
set the front seat heating/ventilation timing
adjustment
function in this interface. Some models have
In the rear air conditioning control panel,
no front seat heating timing function. Select 4
touch the heating adjustment button on the
the corresponding timing in the setting bar
corresponding seat. This function is
of the corresponding seat as demand. The
available when the rear control panel is
timing options are 5 minutes, 15 minutes
active.
and 30 minutes. When the heating/
When 1 indicator lamp beside the seat
ventilation function of the selected seat is
heating adjustment button lights up, it
5
activated, the set timing will take effect. The
indicates that the seat heating is at a low
heating/ventilation function of the
level; When the 3 indicator lamps beside the
corresponding seat will be automatically
seat heating adjustment button light up, it
turned off after the timing is over.
indicates that the seat heating is at a high
level; When all 3 indicator lamps beside the 6
seat heating adjustment button go out, it
indicates that the seat heating is off.

If your body can't feel pain or

temperature due to drugs, paralysis,
7
palsy or other diseases, please do not use
the seat heating function. Otherwise, it may
cause burns to the body.

97
Seats and Protective Devices
• Do not kneel on the seat or put the seat
under concentrated load, to avoid
damaging the elements of the seat
heating unit.
• Do not clean the seat by wet washing.
• It is recommended to activate the seat
heating function when the vehicle is
started so as to greatly reduce the power
consumption of battery.
• If the voltage of battery is too low, the
seat heating function will be
automatically turned off so that the
vehicle can have sufficient power.
• When the seat heating function is active,
seat cushion must not be placed on the
seat.
Driver Seat Memory Function*
The seat memory button is installed on the
driver side door trim panel, and two memory
positions regularly used can be set. It
enables the driver to quickly find the
comfortable driving position.
1. Memory position button 1
2. Memory position button 2
3. Setting button M
98
Steps
1. Adjust the driver's seat to the required
position. Press the setting button M, and
press the memory position button 1 or 2
within 3 seconds. The current driver's
seat position will be recorded.
2. When the vehicle stops, press the
position button 1 or 2, and the driver's
seat will automatically adjust to the
previously recorded position.
Do not adjust any seat during driving.
Moving the seat during driving may
get the vehicle out of control, resulting in
collision and serious injuries.
When the start and stop button is in Mode II
or the engine is started, the vehicle speed
shall be less than 5 km/h for the seat
memory function.
Easy Access for Driver*
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings → Easy
Access for Driver. Turn on/off the Easy
Access for Driver in the interface.
• Easy out: When the engine is stalled,
open the driver's door and the driver's

seat will automatically move backward,
easy for the driver to get off.
• Easy in: When the driver enters the
vehicle, and closes the door and starts
the engine, the driver's seat will
automatically return to the position that
the driver gets off the vehicle.
During the operation of comfort
function, changing the state of start
and stop button and adjusting the seat will
interrupt the easy access function for the
driver.
99
Seats and Protective Devices
Seat Belt
Seat Belt Overview 1
This section describes how to use seat belt
properly. It also includes some prohibited
operations on seat belts.
Improper wearing or not wearing seat
belts may cause serious casualties! 2
Proper use of the safety belt can give full
play of its protectiveness. In case of
emergency braking or an accident, wearing
seat belts properly can reduce the injury of
passengers. Therefore, all passengers must 3
wear seat belts properly when the vehicle is
running.
No occupant shall sit in the area without
seat or seat belt or on a seat with damaged
seat belt. 4
This vehicle features the warning indicator
for not wearing seat belt. It will remind you
to fasten seat belts. When the vehicle is
running, passengers shall fasten seatbelts.
The reasons are as follows: you cannot 5
foresee a collision accident. When a
collision accident occurs, you cannot
foresee the severity. In such collision
accidents, occupants who have fastened
their seat belts can mitigate the injuries.
6
They might have got seriously injured or
even killed if they had not fastened seat
belts. Many years' experience in using seat
belts in vehicles clearly shows that the
degree of injuries in most collisions is
7
strongly related to whether the occupants
fasten their seat belts!
Seats and Protective Devices

Why Seat Belt Can Serve for

Protection
When you sit in or on an object, your moving
speed will be the same to that object.

Fastened with seat belt, you will decelerate

Take the simplest vehicle as an example.
Suppose that the vehicle is simply a seat
with wheels. People are seated on it.
Accelerate it. Then stop it suddenly. But the
people on it will not stop.
They will continue moving forward until
being stopped by some object. In actual
situation, such object may be the
windshield, instrument panel or seat belt.
along with the vehicle. You will have more
time and distance to be stopped, and the
strongest bone of your body will bear the
acting force. This is why seat belt plays a
great role in protection.
Proper Sitting Posture
Importance of the proper sitting posture
A proper sitting posture is crucial for the
optimal protection of the seat belt and
airbag. The driver seat and front passenger
seat can be adjusted in several directions
based on occupants' physical condition. A
proper sitting posture can ensure:
• Operate and control the vehicle
accurately, effectively and safely.
• Allow the body to be supported
effectively to avoid driving fatigue.
• Give maximum play to the protection
function of the seat belt and airbag.

100
 Seats and Protective Devices

Please do not tilt the backrest too When driving, please do not bend
much during driving to avoid personal your body forward. Keep a sufficient
3
injury or even death. safe distance from your body to the airbag.

Proper sitting posture for the driver

A proper sitting posture for the driver is of 4
great importance to safe driving. For safety
concern and to reduce risks of injuries, it is
suggested that the driver should adjust the
posture in the following way:
5

When driving, please do not put your

head or arm out of window, as it may 6
result in severe injury or even death.

7
• Adjust the steering wheel: the distance
between the steering wheel and chest
shall not be less than 25cm.
• Adjust the driver seat back and forth: it is
convenient for the driver to operate the 8

101
Seats and Protective Devices

accelerator pedal and brake pedal

effectively.
• Adjust the headrest: The headrest should
be adjusted correctly according to the
personal height.
• The seat backrest shall be vertical and
your back shall fully cling to it.
• Wear the seat belt properly.
Proper sitting posture for the front
passenger
For safety concern, and to avoid injuries, the
front passenger should adjust the posture in
the following way:
• The distance between the front
passenger and the instrument panel shall
not be less than 25cm.
• The seat backrest shall be vertical and
your back shall fully cling to it.
• Adjust the headrest so that the headrest
aligns with the head.
• Wear the seat belt properly.
How to Wear the Seat Belt
Properly
Contents of this part only apply to adults.
Firstly, you should know some important
information before you or your passengers
wear seat belts. There are different
protection provisions and special
requirements on seat belts for children and
infants. If children or infants are in vehicle,
please refer to “Older Child” or
“Infants” in this chapter “Seats and
Protective Devices”, and comply with
protection provisions for all kinds of
passengers. All passengers should wear
seat belts properly. This is very important.
According to statistical data, it is easier for
passengers who do not wear seat belts to
be injured than those who wear seat belts in
case of a collision. Passengers who are not
wearing seat belts may be cast out of the
vehicle. Besides, they may collide with other
passengers in vehicle who wear seat belts.
Sit straight and keep your feet on the floor
ahead. Try to fasten the lap belt as low as
possible and make it cling to hip and just
touch the thigh. The lap belt can apply force
to relatively stout hip bone and will prevent
lap belt sliding down in case of a collision.
The lap belt will apply force to abdomen if
the passenger slides under the lap belt. This
may result in severe and even fatal injuries.

102
 Seats and Protective Devices

The shoulder belt should be fastened across

your shoulder and chest. These parts of the
body are most capable of bearing restraint
1
force of seat belt. Shoulder belt will lock in
case of emergency braking or collision.

How Pregnant Women Should

Use the Seat Belt
Seat belts are applicable to all occupants
including pregnant women. The same to
other passengers, pregnant women must
wear the seat belt.
2
1. Pick up the latch plate, and pull the seat
belt across your body. Do not twist the 3
seat belt.
The three-point seat belt may be locked
when being pulled across the body too
fast. If this occurs, release and retract it
a little to unlock it. And then pull the seat 4
belt slowly across your body.

5
During entire pregnancy period, pregnant
women should wear seat belt, fasten lap
belt as low as possible below swollen belly,
sit up straightly and keep away from
steering wheel or instrument panel. It can 6
reduce injuries to pregnant women and
fetus due to collision or deployment of
airbags. The best way to protect fetus is to 2. Press the latch plate into the buckle until
protect pregnant women. Fetus may not get a “click” sound is heard. Pull the latch
hurt in case of collision if seat belt is plate to ensure it is locked. Be sure the 7
fastened properly. position of the release button on the
Three-point Seat Belt buckle for the convenience of
All seats in the vehicle are fitted with three- unfastening the seat belt when
point seatbelt. The following instructions necessary.
describe how to wear three-point seatbelt.
8

103
Seats and Protective Devices

3. The lap belt can be tightened if the original position, otherwise the door may
shoulder belt is pulled up. pinch the safety belt and possibly damage
the safety belt and the door.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

Though invisible, the seat belt pretensioner
is part of the seat belt assembly. When a
collision occurs, it will tighten the seat belt to
ensure the safety of occupants.
The pretensioner can only work once. If it is
activated in a collision, the pretensioner
should be replaced with a new one, and
other components of the seat belt system
may also be replaced. Please refer to the
4. To release seat belt, press red button on
section "Replace Parts of Airbag System
the buckle. The seat belt should return
after Crash" in this chapter.
to the unused state.
Seat Belt Warming and Alarm
Please pay attention to prevent
foreign objects such as food scraps,
nut shells, buttons, coins, viscous liquids,
etc. from falling into the seat buckle. It may
cause the locking or unlocking function of
the lock catch to fail, and it may also cause
the seat belt reminding function to fail.

It is forbidden to insert objects other

than the vehicle's latch plate into the
buckle, otherwise, it may cause the buckle
to malfunction. This will reduce the
protective effect of the seat belt and may
1. Driver seat belt unfastened warning
cause serious personal injury or death.
2. Front passenger seat belt unfastened
In order to prevent the seat belt from warning
rewinding too quickly and hurting the 3. Rear passenger seat belt unfastened
surrounding area or getting stuck due to warning
rewinding too slowly, please return the seat 4. Rear passenger seat belt fastened
belt to its original position after unfastening This vehicle features the unfastened seat
the seat belt. belt warning function. When the unfastened
seatbelt warning is triggered, besides that
Before closing the door, ensure that
the unfastened seatbelt warning lamp on
the safety belt is retracted to its

104

the display of combination instrument will
light up in different states, the seat with
unfastened seatbelt will also be specifically
displayed by image on the combination
instrument display.
Front passenger unfastened seatbelt
warning
When the start and stop button is in ON
position, if the driver's seatbelt or the front
passenger's seatbelt is not fastened, the
warning lamp will be on; When the vehicle
speed exceeds about 10 km/h or the
forward driving distance exceeds about 300
meters, this lamp will flash with a warning
sound; When the vehicle runs forward at a
speed of 10 km/h or above, if the seatbelt is
unfastened, this lamp will flash with a
warning sound. It will not go out until the
corresponding seatbelt is fastened, and
then the warning sound will disappear.
Rear passenger seatbelt unfastened
warning
If the rear seat is equipped with an occupant
detection sensor, when the start and stop
button is in ON position, this warning lamp
will be on when occupants are detected in
the rear seat but the seatbelt is not
fastened. When the vehicle's forward speed
exceeds about 10 km/h or the forward
distance exceeds about 300 meters, it will
flash with a warning sound; When the
vehicle's forward speed exceeds 10 km/h or
above, if the seatbelt is unfastened, this
lamp will flash with a warning sound, and it
will not go out until all passengers in rear
seats fasten their seat belts, and the
warning sound will also disappear.
If the rear seat is not equipped with
occupant detection sensor, when the start
105
Seats and Protective Devices
and stop button is in ON position, if any rear
buckle is not locked, the rear unfastened
seatbelt warning will enter 62s initialization
1
reminder, and the rear passenger seat will
be displayed in the combination instrument
as red unfastened seatbelt icon, and the
warning lamp will also be on. After the
initialization reminder, the warning lamp will 2
go out and the unfastened seatbelt icon will
turn gray. If the rear seatbelt is unfastened
when the vehicle is running forward at
10km/h or above, the warning lamp will flash
with a warning sound, until the 3
corresponding rear seatbelt is refastened.
Fastening the seat belt properly can
reduce the risk of being hurt at an
emergency braking and traffic accident.
Therefore, all occupants must always fasten
4
seat belts correctly while the vehicle is
running.
Please pay attention to the warning lamp on
the combination instrument display.
Otherwise severe casualty or property loss 5
may occur.
Seat Belt Maintenance and
Replacement
Safety System Check 6
Please check the safety system regularly on
the following items:
• Check whether the seat belt warning
indicators, seat belts, buckles, latch
7
plates, retractors and anchors are
functioning normally.
• Check whether the seat belt system
becomes loose or is damaged, which
may impact the normal operation of the
8
parts of the seat belt system.
Seats and Protective Devices
• Replace with new ones if the seat belts
are torn or worn.
• Make sure the unfastened seatbelt
warning lamp works properly.
• Keep the seat belts clean and dry.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Keep the seat belts clean and dry.
Do not bleach or dye the seat belts.
Otherwise, the strength of the seat
belts will be severely weakened. Those seat
belts will be unable to provide sufficient
protection in case of traffic collision. Clean
seat belts only with neutral soap and warm
water. The seat belts shall not be used
before it is completely dried.
Seat Belt Replacement
After a minor collision, go to Geely Service
to check or replace the seat belt assembly.
It is necessary to replace with new parts or
repair the seat belt system even if it is not
used during the traffic collision.
Collision may damage the seatbelt
system in vehicle. It must be replaced
at Geely Service as soon as possible.
106
Airbag
Airbag Overview
Airbag is an integral part of the
passive safety system, which can
never replace the seat belts. Otherwise,
when an accident happens, the airbag will
not effectively play its protective role. If you
do not fasten the seat belt, the fast inflation
and deployment of the airbags will cause a
more serious injury. Therefore, all the
passengers in the vehicle shall fasten their
seat belts when the vehicle is running.
Influenced by the collision's position, angle,
degree and property of the objects collided,
airbags may not be deployed in all
accidents. Airbags will produce great force
when they are deployed. If passengers are
too close to airbags, deployed airbags may
cause personal injury. To reduce injuries
caused when front airbags are deployed,
driver and front passenger should adjust
their seats so that a sufficient safe distance
to front airbags can be kept.
Ensure that there is no obstacle in the
way of airbag deployment. Do not put
anything between the passengers and
airbags. If any obstacle exists between the
passengers and airbags, the airbags may
not be inflated normally, or the obstacle may
be squeezed into the human body at the
deployment, resulting in severe casualties.
After airbags are deployed, the temperature
of some parts of airbags is very high. Do not
touch them.
Some gas and dust will be given off when
airbags are deployed, which may irritate
your skin and eyes. Please go to the
 Seats and Protective Devices

hospital for treatment if you feel very

uncomfortable.
1
Do not maintain, repair, remove or
replace any part of airbag system by
yourself. Otherwise the system may be
unable to work.
Do not add or refit airbags. It is forbidden to
2
change the vehicle structure or the direction
of harnesses of the airbag system.
The airbag system can only be used once. If
the airbag has been deployed, it must be
1. Front Airbag Positions
replaced at Geely Service immediately.
One airbag is mounted in the center of 3
If infants or children are not restrained steering wheel and the other in the
or protected properly, they may be instrument panel above the glove box,
seriously wounded by the inflating airbags, respectively, marked with “AIRBAG”.
or even death. If the infant or child is too
Front airbags are neither designed for
young to use a seat belt, a child safety seat
rear impacts and slight frontal impact,
4
must be used. Geely Auto strongly
nor for rolling-over of the vehicle. And they
recommends that infants and children
do not work when an emergency brake is
should be seated at the rear seats with
applied. Expansion and deflation of airbags
appropriate protective device.
are completed in a very short time. They will
Position of the Airbags not have protective effects on a follow-up 5
second collision.
Front Airbag
To exert the protective function of the front
In case of frontal impact, front airbags can airbags, all the occupants shall properly
effectively protect the head and chest of wear the seat belts and keep the correct
occupants from being injured. sitting posture when the vehicle is running. 6
When the vehicle suffers from moderate to
severe frontal impact or nearly frontal
Do not put things or pets in front of the
impact which reaches the triggering
instrument panel or glove box or on
condition of the system, the airbag will be
the cover of the airbag on steering wheel.
inflated with gas so as to buffer the forward
They may hinder the deployment of airbag
7
charging speed of the driver and front
or cause severe injury or death of occupants
passenger, and prevent the driver and front
due to its large projection force.
passenger from hitting on the steering wheel
It is forbidden to install or refit, disassemble,
and instrument panel directly.
knock or open any front airbag components
or lines. Otherwise, the airbag may 8

107
Seats and Protective Devices

suddenly inflate or the system may become simultaneously. Side airbags can mainly
unusable, resulting in serious personal reduce chest injuries for driver or front
injury or death. passenger.

Do not sit at the edge of seats or lean

against the instrument panel during
driving, because the front passenger
airbags will deploy at a great speed and
power. At the deployment, the airbags may
cause serious injure to any passenger who
is upright leaning against the airbag area or
close to the airbags too much. Drivers and
passengers must ensure that they keep a
distance of at least 25 cm from the airbag.
Do not carry child in arms and sit in the front
seat, because the child may get severely
injured or even death in case of emergency
braking or collision.
Because of the great speed and force of
airbag deployment, the child shall not stand
or kneel on the front seat, or the child may
get severely injured or even death.
When the following conditions occur,
contact Geely Service immediately:
• After the deployment of the frontal
airbags.
• The front part of the vehicle was hit, but it
did not cause the front airbag to deploy.
• The cover of the frontal airbag assembly
has cracks, scratches or other forms of
damage.
Side Airbag
Side airbag provides further protection for
the driver and front passenger, based on the
safety protection provided by safety belts. In
case of a moderate or severe side impact,
the side airbag can reduce personal injury
by inflating and working with the seat belts
Side airbags are mounted in the backrests
of the driver seat and front passenger seat,
where they are marked with "AIRBAG".
Because the side airbag has great
speed and force when it is deployed,
do not put your head close to the area
where the side airbag is deployed. Do not
put your head and hands outside the
window, or let children kneel or stand on the
front seat and face toward the door.
Otherwise serious casualties may occur.
It is forbidden to install seat cover on
the seats equipped with side airbags.
Otherwise, it may affect the deployment of
the side airbag.
When the following conditions occur,
contact Geely Service immediately:
• Side airbags have been deployed.
• The door is impacted, though the side
airbag isn't triggered to deploy.
• The cover of the side airbag assembly
has cracks, scratches or other forms of
damage.

108

Before consulting the personnel of
Geely Service, do not make any of the
following changes that may affect the
normal operation of side airbags:
• Install electronic devices such as mobile
two-way radio communication devices.
• Refit the passenger side structures.
Side Curtain Airbag
Side curtain airbag provides further
protection for the driver, front passenger
and rear outboard passengers, based on
the safety protection provided by safety
belts. In case of a moderate or severe side
impact, the side curtain airbag can reduce
personal injury by inflating and working with
the seat belts simultaneously. Side curtain
airbags can mainly reduce the head injuries
of the driver, front passenger and rear
outboard passengers.
Side curtain airbags are mounted above the
left/right doors, marked with "AIRBAG" on it.
Because the side curtain airbag has
great speed and force when it is
deployed, do not put your head close to the
area where the side airbag is deployed. Do
not put your head and hands outside the
109
Seats and Protective Devices
window, or let children kneel or stand on the
front seat and face toward the door.
Otherwise serious casualties may occur.
1
Do not install any decorative parts
around the side curtain airbag, such
as windshield, door glass, side pillar, roof
side, or stick microphone or any other
2
equipment inside the roof and on the
auxiliary handles. When the side curtain
airbag is deployed, these items will be
thrown out under the strong deployment
force of the side curtain airbag, resulting in
3
personal injuries or malfunction of the side
curtain airbag.
When the following conditions occur,
contact Geely Service immediately:
• The side curtain airbags have been 4
deployed.
• The door is impacted, though the side
airbag isn't triggered to deploy.
• When the front pillar, rear pillar and roof
side member decoration or ceiling fitted 5
with the side curtain airbags have been
scratched, cracked or damaged in other
forms.
Before consulting the personnel of
Geely Service, do not make any of the 6
following changes that may affect the
normal operation of side curtain airbags:
• Install electronic devices such as mobile
two-way radio communication devices.
• Refit suspension system. 7
• Repair at or near the bracket.
8
Seats and Protective Devices

Deployment of the Airbags

Deployment of the Front Airbags

In case of collision, airbag control unit will

When the vehicle suffers from moderate to
severe frontal collision, and the severity of
the collision reaches the explosion
condition, the airbags will deploy.
When the severity of collision exceeds the
designed critical value, which is equivalent
to the impact force caused by head-on
collision with a fixed and non-deformed rigid
barrier at about 25 km/h, the front airbag will
deploy.
Always fasten the seat belts to
minimize injuries in case of airbag
deployment. The driver and the front
passenger must adjust their seats so as to
keep a sufficient distance from the front
airbags.
monitor deceleration arisen from such
collision and determine whether to deploy
airbags. Whether the airbags deploy or not
does not rely on vehicle speed but on
collided objects, collision direction and
deceleration of vehicle arising from collision.
Whether airbags deploy or not should not be
judged according to damage degree of
vehicle. Two front airbags will be deployed
under severe frontal impact.
Deployment of the Side Airbags
and Side Curtain Airbags*

When the vehicle has a moderate or severe

side impact and reaches the designed
action value, the front side airbag and side

110
 Seats and Protective Devices

curtain airbag will be deployed. In case of

side impact, the risk of upper body and
pelvis injuries can be significantly reduced.
1
Cases in which the Front Airbags
May Not be Deployed

• When the vehicle falls down into a trench

or pit suddenly. 3

• When the vehicle is not started. 4

• Collision with easily deformable objects
such as trees.

• In case of a crash (underrun crash)

against the rear of a truck.

• When the vehicle collides against low

objects like steps in the process of 7
running.

• Rollover. 8

111
Seats and Protective Devices
• Side impact, rear impact and slight
frontal impact.
• Airbag system is faulty.
• Other special cases.
Cases in which the Side Airbag
and Side Curtain Airbag May Not
be Deployed
• Frontal impact or nearly frontal impact.
• Rear impact.
112
• Rollover.
• Slight side impact ("slight" is subject to
the sensation of vehicle's airbag
electronic control unit or impact sensor,
regardless of the degree of vehicle
damage).
• Airbag system is faulty.
• Other special cases.
Airbag Maintenance and
Replacement
Airbag Trouble warning indicator
If the airbag fault warning lamp is
constantly on when the vehicle is
started, or it lights up when the vehicle is
running, it means that the passive safety
restraint system is detected faulty. The
airbag may not be detonated in the event of
a collision, or even be inflated when no
accident occurs. To avoid injury, please
contact Geely Service for maintenance as
soon as possible.
The airbag fault warning lamp is
constantly on when the vehicle is
started, or it lights up while the vehicle is
running, it means that the airbag system
 Seats and Protective Devices

may be faulty. Please contact Geely Service

for maintenance as soon as possible.
1
Do not maintain, repair, remove or
replace any part of airbag system by
yourself. Otherwise the system may be
unable to work.
For specific position and description of
2
warning indicators, see “Warnings and
Indicators Introduction” in “Instruments
and Controls”.

Airbag Replacement
Traffic collision may damage the
3
airbag system in vehicle. An airbag
will be unable to work properly if it is
damaged. Severe injury or even death may
occur in case of a collision. To ensure
airbag system works properly after collision, 4
check and replace airbags at Geely Service
as soon as possible.
If the airbag is deployed, it is necessary to
replace the parts of airbag system. Please
go to Geely Service for maintenance. 5
If airbag fault warning indicator is solidly on
after the vehicle is started or turned on
during driving, it means the airbag system
may not work normally. Please contact
Geely Service for maintenance as soon as 6
possible.

Vehicle Disposal
When selling the vehicle, make sure the
new owner understands that this vehicle is 7
fitted with airbags and the date when the
airbag system was replaced. If the vehicle is
scrapped, airbags not deployed have
potential hazard. Thus, it is necessary to
make airbag deployed safely by
8
professionals in a proper environment.

113
Seats and Protective Devices

Child Restraints
Selection of Child Restrain System
On condition that child seats are secured with seat belts, the information of the suitability of
child restraint systems on various seats:

Gro Front passenger Rear outboard Rear middle

Child weight
up seat passenger seat passenger seat

0 <10KG X U X
0+ <13KG X U X
Ⅰ 9-18KG X U X
Ⅱ 15-25KG X U X
Ⅲ 22-36KG X U X

The meanings of the keywords in the table above are: U = Generic child restraint system
applicable for this mass group certification. X = The seat is not applicable for child restraint
system of this mass group.
On condition that the child seats adopt ISOFIX child protection system, information on the
suitability of child seats on various seats:

Rear Rear
Front
Child Size outboard middle
Group Anchor passen
weight category passen passen
ger seat
ger seat ger seat

Portable F ISO/L1 X X X
-
bed G ISO/L2 X X X
0 <10KG E ISO/R1 X IL X
E ISO/R1 X IL X
0+ <13KG D ISO/R2 X IL X
C ISO/R3 X IL X
D ISO/R2 X IL X
C ISO/R3 X IL X
Ⅰ 9-18KG B ISO/F2 X IUF X
B1 ISO/F2X X IUF X
A ISO/F3 X IUF X

114
 Seats and Protective Devices

The meanings of the keywords in the table above are: IL = This seat is suitable for mounting
the semi-universal ISOFIX child restraint system; IUF = This seat is suitable for mounting the
ISOFIX child restraint system which is common, generic and fixed with TOPTETHER; X =
1
This seat is not equipped with a retaining ring for the ISOFIX system.

115
Seats and Protective Devices

Use of Child Safety Device Be sure not to carry an infant or child

in the arms in vehicle. Infants or
Infants and Older Children
children will become too heavy to carry due
Infants and small children to the impact force of collision in case of
Every passenger in the vehicle should be collision accident. For example, when
protected! Infants and young children are vehicle runs at 40 km/h, one 5.5 kg infant
included! Length of trip as well as age and will apply 110 kg acting force on the arms of
body type of passengers should not change holder suddenly in case of traffic collision.
such requirement. Every passenger must For the safety of occupants and infants,
use safety protective device. infants should be fixed in appropriate safety
If the shoulder belt twines around the devices.
neck of a child, the child may be
severely injured and even die when the seat
belt is retracted. Do not let children stay
alone in the vehicle or play with the seat
belts.
Airbag and hip/shoulder seat belt can
provide protection to adult and older child
but this is not true for infants and younger
child. The seat belt system and airbag
system of the vehicle are not designed for
protecting infants or small children. Infants
or small children shall be always protected
Don't use backward children restraint
with a proper child protective device.
system at the seat that is under frontal
A child who is not restrained properly may
airbag protection (in activated state)!
run into other passengers or be thrown out
Child will be severely injured or killed when
of the vehicle.
airbag is inflated if it clings to or is too close
to airbag. Do not put a backward child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat. A backward child protective device
should be fixed on rear seats. Forward child
protective device should also be fixed on
rear seats if possible.

To lower the risk of hurting neck and

head in case of a traffic collision,
infants should be supported
comprehensively.

116

Because the neck of an infant is not
developed fully and its head is heavier
compared with other parts of the body. In
case of a traffic accident, an infant sitting in
a backward child protective device will sit in
it steadily and the impact will be distributed
to the most stout positions of the body, i. e.
its back and shoulder.
The infants should always be fixed in a
backward child restraint system.
Hipbone of infants is so small that ordinary
seat belt may not be fixed on the lower part
of its hipbone. Instead, it will move upward
and be fastened on the abdomen of infants.
The seat belt will apply acting force on this
part of body in case of a traffic accident,
while this part is not protected by any
skeletal structure. Only this may result in
severe injury or even death. To lower the
risk of severe or fatal injuries to infants in
case of a traffic accident, the infants shall
always be fixed in a proper child protective
device.
Larger Children
Older child who cannot be seated in child
safety seat shall wear seat belt.
117
Seats and Protective Devices
The instructions attached to the child safety
seat have descriptions of body weight and
height limits for the child sitting in it. Before
1
a child passes the following applicability
test, child safety seat should be used
together with hip/shoulder seat belt:
• Try to sit on the seat as back as possible.
Can child’s knees bend on the edge of 2
seat? If yes, please go on. If no, please
still use a child safety seat.
• Fasten the three-point seat belt properly.
Can the shoulder belt be put on the
child’s shoulder? If yes, please go on. If 3
no, please still use a child safety seat.
• Could the lap belt be fastened as low as
possible and cling to the child’s hip and
just touch thigh? If yes, please go on. If
no, please still use a child safety seat. 4
• Can the seat belt be always fastened
properly during entire process? If yes,
please go on. If no, please still use a
child safety seat.
Question: How to wear the seat belt 5
properly?
Answer: Older child should wear hip/
shoulder seat belt and obtain additional
restriction force provided by shoulder belt.
Shoulder belt should not cross the face or 6
neck. Lap belt should cling to hip and just
touch upper part of thigh. In this way, the
acting force of seat belt will act on child's
pelvis in case of traffic accident. Be sure not
to fasten the lap belt on abdomen. 7
Otherwise, serious injury may occur in case
of collision.
According to accident statistical data, it will
be safer for children and infants to sit
properly in child protective devices or infant
8
protective devices on rear seats.
Seats and Protective Devices
Child who has not fastened the seat belt
may run into others who have fastened their
seat belts or be thrown out of the vehicle in
case of collision. Older child should wear
seat belt properly.
Do not allow two children to share one
seat belt. Seat belt will be unable to
distribute impact force in this way. Two
children will run into each other and get
severely injured in case of traffic accident.
Do not let the shoulder belt be
pressed on the back of a child when
the child uses a seat belt. Hip/shoulder seat
belt will cause severe injuries to child if it is
not fastened properly. Shoulder belt will be
118
unable to protect child in case of traffic
collision. Child will move forward
excessively so that the possibility of hurting
child's head and neck will increase. Child
may slide under the lap belt. Acting force of
seat belt will be applied right on abdomen.
Severe injury or even death may occur. The
shoulder belt should be fastened across
shoulder and chest.
Description of the Child Restraint
System
Backward child seat
Backward infant seat provides protection by
making the surface of the cushion clinging
to infant's back. Belt restraint system will fix
infant on proper position so that the infant
will still sit in protective device in case of
traffic collision.
It's recommended to select and use
universal or semi-universal certificated
ISOFIX child seats. Non-standard child
seats are not recommended.
Don't use backward children restraint
system at the seat that is under frontal
airbag protection (in activated state)!

Forward child seat
Forward child seat provides protection by
binding the child's body with belts.
It's recommended to select and use
universal or semi-universal certificated
ISOFIX child seats. Non-standard child
seats are not recommended.
Auxiliary seat
An auxiliary seat is a kind of child protective
device designed to improve comfort of seat
belt system.
Installation of the Child
Restraint System
According to accident statistical data, it will
be safer if child and infants are restrained in
119
Seats and Protective Devices
child protection system or infant protection
system on rear seats.
1
If the front passenger airbag is
inflated, a child sitting in backward
child protective device on front passenger
seat may get severely injured or even killed.
Please fix the backward child protective
2
device on rear seat. Before fixing a child
restraint system on the rear seat, please
carefully read the instructions attached to
the child restraint system and ensure that it
is suitable to be mounted on this vehicle. Be
3
aware that unfixed child protective device
may move and hit passengers in vehicle in
case of collision or emergency braking. Be
sure to fix child protective device in vehicle
properly even if no child is seated in vehicle.
4
The warning labels are on the front and
back of the sun visor at the front passenger
side, reminding that the vehicle is equipped
with front airbags and the related
precautions shall be observed. 5
7
8
Seats and Protective Devices
Don't use backward children restraint
system at the seat that is under frontal
airbag protection (in activated state)!
Installation of Hip/Shoulder Type
Seat Belt (ALR/ELR Seat Belt)
Installation of backward infant seat
Backward infant seat is mounted toward the
rear of the vehicle.
120
If the installation of child restraint
system will obstruct the mechanical
locking device of front seat, the child
restraint system should not be installed on
rear seat. Otherwise, it will cause severe
injuries and even death to the child and front
passenger in case of an emergency braking
or collision. If there is not enough space
behind the driver seat to install the child
restraint system, please install it on the right
rear seat.
Put the three-point seat belt through or
around the infant (child) seat, insert the
buckle tongue into the lock catch and do not
twist the seat belt, following instructions
 Seats and Protective Devices

given by the manufacturer. Keep waist seat Installation of forward child seat
belt tight. When installing a forward child seat, we
recommend you to install it on ISOFIX
1
After the latch plate is inserted, be
interface of the rear seat.
sure to confirm that the latch plate and
buckle are secured and the seat belt is not
twisted. Do not insert coins, clips, etc., into
the buckle so as to avoid the improper lock
2
of the latch plate and buckle.
If the function of the buckle is abnormal, go
to Geely Service for inspection immediately.
Please do not use the seat until the buckle
is repaired.
3

5
Push or pull the infant protective device in
different directions to ensure it is secured.

According to the instructions provided by the

manufacturer, put the lap belt and the 6
shoulder belt through or around the child
protective device. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle. Do not twist the seat belt. tighten
the seat belt around waist. Tighten the seat
belt at waist. 7

To remove the child safety device, press the

8
release button on the buckle.

121
Seats and Protective Devices
Pull the shoulder belt fully to locking state
and it cannot be pulled out when the
shoulder belt retracts a little. Before allowing
it to retract, make sure that it has entered
the locked state so that the child safety seat
is secured.
While pressing the child safety device to the
cushion and the backrest, let the shoulder
seat belt retract completely to fix the child
seat tight.
122
Push or pull the child safety device in
different directions to ensure it is firmly
fixed. It shall be installed according to the
instructions provided by the manufacturer.
Installation of auxiliary seat
Put the child on child safety device, put the
thigh seat belt and the shoulder seat belt
through or around the child, insert the
buckle tongue into the lock catch and do not
twist the seat belt, following the instructions
provided by the manufacturer. Be sure to
put shoulder belt across child's shoulder
correctly, and try to keep lap belt as low as
possible to the hip of child. Please refer to
the section “Seat Belt” in this chapter for
details.

To remove the child safety device, press the
release button on the buckle. Let the seat
belt retract, and the seat belt will be
functioning as usual.
Make sure that the shoulder belt is at
the middle of the child's shoulder.
Keep the seat belt away from the neck of
child but do not put the seat belt below
child’s shoulder. Otherwise, severe injury
or death may occur. High lap belt and loose
seat belt, in case of collision or other
accident, may cause serious injuries
because the waist belt slips down. Ensure
that the lap belt is kept close to the hip of
child as low as possible. For child’s safety,
do not put shoulder belt below child’s arm.
Installation of the ISOFIX Child
Restraint System
Child safety device is mounted on rear seat
with special fixing interface of ISO
specifications. Fixing interface is mounted in
the gaps on both sides between seat and
backrest of two rear-row seats. Standard
ISO child safety device can be fixed through
these specific interfaces. Under this
123
Seats and Protective Devices
condition, no seat belt is necessary to fix the
child safety device.
When installing and using the ISOFIX child
1
protection system, please follow the
operation and safety instructions of the
manufacturer. Otherwise the protective
effect may be affected.
2
Confirm with the child safety device
manufacturer whether the child safety
device can be used for this type.
According to the following steps, install the
child restraint system that needs a top
3
drawstring:
1. Lower the headrest to the lowest
position.
4
2. Open the gap between seat cushion and
6
backrest, and confirm the position of
ISOFIX interface near the safety buckle.
3. Align the ISOFIX interface of child safety
seat with the corresponding ISOFIX
interface on the back of the seat and
7
insert it.
4. Inspect whether the buckle is locked
properly.
8
Seats and Protective Devices

Confirm that the LATCH seatbelt is

fastened firmly. Push and pull the
child safety device in different directions to
check whether it is secured. Installation
shall be carried out according to
manufacturer's instruction.

If the forward child seat is not installed

to the ISOFIX interface correctly, the
protective device may not work properly.
Severe injury or even death may occur to
the child. When mounting a child restraint
system, be sure to strictly follow the
manufacturer's instructions.
The child restraint system's fixing points are
only designed to carry the load imposed by
the properly installed child restraint system.
Under no circumstances should it be used
5. Latch the buckle of the top drawstring
for seat belts, wiring harnesses, or other
onto the fixing pole.
items and equipment to be fixed to the
vehicle.
Be sure to install the child restraint system
when the vehicle is stationary. When the
ISOFIX child restraint system is correctly
fixed to the ISOFIX fixed interface, you will
hear a "click" sound.

124
 Starting and Driving

Key Please keep the backup smart key in

Smart key
Introduction of Key Buttons
The smart key has already been
programmed specifically to the safety
system of your vehicle. Smart keys without
being programmed cannot start the engine.
If the smart key is lost or damaged, the
replacement can be obtained only from
Geely Service. If the smart key is lost or
stolen, please contact Geely Service as
soon as possible. The lost smart key will be
disabled to starting your vehicle. If the smart
key is retrieved again, its function can be
activated again by Geely Service.
a safe place and do not place it in
1
vehicle.
The electronic jamming of items with
built-in anti-theft chip may make the
smart key system and anti-theft system
work abnormally and the vehicle may not be
2
able to start.
Take out the Mechanical Key
Press the release button on the side of the
smart key to take out the mechanical key.
3

A new smart key cannot be provided 4

immediately. It takes some time for
Geely Service to match a new smart key
with your vehicle.

If the smart key is interfered by other

signals, the vehicle may have
functional abnormalities such as: unable to
start, unable to detect the key, abnormal 6
unlocking/locking, welcome light
abnormality, etc. For instance:
• It is shielded and covered by a metal
object, for example, a smart key and a
1. Locking button/vehicle locating button metal case mobile phone are placed 7
2. Trunk unlocking button together.
3. Unlock button • The key is placed next to electrical
4. Remote start button equipment with strong interference, such
5. Mechanical emergency key as laptop, wireless mouse, mobile
phone, wireless charging device,
8

125
Starting and Driving

dashboard camera and other radio

frequency interference sources.
• Signal interference sources exist around
the vehicle, such as wireless door
opener, ordering machine, etc.
Please keep the backup smart key in
a safe place and do not place it in
vehicle.

Smart Key Battery Replacement

Battery in the smart key should be replaced
when the remote control distance of smart 3. Replace the battery. Be sure to put the
key is very short, unable to remotely control anode toward the back cover (sign
the vehicle, or vehicle cannot recognize the side). Smart key battery model: 3V,
smart key due to low battery power. CR2032.
1. Pull out the mechanical key, insert the
mechanical key into the side opening at
the front of the key, and then hold the
handle to pry the key back cover open.

4. Install the smart key chip on the back

cover (sign side).
5. Engage the two halves of key cover in
place.
2. Remove the smart key chip.
The smart key is fitted with a precise
circuit. Be sure to prevent it from
impact, water, high temperature, moisture,
direct sunlight, solvent, wax and corrosion of
abrasive cleaner.

Do not expose the smart key directly

in the environment below -20° for a
long time. Otherwise the smart key may give

126
 Starting and Driving

low battery alarm. Then replace the battery Anti-theft System

in time. Avoid affecting its remote control
Engine Anti-theft System 1
function, or the vehicle may not be able to
The engine anti-theft system does not need
start normally and the use of vehicle may be
to be manually activated or deactivated.
affected.
When the ignition switch is pressed and a
valid smart key is detected in vehicle, the
negative anti-theft system will be 2
automatically deactivated.
If neither method can start the motor, your
vehicle needs to be repaired. Please contact
Geely Service for a new smart key.
• If the smart key is undamaged but does
3
not work, try another smart key.

• Put the smart key in the cup holder with

smart key signal sensing sign on the
auxiliary console to start.
6
Do not leave the smart key or devices
that can disable the anti-theft system
in vehicle.

127
Starting and Driving

Vehicle Locking and phones, wireless mouse, computers,

Unlocking wireless charging devices, and trip
recorders, or when there are radio
Locking and Unlocking frequency interference sources in the
Smart key surrounds of the vehicle, the key functions,
the close unlocking/remote locking function
and the close lighting function may be
abnormal or the vehicle prompts that the
key cannot be found. After the key and
vehicle leave away from the interference
sources, the abnormality will automatically
disappear.

Passive Entry Passive Start

(PEPS) System
Set the PEPS

The remote control/smart key only works

within a certain distance. Please note that
its working distance is sometimes affected
by physical and geographic factors. For
safety, when locking the vehicle, check and
confirm whether the operation is successful.
Only when the start and stop button is off,
and the four doors, front compartment hood
and trunk are closed, can the vehicle be
locked correctly.
Parking the vehicle for a long time (for
Click on the multimedia display screen in
example, in your garage) may cause the
turn: Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings →
drained battery and the failure to restart the
Vehicle Lock/Key, and then select the front
engine.
doors or the whole vehicle in the PEPS
When the smart key or the central setting interface.
door lock fails, the mechanical key • Single door: Either the driver side door or
can be used to lock/unlock the driver side the front passenger side door can be
door. unlocked by keyless entry, while the
remaining doors will not be unlocked.
When the smart key is placed
• Whole vehicle: After this function is
together with radio frequency
enabled, open either the driver side door
interference sources such as mobile
or the front passenger side door through

128

the keyless entry function, and the whole
vehicle will be unlocked.
Keyless unlocking
Type 1
Unlocking sensor area
If the PEPS function has been set as the
Whole Vehicle in the multimedia display
screen, carry a valid smart key and be within
1m of the driver's or the front passenger's
door, just put hand directly into the
unlocking sensor area on the door handle,
the four doors will be unlocked
automatically; pull the door handle and the
door will open. After unlocking successfully,
the turn signal lamps flash 2 times.
Type 2
129
Starting and Driving
Click on the multimedia display screen in
turn: Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings →
Vehicle Lock/Key, and then activate the
1
close unlocking/remote locking function in
the interface. After this function is enabled,
and the vehicle is locked, when the driver
approaches the vehicle with a valid smart
key, the vehicle is unlocked, and the turn 2
signal lamps flash 2 times.
When the vehicle is in a charging pile,
a large parking lot, a substation, and
other places with signal interference, or
3
when the smart key is put together with the
interference equipment, the smart key will
be interfered. Consequently, abnormal key
functions such as unlocking or locking
abnormalities will be observed occasionally.
If so, wait for 3 seconds before placing hand
4
on the door handle unlocking or locking
sensor area for unlocking or locking.
To lower the power consumption of
the whole vehicle, the close 5
unlocking/remote locking function and the
door step lamp function may be
automatically disactivated in some cases,
which can be reactivated by starting the
vehicle.
6
Starting and Driving
Keyless locking
Type 1
Locking sensor area
When the start and stop button is off, and
the four doors, front compartment hood,
trunk and fuel filler cap are closed, put your
hand on the lock sensor area of the driver/
front passenger side door handle, and the
whole vehicle is locked. Upon successful
locking, the turn signal flashes once, and
the backlight lamp inside the vehicle
gradually goes out.
Keyless locking fails if:
• start-and-stop switch is activated
• There is a door not closed.
When touching the front door handle sensor
area to lock, if you neither hear the locking
sound nor seeing the turn signal, this
indicates that the locking failed, which may
be caused by:
• When the vehicle is locked, and the trunk
is opened and then closed, if the smart
key which is used for locking is left inside
the trunk, the trunk will not be locked.
Prevent smart keys from being locked in
the vehicle.
130
• To prevent misoperation, when the driver
uses the front door handle to unlock, he
needs to wait for 3 seconds before
keyless locking; the keyless unlocking
function becomes unavailable within 3
seconds of locking.
• There is a dead zone in the smart key
detection, do not put the smart key in
remote places such as shelves.
When the smart key battery is drained, the
smart key can be inductively locked by
sticking the key to the outside of the driver's
door handle.
Type 2
Click on the multimedia display screen in
turn: Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings →
Vehicle Lock/Key, and then activate the
close unlocking/remote locking function in
the interface. After this function is enabled,
and the start and stop button is off, and the
four doors, front compartment hood, trunk
and fuel filler cap are closed, and the whole
vehicle is unlocked, when the driver leaves
the vehicle with the valid smart key, the
whole vehicle is automatically locked. After
successful locking, the turn signal lamps
flash 1 time, and the vehicle enters the anti-
theft mode.

When the vehicle is in a charging pile,
a large parking lot, a substation, and
other places with signal interference, or
when the smart key is put together with the
interference equipment, the smart key will
be interfered. Consequently, abnormal key
functions such as unlocking/locking
abnormalities will be observed occasionally.
If so, wait for 3 seconds before placing hand
on the door handle unlocking/locking sensor
area for unlocking/locking.
To lower the power consumption of
the whole vehicle, the close
unlocking/remote locking function and the
door step lamp function may be
automatically disactivated in some cases,
which can be reactivated by starting the
vehicle.
After the function of approaching
unlock/leaving lock is enabled, please
confirm the locking prompt and the
successful locking before leaving.
Locking and Unlocking Remotely
Locking
When the start and stop button is off, and
the four doors, front compartment hood,
trunk and fuel filler cap are closed, short
press the lock button on the smart key, the
whole vehicle will be locked, the turn signal
lamps flash 1 time, the compartment lamp
goes out gradually, and the audio
entertainment system is turned off; Press
and hold the lock key , and the four
windows, sunroof and sunroof sunshade are
closed.
131
Starting and Driving
Unlocking
et the key unlocking function to the whole
vehicle unlocking. Short press the unlock
1
button on the smart key, and the whole
vehicle will be unlocked, and the turn signal
lamp will flash 2 times.
Do not allow children to enter the
2
trunk. Make sure the trunk is closed
when the vehicle is left unattended. Once
children are trapped in the trunk, it's highly
impossible to escape, which may cause
heatstroke or suffocation.
3
Two-step unlocking function
4
5
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings →
Vehicle Lock/Key, and then select the driver 6
mode (that is, the two-step unlock function)
or the whole vehicle in the key unlocking
setting menu.
• Driver: After this function is enabled,
short press the unlock button on the 7
smart key once, and only the driver's
door will be unlocked. To unlock the
whole vehicle, short press the smart key
unlock button again.
8
Starting and Driving

• Whole vehicle: After this function is

enabled, short press the unlock button
on the smart key once, and the vehicle
will be unlocked.

Use the Mechanical Key to Lock/

Unlock
Use a mechanical key to lock and
unlock the driver's door
1. Take out the mechanical key from the
smart key.
2. Insert the mechanical key into the door
lock of the front passenger's door. Turn
the mechanical key, and close the front
passenger side door to lock it. The rear
doors that need to be locked can be
locked separately in this way.

Locking and Unlocking inside

the Vehicle

2. Insert the mechanical key into the

driver's door lock. Turn clockwise to
unlock the driver's door. Turn
counterclockwise to lock the driver's
door.

Use the mechanical key to lock the

front passenger’s door and the rear
doors.
1. Take out the mechanical key from the 1. Interior unlock button
smart key. 2. Interior lock button
With all four doors closed, press the lock
button on the doors to lock all doors.
When four doors are locked, all doors will be
unlocked if unlocking button is pressed.

Unlocking in vehicle through the

central control button is only available

132
 Starting and Driving

when the anti-theft state is lifted. At the anti-

theft state, the unlocking operation will not
be responded.
Automatic Locking and
Unlocking
Automatic re-locking
When unlocking through smart key outside
the vehicle, and after a period of time, none
of the front compartment hood, four doors
and the trunk is opened, then the four doors
will be automatically re-locked. The turn
signal lamps will flash 1 time and the vehicle
will enter the anti-theft mode.
Automatic locking during driving
When the start-and-stop switch is in Mode II
or the engine is started, if the vehicle speed
is greater than 7km/h, the four door locks
will be automatically locked.
Collision unlock
In case of severe frontal impact during
travel, the four doors are unlocked
automatically so that the occupants can
leave the vehicle quickly.
Vehicle Locating Function
When you cannot confirm the location of
your vehicle, you can use this function to
find the specific location of your vehicle.
When the vehicle locating mode is set to
whistle and flash, and the vehicle is in the
anti-theft state, quickly press the lock button
on the smart key 2 times to activate the
vehicle locating function, and the position
lamp lights up for 25 seconds, the turn
signal lamp flashes 6 times, and the horn
sounds 3 times.
1
2
Click on the multimedia display screen in
turn: Vehicle Settings → Vehicle Settings → 3
Vehicle Locating Mode, and then select to
set as flashing only or honking flashing in
the interface.
Window Opening Function
4
When you need to open the window in
advance, press and hold the unlocking key
within an effective range of the smart key,
and the window will be opened
automatically.
5
Window Closing Function
When you need to close the windows, you
can press and hold the lock button within the
effective range of the smart key to
automatically close the windows. 6
Open the Trunk
When manually opening or closing the
trunk, please be gentle (to open or
close slowly). Failure to do so may result in 7
damage or loss of function of the trunk.

133
Starting and Driving
Open the trunk in the vehicle*
When the vehicle is stationary and the
external anti-theft alarm system is in an
unprotected state, pull the trunk unlock
button on the driver's door upward and hold
to open the trunk.
You can also click on the multimedia display
screen in turn: Vehicle Settings → Quick
Control → Trunk, and then select Open in
this interface.
Animated illustration does not
represent actual openings.
134
Open the trunk outside the vehicle.
When the vehicle is stationary, if the lock
switch in the vehicle is in unlocked state and
the external anti-theft alarm system is in
unprotected state, the trunk can be opened
by pressing the external trunk switch.
When the smart key is near the trunk, press
the external trunk switch to open the trunk
when it is not disturbed.
Unlock the trunk with smart key
When the start-and-stop switch is
disactivated, long press the trunk unlock
button on the smart key to unlock the trunk.
Automatically open trunk*
When the vehicle is locked, stand with the
smart key at the 0.8m area of the trunk for 3
 Starting and Driving

seconds. When the turn signal lamp flashes,
please step back slowly. Stop when the turn
signal lamp flashes faster. After a few
seconds, the trunk will open automatically.
Trunk opening height setting*
2. Enter the trunk directly from the trunk,
and find the cover plate of trunk
emergency opening device on the rear
1
trim panel tail gate;

3. Buckle the cover of trunk emergency

1. When opening the trunk outside the opening device;
vehicle, press the trunk closing button to 4. Pull up the trunk emergency opening
4
suspend the opening of the trunk. switch to open the trunk.
2. Long press the trunk closing button and
hear two beeps, the height of the trunk
is successfully set, and the next time the
trunk is opened, opening height is the 5
one set this time.
3. To adjust the setting height, push the
trunk up or down manually, and repeat
step 2, and the opening height of the
trunk will be reset. 6
Trunk Emergency Opening
When a person is accidentally locked in the
trunk, the trunk emergency opening device
can be used.
7
Specific opening method is as follows:
1. Fully fold the rear seat backrests. For
details, see "Front and Rear Seat
Adjustments" in "Seats and Protective
Device";
8

135
Starting and Driving

Closing the Trunk Close the trunk outside the vehicle*

Close the trunk in the vehicle*

When the vehicle is stationary and the trunk

is open, press the trunk closing button to
When the vehicle is stationary and the trunk
close the trunk.
is open, long press the trunk unlock button
on the driver's door to close the trunk when Door Handle
the external anti-theft alarm system is in an
unprotected state.

When the doors are unlocked, they can be

opened by the inner-ward and outer-ward
You can also click on the multimedia display opening handles on the doors.
screen in turn: Vehicle Settings → Quick
Control → Trunk, and then select Close in
this interface.

Animated illustration does not

represent actual openings.

136

Child Safety Lock
The left/right rear doors are fitted with child
safety locks. Please use the child safety
locks when the rear seats are occupied by
children.
The child safety lock switch is at the outer
edge of each rear door. Insert the
mechanical key into the child safety lock
and turn it along the direction of the arrow,
and the child safety lock is in the OPEN
position. The door cannot be opened inside
the vehicle, but can only be opened from
outside the vehicle, so as to ensure
children's safety during driving.
After setting the child safety lock, be
sure to check whether the door can be
opened from inside to ensure that the child
safety lock functions normally.
137
Starting and Driving
Vehicle Start
Start-and-stop Switch (PEPS) 1
3
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic
keyless start-and-stop switch, which
belongs to key-press starting model. To
activate the system, the attached smart key 4
should be placed in the vehicle and
detected.
Use the start-and-stop switch to switch
different power modes:
• Mode 0: Unlock the vehicle and open the 5
driver's door. In this mode, electrical
features such as clocks, audio, and
position lamps become available for a
limited period.
• Mode I: When the start-and-stop switch 6
is set to Mode 0, pressing the start switch
once without depressing the brake pedal
will push the start-and-stop switch to
Mode I. Press the start-and-stop switch
again to recover to Mode 0. Some quick
7
functions such as power windows can be
used in this mode.
If the start-and-stop switch is still in
Mode I after the vehicle engine is
disactivated, the battery power will be
consumed. If the low-voltage battery power
8
Starting and Driving
is excessively low, it may be impossible to
start the vehicle.
• Mode II: When the start-and-stop switch
is set to Mode 0 or I, pressing and
holding the start switch for several
seconds without depressing the brake
pedal will push the start-and-stop switch
to Mode II. Most electrical equipment
such as headlamps and fog lamps
become available in this mode. The
system completes self-test in a few
seconds.
Do not leave the smart key in vehicle
or where children can reach it.
Children may operate the car and cause
serious casualties.
If the vehicle cannot be started by
PEPS, the keyless start might be
interfered due to the strong electromagnetic
signal nearby.
Start the Engine (PEPS)
1. Start-and-stop switch
2. Brake pedal
3. shaft lever
4. Smart key
138
To start the engine, the following conditions
must be met:
1. Carry a valid smart key.
2. The shift lever is in P or N position.
3. Press the brake pedal.
4. Press down the start-and-stop switch.
• Before starting the vehicle, please check
that the seat, steering wheel and interior/
exterior mirrors are adjusted to a safe
and comfortable position.
• Check that the brake pedal can be fully
depressed before starting the vehicle.
• Start the vehicle in accordance with local
environmental laws and regulations.
• Please check whether the surrounding
environment is acceptable for starting the
vehicle, if not, do not start the vehicle.
• If the engine has not yet reached
operating temperature, avoid high engine
revs and fully depress the accelerator
pedal; otherwise, the engine may be
damaged.
• Do not take the remote control key out of
the vehicle or operate the starter switch
during the driving, as this may cause the
stalling of engine.
If the turbocharged engine is replaced
with engine oil, oil filter, newly
installed supercharger or an engine that has
been out of service for a long time, it should
run at idle speed for a few minutes before
full-load operation to ensure good
lubrication.

Start Program Operations
1. This vehicle is equipped with a keyless
starting system. When the driver needs
to start the engine, press down the
brake pedal and then press down the
start-and-stop switch. After the engine
starts, release the start-and-stop switch.
After the engine is warmed up, the idle
speed will drop. Do not increase the
engine speed immediately after starting
the engine, to ensure that the engine
can be fully preheated and lubricated.
2. If the smart key isn't in the vehicle or it
gets interfered with, the combination
instrument will display the prompt that
the smart key isn't in the vehicle. In this
case, the engine cannot be started. This
vehicle is equipped with a computer-
controlled starting system. This function
will assist in starting the engine and
protecting the components.
Press the start-and-stop switch and
release it when the engine begins to
start. The starter will drive the engine to
continue starting for a few seconds until
the engine starts to run. If the engine
cannot run even if the start-and-stop
switch is kept pressed, the starting
operation will be suspended to avoid
damage to the starter. Press the start-
and-stop switch again to perform the
next start.
After the start fails, if you press the
start-and-stop switch again to start the
engine for a long time, the starter will
overheat and thus be damaged. Therefore,
if the start fails, there should be at least 30
seconds before restarts. After 3 consecutive
139
Starting and Driving
starts, it is recommended to start again after
the starter has sufficiently cooled down at
an interval of 15 minutes or more.
1
Backup Starting Program of the
Vehicle
When the vehicle is in an area with strong
signal interference, the battery of the smart 2
key is at a low level, or the PEPS function
fails, if you try to start the vehicle and press
the start-and-stop switch, the combination
instrument may prompt that the key is not in
the vehicle. At this time, it is not possible to 3
start the vehicle through the push-button
start program.
Please start the vehicle as per the following
steps:
1. The shift lever is in P position. 4
5
6
2. Put the smart key in the cup holder with
smart key signal sensing sign on the
auxiliary console.
3. Press the brake pedal. 7
4. Press down the start-and-stop switch.
When the vehicle is under strong signal
interference, use the backup starting
program to drive the vehicle away from the
area, and then the keyless starting function 8
will be recovered.
Starting and Driving
If the PEPS program still fails to work after
the battery is replaced and the vehicle is out
of the interference area, please contact
Geely Service for maintenance as soon as
possible.
Remote Start Function
This function will work when you need to
start the vehicle remotely.
If the vehicle is in an anti-theft state and the
smart key is in the sensing range, press the
lock key on the smart key first, and press
and hold the remote start key within 2
seconds to start the vehicle.
When the vehicle is in the remote start state
and the smart key is in the sensing range,
press the remote start button 2 times and
the remote start function exits.
Engine Start-Stop System
Start-stop system switch
Click on the multimedia display screen in
turn: Vehicle Settings → More Settings, and
then activate or disactivate the engine start-
stop function in the interface. The vehicle
meets the automatic stop condition, and the
start-stop function can only be activated
when the vehicle speed is higher than
140
12km/h. The status indicator lamp of engine
start-stop system on the instrument pack
display lights up and grows green, indicating
that the vehicle has stopped.
This function supports moving the vehicle
after two stops (release the brake pedal,
and depress the brake pedal to enter the
stop state again when the vehicle speed is
greater than 2km/h).
Permissible conditions for automatic
stop
Permissible conditions for automatic stop of
engine management system (EMS)
(automatic stop will not be possible if any of
the following conditions are not met):
1. Activate the start-stop switch.
2. Engine coolant temperature is normal.
3. No throttle fault, no air intake
temperature pressure sensor fault.
4. The electronic stability control (ESC)
system is not enabled.
5. The anti-lock braking system (ABS) is
not enabled.
6. The front engine compartment hood is
closed.
7. The driver's door is closed.
8. The driver's seat belt is fastened.
9. The brake vacuum is reasonable.
10. No brake fault, no vehicle speed fault.
11. The airbag is not triggered.
12. The A/C system is allowed to start and
stop.
13. The transmission is allowed to stop.
14. The altitude is less than 2500 meters.
15. The steering angle is less than a certain
angle.
16. Non-low temperature environment.
17. Non-snow mode or offroad mode.
 Starting and Driving

18. The gear is in D, N or P. 10. There is not comfort mode or economic

19. The Automatic Parking System (APA) is mode.
not enabled. 11. The brake pedal is released in the D
1
20. The Adaptive Cruise System (ACC) gear (or the brake pedal is not
function allows shutdown. depressed firmly) and the AUTO HOLD
21. The voltage of 12V battery is normal. does not intervene.
22. The temperature of 12V battery is 12. Depress the brake pedal to switch from
normal. D gear to non-P gear.
2
23. When the vehicle speed is greater than 13. Switch to any other gear from P.
a certain value, it is allowed to shut 14. When the AUTO HOLD function is
down. activated, depress the accelerator
24. When the vehicle stops, the brake pedal pedal.
needs to be pressed for a certain stroke. 15. The Automatic Parking System (APA) is
3
activated.
If the above conditions are met, the
16. The Adaptive Cruise System (ACC)
status indicator lamp of engine start-
function requests to start.
stop system on the instrument pack display
17. The voltage of 12V battery is low.
will light up and grow green. 4
18. The temperature of 12V battery is too
Automatic start-stop conditions low or too high.
Trigger conditions for automatic start of 19. Depress and hold he brake pedal for a
engine management system (EMS) (any of period exceeding the threshold.
the following conditions will trigger
The start-stop function fails 5
automatic start of engine management
1. Brake switch fails.
system (EMS))
2. The vehicle speed signal fails.
1. Disactivate the start-stop switch.
3. Brake pressure sensor signal error.
2. The coolant temperature is not
4. Airbag fault.
satisfactory.
3. The front engine compartment hood is Precautions for vehicles with start-stop 6
opened. function (on slopes)
4. Driver side door is open 1. The start-stop will not be activated
5. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. beyond a certain slope.
6. The brake vacuum is not satisfactory. 2. After the engine is stopped on a slope
7. The A/C system requests to start. less than a certain gradient, pay 7
8. The automatic transmission control unit attention to activate the AUTO HOLD
(TCU) requests to start. function to prevent the sliding.
9. The steering angle is greater than a
certain value.
8

141
Starting and Driving

Vehicle Cannot be Started 2. If the vehicle still cannot be started,

Before the inspection, be sure to start as per please contact Geely Service for
the correct starting steps, and it must be maintenance.
confirmed whether there is enough fuel.
Driving
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic
Under the following circumstances, special
anti-theft system, and it is necessary to
attention should be paid to the lower
check whether other keys can start the
components of the vehicle to avoid
engine. If so, the smart key may fail. Give
scratching the chassis.
the smart key to Geely Auto for
• When driving on roads with poor
maintenance. If no smart key works, the
conditions.
system may be faulty. Please contact Geely
• When passing road curbs.
Service for maintenance.
• When running on abrupt slopes.
If the engine cannot run or the speed is too
Be especially careful when the vehicle
slow:
is fully loaded.
1. Check whether the terminals of the
battery are secure and clean. For vehicles equipped with
2. If the battery terminals are free of turbocharged engines, it is strictly
problem, turn on the interior lamps. forbidden to adopt the operation method of
When starting the vehicle, if the interior acceleration-stalling and neutral-position
lamps don't light up, dim, or go out, then sliding. The engine suddenly stalls at full
the power of battery runs out. Try to load and high temperature, the oil pump
start the vehicle via jump starting. See stops working, the lubricant cannot take
the section "Jumper Start" in the chapter away the heat of the parts in the
"Faults Found During Driving". turbocharger, and the supercharger will be
If the lamps work normally, but the engine damaged due to overheating.
still cannot be started. Please contact Geely
New Vehicle Running-in
Service for maintenance.
The running-in of new vehicle is
Do not start the vehicle by trailer or
mainly to improve the surface quality
cart, or it will damage the vehicle or
and the friction and wear state of moving
cause collision, overheating of the three-
parts, so as to extend service life and
way catalytic converter and fire.
reduce fuel consumption. In the new vehicle
If the starter rotates at normal speed but the
running-in period, observe the following
engine cannot start:
requirements:
1. Repeated starting will cause oil spill in
• When starting and running, avoid
the engine. Try to fully depress the
pressing the accelerator pedal to the
accelerator pedal before starting the
floor.
engine.

142
 Starting and Driving

• During the running-in period, the vehicle once to extend the service life of the engine
should run on a flat road. Avoid driving oil.
on muddy or sandy roads.
1
• Urban conditions: the average speed is
• Avoid idling the engine.
30-40 km/h, and the driving time is more
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
than 50 minutes.
• Avoid emergency braking within the first
• Highway conditions: the average speed
300 kilometers.
is greater than 80 km/h, and the driving 2
• Do not keep driving at the same speed distance is more than 30km.
for a long time, regardless of high speed Before stopping for a short-distance
or low speed. driving, depress the accelerator pedal
Driving the Vehicle in Cold several times heavily, which is beneficial to
Weather (below 0°C) eliminate the water vapor in the exhaust
3
pipe.
90% of the wear and tear of the
moving parts of the engine occurs in Park on Combustibles
the cold state. In order to reduce wear,
Do not park on paper, leaves, hay, or
extend the service life of the engine, and
other flammable materials, so as not
reduce fuel consumption, the following
to catch fire and burn due to contact with
4
requirements must be complied with when
high-temperature exhaust parts, which may
starting a cold engine:
cause accidents.
• After starting the vehicle, let it idling for 2- Economy Driving
3 minutes before driving.
• After starting, the vehicle should keep
Using different driving methods, the 5
difference in fuel consumption can reach
driving at a low speed below 40 km/h,
10%-15%. Please drive economically for
and then continue normal driving after
energy saving and environmental
the coolant temperature indicator starts
protection.
to change (50-60°C).
When driving the vehicle, make sure
6
Long-term short-distance driving in
of a safe ride, and observe traffic rules
cold weather, and the coolant
and regulations. Do not interfere with others
temperature does not reach the middle mark
and public transportation.
line, resulting in deterioration of the engine
oil, wear of the engine moving parts, and 1. Start smoothly and accelerate
High fuel consumption during start and 7
increased fuel consumption.
If the coolant temperature of the driving acceleration. When driving the vehicle,
vehicle does not reach the middle mark line try to avoid suddenly pressing the
after one consecutive week, drive the accelerator pedal to start and
vehicle in the following driving conditions accelerate. Smooth starting and
8

143
Starting and Driving

acceleration are helpful to reduce fuel and result in increased power

consumption.
2. A smooth start and acceleration will help
save fuel.
The speed of 40-60 km/h on general
roads and the speed of 80-100 km/h on
expressways are economic speeds. On
the premise of safe driving, maintaining
an economical speed and driving at a
constant speed can reduce fuel
consumption.
3. Avoid unnecessary braking
Keep a proper following distance from
the preceding vehicle and try to avoid
frequent braking; decelerate at a red
light, and let the vehicle coast. Avoid
sudden braking.
4. Reduce idling
Shut down the engine when the vehicle
is parked for a long time, and fuel is
consumed when the engine is idling.
Stop the engine when the parking
exceeds 1 minute in the case of traffic
jam and waiting for a red light for a long
time. Just idling for 30-40 seconds
saves more fuel than it takes to restart
the engine.
5. Keep the vehicle in low wind resistance
Opening windows when driving at high
speed will significantly increase the
wind resistance of the vehicle, leading
to higher fuel consumption. Please
close windows when the vehicle speed
is higher than 80 km/h.
6. Maintain correct tire pressure
Check tire pressure regularly.
Excessively low tire pressure will
increase the rolling resistance of tires
consumption.
7. Use AC properly
Air conditioning will significantly
increase the engine load, please use air
conditioning when necessary. Windows
can be opened at low speed. When A/C
is used, the interior circulation mode is
more energy-saving.
8. Reduce the vehicle load
Every extra kilogram of load may
increase the power consumption. Clear
unnecessary luggage in vehicle
regularly.
9. Regular maintenance
Do maintenance in accordance with the
prescribed time to keep the vehicle in
good condition. Engine running in a
good condition is not only conducive to
improving driving safety, but also
helping to reduce fuel consumption.
10. Plan a proper driving route
Optimize the route and try to avoid
traffic jams. This will save both time and
fuel.
11. Do not change the size of the tire at will
Using larger or wider tires will increase
fuel consumption.

144

Intelligent Fuel-saving
When the vehicle is in economy mode,
comfort mode or smart mode, click on the
multimedia display screen in turn: Vehicle
Settings → More Settings, and then activate
or disactivate the intelligent fuel-saving
function in this interface.
Start fuel-saving function is mainly used in
urban traffic congestion scenarios, which
can help improve fuel economy. This
function is activated by default. After
activated, it will automatically identify the
urban congestion conditions, to start the
auxiliary strategy to improve fuel efficiency.
Each time this function is activated, it only
works in the current driving cycle, and
should be activated again for new driving
cycles.
Drive Carefully
Driving carefully means “always be ready
to handle emergency”. The first step for
driving carefully is to fasten the seat belt.
Defensive driving: During driving,
drivers can accurately "foresee" the
dangers caused by other drivers,
pedestrians, bad weather or road
145
Starting and Driving
conditions, and take necessary, reasonable
and effective actions to prevent accidents
timely.
1
Keep a safe distance and concentrate
on driving. Driver's distraction may
result in collisions and lead to injuries or
death.
2
Drink Driving
Drink driving is very dangerous. Even
a small amount of alcohol can affect
people's reaction, feeling, attention and
judgment. Serious and even fatal crashes
3
can occur in case of driving under the
influence. Don't drive under the influence or
take a vehicle driven by a driver having a
alcohol. Please take a taxi home, or if there
are many peers, designate the one who 4
don't drink alcohol to drive.
Alcohol will affect the driver's
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision and attention. Records show that
5
alcohol is not a minor causes among all
motor vehicle-related deaths. In most cases,
driving under the influence is the cause of
death. The most significant way to eliminate
potential safety hazards on expressways is
to eliminate the driving under the influence.
6
Medical research has shown that alcohol in
the human body can make collision injuries
more serious, especially damages to the
brain, spine and heart. This means that
anyone (driver or passenger) who drinks 7
alcohol in a collision accident is more likely
to die or be disabled for life than those who
don't drink alcohol.
Drink driving will not only cause
8
accidents but also serious casualties.
Starting and Driving
According to the provisions of the Road
Traffic Safety Law, the traffic department will
impose penalties on drink driving
accordingly.
Driving through Water
To prevent the vehicle being damaged when
driving through water (e. g., the road is
flooded), be sure to pay attention to the
following precautions:
1. Check the depth before driving through
the water. The water level should not go
above the edge of the side beam.
2. Drive at a low speed, otherwise, waves
may form in front of the vehicle, which
may cause water ingress into the
engine's air intake system or other parts
of the vehicle.
3. Do not park, reverse, turn off or start the
engine in water under any
circumstance.
• When the vehicle runs on the road with
water, mud, etc., the braking effect may
be affected and the braking distance may
be prolonged. There is a risk of accident!
146
• Avoid sudden emergency braking
operations immediately after driving
through the water.
• When the vehicle runs on the road with
water, the brakes must be cleaned and
dried as soon as possible by intermittent
braking. Brake when traffic conditions
permit, to dry and clean the brakes and
avoid traffic accidents.
• Certain parts of the vehicle such as the
engine, transmission, chassis or
electrical system may be severely
damaged when driving through water.
• The height of wave made by the vehicle
from the opposite direction may exceed
the allowed water level of this vehicle.
• Pit, quagmire or stone may be hidden in
the water. It will make driving through the
water more difficult.
• Do not drive through saltwater. Salt can
cause vehicle corrosion. It is required to
use freshwater to flush all vehicle parts
which have been in contact with
saltwater.
• After driving through the water, it is
recommended to go to Geely Service for
a comprehensive inspection of the
vehicle. Eliminate hidden risks and
ensure driving safety.
Parking
Precautions for turbocharged engine
when stopping: avoid stopping
immediately when running at high speed
and full load, but gradually slow down and
reduce load. Idle for 3 ~ 5 minutes before

stopping, to prevent the turbocharger from
being damaged due to fuel shortage of
bearings or overheating of parts. Avoid
idling the engine for a long time (the idling
should not last for 20 minutes).
Stopping or Parking
• Park the vehicle on a flat, solid and safe
road that does not affect the traffic of
other vehicles.
• When parking, first step on the brake
pedal and then use the parking brake
until the vehicle stops slowly and stays
still, and then engage the shaft lever into
P gear.
Do not leave children or people with
limited mobility in the vehicle. They
may release the parking brake or operate
the shaft lever, causing the vehicle to move
and resulting in personal injury or death.
Vehicle Control
The following three systems can help
control the vehicle while driving: brake
system, steering system and acceleration
system. When driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the adhesion provided by
tires and roads is far lower than that
required by the control system. This means
lost control of the vehicle. Adding non-
original accessories may affect vehicle
performance.
147
Starting and Driving
Three-way Catalytic
Converter
1
Introduction of the Three-Way
Catalytic Converter
The exhaust system of this vehicle is
equipped with a three-way catalytic
converter, which can convert harmful gases 2
such as CO, HC and NOx, etc. from the
vehicle exhaust into harmless carbon
dioxide, water and nitrogen through
oxidation and reduction processes.
Improper use may cause damage to the 3
three-way catalytic converter, so pay special
attention to the following requirements to
lower the possibility of damage.
Failures such as engine misfire, after-
4
burning, etc. will cause serious
damage to the three-way catalytic
converter.
Please go to Geely Automobile
Service Station for maintenance in
5
accordance with the provisions in the
"Warranty and Maintenance Manual".
Requirements for Fuel
• Only use recommended fuel, see
"Recommended Fluid and Volume" in 6
"Technical Data".
• Do not let the vehicle run out of fuel,
which will cause the engine to stall and
damage the fuel pump.
Requirements for Starting 7
• Do not continue to start after several
failures, check and repair the vehicle as
soon as possible.
Starting and Driving
• Do not try to repeatedly depress the
brake pedal to start the engine because it
does not start.
• Do not start the vehicle by pushing or
towing.
Requirements for Driving
• Do not overload or overspeed the
engine.
• Do not turn off the vehicle while driving in
gear.
• If the power declines when the vehicle is
running, please check and repair it
immediately.
• Do not remove the spark plug or ignition
coil while the engine is running.
• Do not drive on terrain that can easily hit
the bottom of the vehicle.
148
Exhaust Emission
Exhaust Emission Control
Device
• Unleaded gasoline and qualified engine
oil should be used as required. Lead in
gasoline and impurities in engine oil may
damage the three-way catalytic
converter.
• Do not start the vehicle by pushing or
pulling it, otherwise, the unburned
gasoline will enter the exhaust device,
which will cause the catalytic converter to
overheat and burn.
Engine Exhaust
• When the vehicle is parked in the garage
and the engine does not shut down, do
not close the garage door so as to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning or
even death.
• If you feel that the exhaust gas may enter
the interior of the vehicle, you must find
the cause and try to eliminate it
immediately.
• If you are temporarily unable to park, you
must open all windows.
• Poor operating conditions of the engine
may damage the three-way catalytic
converter.
• When you find that the engine is not
running smoothly and it is difficult to start
the cold engine, please go to Geely
Service for inspection.
• When the three-way catalytic converter
works, its temperature is very high.
Please avoid the flammable materials to
adhere to or close to the converter
housing.

Avoid inhaling vehicle exhaust. The
exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas that can cause people to lose
consciousness or even die.
Make sure that there are no leaks in the
exhaust system and there is no looseness in
the connection part. The exhaust system
must be checked frequently. If the vehicle
collides while driving, or the exhaust sound
changes, you must immediately contact
Geely Service for inspection.
Do not run the engine in a garage or closed
place, otherwise, the exhaust gas will not
escape and thus cause serious personal
injury or death.
Do not stop the vehicle for a long time while
the engine is running. If this is necessary,
the vehicle should be parked in an open
place and the A/C system should be turned
on to allow outside air to enter the vehicle.
When driving, it is necessary to ensure that
the trunk is closed to prevent exhaust gas
from entering the vehicle.
To make the vehicle's ventilation system
work properly, it is necessary to keep the air
inlet in front of the windshield free of snow,
leaves or other obstacles.
If you smell the exhaust odor in the vehicle,
you must open the window and contact
Geely Service for maintenance.
149
Starting and Driving
Fuel System
Requirements for Fuel 1
Please refuel in accordance with the fuel
usage requirements indicated on the fuel
filler cap label.
Vehicles equipped with a catalytic
converter or oxygen sensor can only 2
use unleaded and alcohol-free gasoline,
which can reduce exhaust emissions and
minimize the possibility of spark plug
pollution. Only when the specified fuel is
used can the vehicle exert its best 3
performance.
The use of low-quality fuel will cause
degradation or failure of the fuel
supply system and exhaust system, and
cause engine knock and even damage to 4
the engine.
In the case of engine knock:
1. Please contact Geely Service.
2. Occasionally, a short, slight knocking
sound may be heard when accelerating 5
or climbing. This is normal, so don't
worry.
This vehicle is not a vehicle designed
to use alcohol-containing fuel. Fuels
6
containing alcohol cannot be used. Alcohol-
containing fuel will corrode the metal parts
of the fuel system, and also damage the
plastic and rubber parts. Damage caused by
the use of alcohol-containing fuel is not
7
covered by the warranty.
Fuel System Carbon Deposit
Cleaner
The fuel system carbon deposit cleaner has
the functions of improving the driving 8
Starting and Driving

performance of the vehicle, increasing the Fuel Filler and Refueling

fuel cleaning ability, removing the deposits
in the injector, intake valve, combustion
chamber and oil system, and preventing
carbon deposits in the engine; it can also
maintain the engine in good working
condition, improving the combustion
efficiency, reducing the fuel consumption of
the vehicle, and extending the service life of
the engine.

Please use the fuel system carbon

deposit cleaner approved by Geely
Automobile. Any additives not approved by
Geely Automobiles shall not be added to the
fuel.
Safety Precautions at the
Gasoline Station
Fuel is flammable and volatile and can
easily explode in a space with no air
circulation.
While refueling, it is required to:
• Turn off the engine.
• Do not smoke or use open flames.
• Do not use mobile phones.
• For self-service refueling, please
eliminate static electricity on the hand on
the static electricity removal button of the
tanker before operation, especially in dry
autumns and winters, to avoid danger
caused by static electricity.
• Prevent fuel spillage.
• Stop refueling after the first stop.
The fuel tank cap is located on the rear left
side of the vehicle. The fuel tank cap can
only be opened when the vehicle is
unlocked. The fuel tank cap can pop open
by pressing its left side. The tethered fuel
filler cap is located inside the fuel tank cap.
To remove the fuel tank cap, slowly screw
off the cap counterclockwise and remove it.
When refueling, the fuel tank cap can be
placed in the holder for the cap.
Fuel vapors are highly flammable and
fuel fires can cause serious injuries.
To avoid personal injury or death, be sure to
read and refill fuel according to the
instructions of the gasoline station. Turn off
the engine while refueling.
• Be sure to keep the fuel away from
sparks, open flames and smoking
objects, and do not smoke.
• Do not leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle.
• Children should stay far away from the
fuel pump and are not allowed to refuel.

150
 Starting and Driving

If you unscrew the fuel filler cap too fueling pipes, carbon canister control valve
quickly, fuel may spill on your body hoses, and vent hoses are recommended to
and be ignited, causing severe burns. be inspected and replaced in accordance
1
Overfilling the fuel tank will also cause with the "Warranty and Maintenance
splashing. Unscrew the fuel filler cap slowly. Manual".
If you hear a hissing sound, wait for the
sound to stop. Then unscrew the fuel filler
cap. 2
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not overfill or
allow fuel to overflow the fuel tank. After
turning off the fuel pump, wait a few
seconds before removing the fuel injecting
nozzle. If fuel spills on the painted surface, 3
wipe it off as soon as possible.
When screwing on the fuel filler cap, turn the
cap clockwise until a click is heard. Close
the fuel filler cap and make sure it is fully
closed. If not, the fuel will evaporate. Close 4
the fuel tank cap after confirming that the
tether is not twisted.

If there is a fire while refueling, it is

forbidden to pull out the refueling gun.
The gas pump must be turned off or notify 5
the gas station staff to cut off the flow of fuel,
and leave the scene immediately.

Please close the fuel tank cap when

its lock pin is in the unlocked state,
6
otherwise, it may be damaged.

If you need to replace a new fuel tank

cap, please go to Geely Service to
replace it. In order to avoid fuel leakage and
danger due to the different types of fuel tank 7
caps and failure to properly cover the fuel
tank.

The components in the fuel system

such as carbon canister adsorption
and desorption hoses, vent pipes with 8

151
Starting and Driving
Transmission
Automatic Transmission
1. shaft lever
2. Park button
Gear Information
Gear Selection
Depending on the current gear, push the
shift lever forward/backward once or twice
to switch between the following gears: R , N
and D . For example, when D is the current
gear, move the shift lever forward once to
switch to N , wait for the shift lever to
automatically return to the initial position,
and move forward again to shift to R .
152
Press down the P button and engage in P .
Depress the brake pedal and move the shift
lever forward/backward once to release P .
M can only be selected from D . Move the
shift lever to the right or left once to engage
in M .
P (Park Gear)
Press down the P button to enable P .
To keep the vehicle stationary, surely
use the electronic parking brake
except in P .
P can only be selected when the
vehicle is stationary.
The engine can only be started when
the shift lever is in P or N .
When the engine is shut down, if a
door is opened, the acoustical signal
will prompt to engage in P .
If the engine is running, the P will be
automatically enabled when all the following
conditions occur.
• The vehicle is still.
• The driver's door is opened.
• The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
• No pedals are depressed.
R (Reverse Gear)
Reverse driving gear. Please make sure
that the vehicle is completely stopped
before engaging the R .
Only when the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is idling, can the R be
engaged, otherwise, the transmission will be
damaged.
N (Neutral Gear)
When the shaft lever is in this position, the
transmission is idling and the engine power

cannot be transmitted to the driving wheels,
nor can it provide engine braking. To shift
from N to P when the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is on, press down the P
button. To shift from N to R , just move the
shift lever forward once. To shift from N to D
, just move the shift lever backward once.
The engine can only be started when
the gear is in P position or N position.
To shift from N to another gear, the
brake pedal must be depressed and
the start-and-stop switch is in Mode II or the
engine is on.
D (Drive Gear)
Normal driving gear. To shift from D to R ,
the vehicle must be stationary.
When the vehicle is stationary, start
the engine, otherwise it's not able to
shift from D to R or P .
When the engine is running and the
shift lever is in D or R , if the driver
releases the brake pedal, the vehicle starts
to move forward or reverse automatically.
M (Manual Mode)
+: Upshift in manual mode
+: Downshift in manual mode
Notice for Use
Gearshift Operation
Parking
Parking for a long time or on a ramp: After
the vehicle is completely stopped, press
down the electronic parking brake (EPB)
switch for parking braking, and then press
down the P. At this time, both the automatic
153
Starting and Driving
transmission and the vehicle will be locked.
Short-time parking: The shift lever can be
engaged in N. To stop the vehicle reliably,
1
press down the Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) switch for parking braking at the
same time.
For parking for a short time, do not
2
engage in D, R or M gear, or keep
pressing the brake pedal. Otherwise, the
service life of the reducer will be affected.
Under any circumstance, do not shift the
vehicle in P when the vehicle is moving.
3
Otherwise it will cause serious mechanical
damage and cause the vehicle out of
control.
Drive
Start the engine in P or N, and hold at least 4
three seconds. After the engine runs
smoothly, please press the brake pedal.
After confirming that the parking brake has
been released, press the gear unlock button
and place the shaft lever in D, release the 5
brake pedal, and gently press the
accelerator pedal.
Be sure to shift gear before pressing
the accelerator pedal. Do not shift the
6
gear while pressing the accelerator pedal, or
press the accelerator pedal before shifting
the gear.
Reverse
After the vehicle stops steadily, press the 7
brake pedal. Confirm that the parking brake
has been released. Shift the electronic gear
selector to R . Release the brake pedal, and
gently press the accelerator pedal.
8
Starting and Driving

Manual Mode Driving Mode Shift

After the shaft lever is switch into D position,
move it leftwards or rightwards to enter the
manual shifting mode. The manual mode
features an automatic return function. Each
operation in the rightward direction, which is
the "+" direction, to shift up by one gear, and
each operation in the leftward direction,
which is the "-" direction, to shift down by
one gear. To exit manual shift mode, move
the shift lever backward to D , or move
forward to N .
If the engine speed (rpm) is too low, the Comfort mode is default Rotate the driving
transmission may automatically shift to low mode selector switch to switch to economy
gear. This helps prevent engine damage. mode, comfort mode, sports mode, smart
mode, snow mode, offroad mode or sand
When the vehicle is going down a
mode(if equipped).
long or steep slope, first reduce the
Select the driving mode through the
speed and then lower the gear. You can use
driving mode selector switch
the 3rd or 2nd gear to control the speed,
Rotate the driving mode selector switch on
cooperate with the brake pedal to ensure
the console moulding, and the driving mode
that the vehicle can run safely at a constant
selection interface will appear
speed. Minimize the continuous use of the
synchronously on the multimedia display
brake pedal, otherwise, the brake will easily
screen. Rotate the selector switch until the
fail.
required driving mode is highlighted, and
When downshifting on smooth roads, be
then enter the selected driving mode.
careful. Sudden shifting will cause the
Driving mode section when the
vehicle to spin or skid. transmission is in M position
When driving on snowy or muddy roads, In M gear (manual gear), select among
engage into the D. If the driving wheels are economy/sports/smart/snow/offroad, and
slipping, you can switch the shaft lever to the instrument pack prompts you to engage
manual mode and shift to a lower gear. in D to enter the selected driving mode.

If a driving mode is not available, the

relevant driving mode icon will be
displayed in gray on the multimedia display
screen.

154
 Starting and Driving

Economic mode Sand mode*

In the economy mode, all drive gears will This mode is suitable for vehicles driving on
automatically lag in downshifting and shift sandy roads, which can improve the traction
1
up in advance, which can effectively reduce (getting out of trouble) ability when driving
the engine speed and achieve better fuel on sandy road and avoid getting stuck.
economy.
Sport mode
In the sport mode, all drive gears will 2
automatically lag in upshifting and shift
down in advance, so that the reserve power
of the engine can be fully utilized and better
driving power can be achieved.
Smart mode 3
In smart mode, the system automatically
matches the appropriate driving style.
Offroad mode
In offroad mode, the vehicle can maximize
the traction and related system functions to 4
help the vehicle get through complex road
conditions. Offroad mode is recommended
when the vehicle speed is 0 ~ 40 km/h.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h or
the time of using this mode exceeds 5
5
seconds, the driving mode will automatically
switch to comfort mode.

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) system

and G-pilot function cannot be
accessed in offroad mode. 6
Snow mode
In snow mode, the gear box will control the
gear to start in 2nd gear to avoid skidding,
which can help the driver control the vehicle
to start more easily on snow-covered or icy
7
roads.

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) system

and G-pilot function cannot be
accessed in snow mode. 8

155
Starting and Driving
Braking and Electronic
Assistance System
Service Brake
Braking operation includes sensing time and
response time. The time of deciding to apply
brake pedal is the sensing time. The time of
lifting foot and depressing the brake pedal is
the response time. The average response
time is about 3/4 seconds. But this is an
average value. A driver's response time
may be shorter while another driver’s may
be 2~3 seconds or even longer. Age,
physical condition, vigilance, coordination
and vision will all affect response time.
Alcohol, drugs and depression will have
influence as well However, even if response
time is 3/4 seconds, the braking distance of
a vehicle at 100 km/h will reach 20 m. In
case of emergency, this will be a very long
distance. Thus, keeping a sufficient distance
with other vehicles is very important. Of
course, actual braking distance may vary
significantly by reasons of road surface
(highway or dirt road), road conditions (wet,
dry or iced), tread pattern, brake situation,
vehicle weight and applied braking force.
Avoid unnecessary emergency braking.
Some people will drive the vehicle in a way
of taking sudden and quick action,
accelerating suddenly and then applying
emergency brake, rather than keeping
synchronous with traffic flow. This is a
wrong practice. There will not be sufficient
time for brake to cool down in the process of
applying emergency braking continuously
for several times. It is easy to accelerate
wear of the brake if you often depress the
brake pedal fiercely. If you keep a
156
consistent vehicle speed with that of traffic
flow and keep a definite following distance,
unnecessary braking will be reduced
greatly. It means braking effect is better and
service life of the brake is longer. If the
engine shuts down while driving, brake as
normal, but not snub. If so, it will make the
brake pedal harder to depress. Even when
the engine is shutdown , there is still some
brake boost available for braking, but this
boost is consumed during braking. Once the
brake boost is exhausted, the braking time
is prolonged and the brake pedal is harder
to depress. Installing additional non-original
accessories will affect performance of
vehicle.
When the brake pedal is depressed, if
there is a sharp metal friction sound
from the vehicle brake, it should be checked
in time whether the brake pad has been
worn to the minimum thickness. If it has
been worn to the minimum thickness,
immediately go to the Geely Service to
replace the brake pads to ensure driving
safety.
Do not step on the brake pedal during
driving. Otherwise, it will cause wear
and overheating of the braking parts and
prolong the braking distance.
When the vehicle is going down a
long or steep slope, first reduce the
speed and then lower the gear. You can use
the 3rd or 2nd gear to control the speed,
cooperate with the brake pedal to ensure
that the vehicle can run safely at a constant
speed. Minimize the continuous use of the
brake pedal, otherwise, the brake will easily
fail.

Parking Brake
Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
The EPB switch is located on the console
moulding.
EPB manual release
When the start switch is in Mode II or the
engine is started, depress the brake pedal,
press down the EPB switch, the EPB is
released, and the Electronic Parking Brake
(EPB) status indicator lamp goes out.
EPB automatic release
Start the engine, fasten the seat belt, the
EPB has been activated, the shift lever is in
the driving gear, lightly depress the
accelerator pedal, the EPB will be
automatically released, and the electronic
parking brake (EPB) system status indicator
lamp will go out.
EPB manual parking
Pull up the EPB switch when the vehicle is
stationary, the manual parking is completed,
and the electronic parking brake (EPB)
system status indicator lamp lights up.
Once EPB is activated, the Electronic
Parking Brake (EPB) status indicator
lamp on the instrument pack display is on. If
the indicator lamp is not on, contact Geely
157
Starting and Driving
Service for maintenance as soon as
possible.
1
EPB AUTO
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → More Settings, you can
activate or disactivate the EPB AUTO 4
function in the interface.
If the EPB AUTO function is activated, the
electronic parking brake is automatically
activated in case of stalling of engine.
5
• If the electronic parking brake (EPB)
status indicator lamp on the instrument
pack display flashes, the electronic
6
parking brake system is faulty. Please
contact Geely Service for maintenance.
• If the electronic parking brake (EPB)
status indicator lamp on the instrument
pack display flashes, this indicates that
EPB function has not been activated
7
successfully, the rear wheels should be
locked to prevent the vehicle from
moving, if necessary. For any problem,
contact Geely Service for maintenance.
8
Starting and Driving

Improper use of the EPB may cause

casualties.
Unless emergencies, do not apply the EPB
for the service braking of this vehicle.
Because if only the rear wheels are braked,
the braking distance will become longer,
which affects the braking effect and may
cause serious danger. When the EPB is
turned on, do not step on the accelerator
pedal when the driving gear is engaged and
the engine is running.
When the EPB is released, the vehicle
will lose its parking function. To avoid
vehicle damage, serious personal injury, do
not perform this operation on a sloping road.
When both the automatic vehicle
cleaning and moving vehicle are
required, it is necessary to set the start-and-
stop switch in Mode II or start the engines,
engage the shift lever in N gear, and
manually release EPB.
AUTO HOLD
The AUTO HOLD function can help the
driver to start more comfortably on sloping
roads. After releasing the brake pedal, the
system holds braking, so that the driver has
enough time to step on the accelerator
pedal to start, reducing the impact of sliding.
Depending on the stress, the vehicle
may move even when AUTO HOLD is
activated.
Click on the multimedia display screen in
turn: Vehicle Settings → More Settings, and
then activate or disactivate the Auto Hold
function in the interface.
AUTO HOLD function enable
When the engine is running, the driver's
door is closed, the seat belt is fastened, and
the Auto Hold function is activated through
the multimedia display screen.
AUTO HOLD disable
Disactivate the Auto Hold function through
the multimedia display, and the Auto Hold
function will become off.
AUTO HOLD activation and
deactivation
1. Start the engine, close the FL door, and
fasten the seat belt. After the Auto Hold
function is on, the vehicle speed is zero,
the brake pedal is depressed, the Auto
Hold function is activated, the shift lever
is in the non-R position, the Auto Hold
function on the instrument pack display
is displayed, and the AUTO HOLD
status indicator lamp lights up.
2. Lightly depress the accelerator pedal or
depress the brake pedal harder, the
parking is automatically released, and
the AUTO HOLD status indicator lamp

158

on the instrument pack display goes
out.
3. If the accelerator pedal is not pressed
for more than 10 minutes, it switches to
EPB mode, and the electronic parking
brake (EPB) system status indicator
lamp lights up.
AUTO HOLD force exit
If the Auto Hold function has been activated,
unfasten the seat belt, and open the driver's
door or stall the engine, then perform the
EPB electronic parking, the Auto Hold status
indicator lamp on the instrument pack
display goes out and the electronic parking
brake (EPB) system status indicator lamp
lights up.
Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS)
The anti-lock braking system (ABS) can
prevent slipping during braking. When the
vehicle is started and driven away, the anti-
lock braking system will implement a self-
test. When the self-test is in progress, you
will hear the motor running sound or rattling
sound for a while, or even a slight
movement of the brake pedal. This is
normal.
If the fault warning lamp of anti-lock
braking system (ABS) and braking
system status indicator lamp are always on,
please get off the road as soon as possible,
stop safely, and contact Geely Service for
maintenance. If you brake under such
circumstances, not only ABS may fail, but
also the braking of vehicle may get
unstable.
159
Starting and Driving
Excessively high or low tire pressure
or mixing tires of different sizes on the
vehicle will result in loss of braking
1
performance.
Use anti-lock braking system
Avoid inching braking. The anti-lock braking
system will start automatically as long as the 2
brake pedal is firmly pressed. The working
sound of the anti-lock braking pump or the
motor may be heard, and the pulse of the
brake pedal may be felt. This is a normal
phenomenon. 3
Braking in Emergency
Anti-lock brake system allows the driver to
make a turn and apply brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering is more
effective than optimal braking.
4
Electronic Braking-force
Distribution (EBD)
The anti-lock braking system (ABS) is
equipped with electronic braking-force
distribution (EBD) function. In order to keep
good braking performance under different
5
load conditions, electronic braking-force
distribution (EBD) will automatically
distribute braking force between front and
rear wheels.
Electronic Stability Control 6
(ESC) System
The electronic stability control (ESC) system
is a kind of active safety technology that
assists the driver in controlling the vehicle. It
corrects the instability of the vehicle body 7
and helps prevent accident from applying
braking force to the wheels or reducing
engine torque, and guides the vehicle back
to the correct route.
8
Starting and Driving
The electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is only an auxiliary system.
There are still great dangers on smooth and
wet roads. Please drive with caution.
When the ESC system is activated, the ESC
status indicator lamp will flash on the
instrument pack. This also occurs when the
traction control system is activated. You
may hear some noise or feel the vibration of
brake pedal. This is normal. Continue to
steer the vehicle in your desired direction. If
a fault of the ESC system is detected, the
ESC status indicator lamp will be always on
and the system will not work properly.
Driving style should be adjusted. ESC
system will be activated when the vehicle is
started. To keep control of the vehicle
direction, the system should always be
activated.
ESC Disactivation
When the vehicle is started, click on the
multimedia display in turn: Vehicle Settings
→ More Settings, and activate the ESC
sport mode in the interface. When the ESC
sport mode is activated, the electronic
stability control (ESC) system is
automatically off. The electronic stability
160
control system (ESC) OFF indicator on the
combination instrument display lights up
and a text prompt is displayed: ESC system
is off.
When there is insufficient traction force, for
example, in the following cases, the ESC
system can be disabled:
• When the vehicle runs on deep snow or
soft road.
• When the vehicle is trapped (such as in
the muddy road) and needs to be moved
forward and backward.
• When the vehicle travels with tire chains.
ESC Activation
Disactivate the ESC sport mode through the
multimedia display again, the electronic
stability control (ESC) system is
automatically activated, and then the
electronic stability control (ESC) system off
indicator lamp goes out.
Brake Assist System (BA)
During an emergency braking, the HBA
system will increase the driver's braking
force and reduce the braking distance. Most
drivers can apply brake in time in dangerous
situations, but they cannot apply enough
force on the brake pedal, in that case, the
brake system does not generate the
maximum braking force, resulting in an
increase in the braking distance.
When the vehicle is running, the HBA
system will be activated when the brake
pedal is quickly pressed. At this point, the
brake assist system (BA) will generate a
higher braking pressure than normal
braking, so that the braking system can
generate the pressure required for the
maximum deceleration of the vehicle in the

shortest time. The BA system uses the
pressure quickly generated in the brake
system to help the driver to get a shorter
braking distance in an emergency. After the
brake pedal is released, the Hydraulic Brake
system will automatically shut down and the
brake system will return to normal status.
The HBA system can only help the
driver to increase the braking force. It
does not mean that accidents can be
avoided. Therefore, you should always keep
a safe distance and drive carefully.
Traction Control System
(TCS)
The traction control system (TCS) can
identify the driving wheel slippage trend
during vehicle starting or accelerating, and
control the wheel slippage rate by
intervening in power take-off control or
applying wheel braking to ensure the driving
stability and comfort of the vehicle. The
traction control system is automatically
activated, and the driver can activate the
electronic stability control (ESC) system
(that is, activate the ESC sport mode)
through the multimedia display screen.
When the function is activated, started or
accelerated, the system automatically
monitors the slippage rate of driving wheels.
When the rate exceeds the set threshold,
the system reduces the power take-off
torque or applies hydraulic braking to the
wheels to prevent the wheels from slipping
and reducing the lateral adhesion. When the
rate is below the set threshold, the system
increases the power take-off (not higher
than the driver's demand) and reduces the
braking torque. When the system detects a
161
Starting and Driving
fault, the traction control system (TCS) will
be disactivated immediately. The traction
control system (TCS) intervention in power
1
take-off stops immediately when the driver's
required torque is less than the possible
output torque.
2
3
Click on the multimedia display screen in 4
turn: Vehicle Settings → More Settings, and
then start the ESC sport mode in the
interface. At this point, the traction control
system (TCS) function is disactivated, and
the ESC system off indicator lamp on the 5
instrument panel lights up.
When the start-and-stop switch is set
to II gear, a self-test will be carried
out. At this point, the electronic stability
6
control (ESC) system off indicator on the
instrument pack will always be on, and will
go out after a few seconds if there is no
fault. When the traction control system
(TCS) fails, the electronic stability control
(ESC) system status indicator lamp on the
7
instrument pack lights up, which will always
be on if the fault is not eliminated. If the fault
cannot be eliminated, please contact Geely
Service for maintenance as soon as
possible. 8
Starting and Driving

Hill Hold Control (HAC)
Hill Hold Control (HAC) function enables the
driver to prevent the vehicle that starts on
the uphill slope from sliding after releasing
the brake pedal. The HAC function can
maintain the brake pressure applied by the
driver, leaving up to two seconds for the
driver to move his foot from the brake pedal
to the accelerator pedal, and then the brake
pressure will be automatically released.
Never expect prevent the vehicle from
slipping back on the slope by the HAC
system only.
When the vehicle is parked on a fully loaded
or steep, icy or muddy road, the brake pedal
should be depressed to prevent the vehicle
from slipping back on the slope.
The HHC function can only be
activated when the electronic stability
control system is turned on and the parking
brake is fully released.
2. Depress the brake pedal to brake and
the vehicle comes to a complete stop on
the slope.
Hill Hold Control (HHC)
Deactivation
The hill hold control will be deactivated
under the following conditions:
1. When the automatic transmission is in
the N (neutral) or P (park) position, or
when the vehicle runs on a level road.
2. When the electronic stability control
(ESC) system status indicator lamp on
the instrument pack display lights up.
Hill Descent Control (HDC)
By limiting engine torque and braking the
vehicle, the vehicle is driven down steep
grades at a constant speed without driver's
intervention.
Enable/Disable the System

The HHC function only maintains the

brake pressure shortly when the
driver releases the brake pedal. If the
accelerator pedal isn't pressed or the EPB
switch isn't pulled up, the vehicle may slip
back on the slope after 2 seconds.
Therefore, drive carefully when starting on
the uphill!

Hill Hold Control (HHC)

Activation
The hill hold control will be automatically
activated under the following conditions:
1. When engaging forward or reverse gear
and going uphill.
Click on the multimedia display screen in
turn: Vehicle Settings → More Settings, and
select to activate or disactivate the hill
descent control (HDC) function in the
interface.
After the hill descent control (HDC) function
is activated, when the vehicle speed is less

162

than 35 km/h, the automatic braking will be
activated to limit the vehicle speed and
assist to descend the steep slope without
the driver's intervention.
When the vehicle speed is less than
35 km/h, automatic braking is
effective only the hill descent control (HDC)
function is activated.
During the driving downhill, the driver can
control the descent speed by stepping on
the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal,
with an adjustable speed ranging from 4 to
35 km/h. If the vehicle speed is increased by
more than 35 km/h and less than 60 km/h,
the function will be temporarily suspended
until the vehicle speed is reduced to 4-35
km/h, and then the function will be activated.
This function can be disactivated in the
multimedia display screen or automatically
disactivated when the vehicle speed is
greater than 60 km/h.
The hill descent control (HDC)
function is temporarily disabled due to
excessive brake temperature in the
following situations:
• The hill descent control (HDC) function is
activated, and the hill descent control
(HDC) status indicator lamp on the
instrument pack display will grow yellow
and the system will not be available.
• The hill descent control (HDC) function is
not activated. At this time, if the function
is activated on the multimedia display
screen, the status indicator lamp on the
instrument pack display will not light up
and the system will not be available.
163
Starting and Driving
Emergency Braking Double
Flash (HAZ)
For sudden braking, the brake lamp and
1
double flashing lamps start flashing to warn
the vehicles behind and thus prevent the
vehicles behind from rear-end collision.
All-Wheel-Drive System
The drive system of this vehicle is adaptive 2
all-wheel-drive, requiring no manual
operation. The system can intelligently
switch between two-wheel drive mode and
all-wheel-drive mode according to vehicle
operating conditions. 3
When the vehicle runs on a better road, the
vehicle will intelligently switch to the two-
wheel drive mode, to ensure the comfort
and economical efficiency. When the
vehicle runs on slippery roads, muddy 4
roads, snow-covered roads, sandy roads,
and complex roads in the field, and when
the vehicle starts, climbs, accelerates at
medium and high speed, turns continuously,
etc., the adaptive all-wheel-drive system 5
can respond quickly; it will switch between
two-wheel drive and four-wheel drive,
intelligently distribute torque, ensure the
traction of four wheels, achieve the best
passability and safety, and ensure the 6
stability and comfort of the vehicle.
Precautions for four-wheel drive
vehicles:
7
• If the all-wheel-drive system failure
prompt appears on the instrument pack,
please contact the Geely Service for
maintenance as soon as possible.
• If there is a text prompt of overheated all-
wheel-drive system on the instrument
8
Starting and Driving
pack, it may be caused by the fact that
the all-wheel-drive system is repeatedly
activated and become overheated when
the vehicle runs on highly sandy roads,
slippery roads, or snow-covered roads.
Then, it is necessary to stop operating
the vehicle. In order to restore the four-
wheel drive function in the shortest time,
please select the Auto Hold or engage
the shift lever in the P/N gear and wait for
the all-wheel-drive system to cool down.
Wait for at least 15 minutes, and then
restart the vehicle after the system
returns to normal state.
• In case of failure to get out of trouble
after two overheating prompts, please
stop all attempts but seek rescue.
• If the vehicle is equipped with an all-
wheel-drive system, no two-wheeled
trailers are allowed under any
circumstances.
• Fluids such as torque manager, power
take-off, rear final drive, etc. require no
maintenance.
• Please do not add a fender apron outside
the all-wheel-drive system at will to avoid
poor heat dissipation, causing
overheating and further abnormalities.
164
Parking Assist System
Parking Assist System
The parking radar system assists the driver
to avoid hitting objects when parking.
Front parking radar*
Parking assist system radar sensors on
front bumper can detect barriers 1m away
from front part of vehicle at most.
Rear parking radar
Park assist system radar sensors on rear
bumper can detect barriers 1.5m away from
rear part of vehicle at most.
The parking assist system cannot
replace the vision of driver.
• The parking radar system cannot detect
objects below the bumper or vehicle, or
objects too close or far away from the
vehicle.
• The parking radar system may not be
able to detect children, pedestrians,
cyclists or pets.
• The park assist system cannot detect tiny
objects.
• If you do not pay attention to the
surrounding conditions of the vehicle
during parking, it may cause serious
casualties and property damage. Even if
the vehicle is equipped with a parking
radar system, the driver must carefully
observe whether there are obstacles
before parking.

System Switch
Start the engine, and the parking assist
system is automatically enabled. To turn it
off, click in turn on the multimedia display:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Parking, and then disable the
parking assist system in this interface.
Alarm volume setting
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
System Settings → Sound → Volume
Adjustment → Parking Assistant System
Volume, and then select the alarm volume
level in this interface. The three optional
volumes are high, medium and low.
165
Starting and Driving
How The System Works
When the park assist system works and 1
obstacles enter the detection range, the
detection results will be displayed on
multimedia display in color blocks, with
buzzer sound to remind. The buzz means
that there are obstacles in front of (if front
2
parking radar is equipped) or behind the
vehicle. The beep will become more
frequent when the vehicle is closer to the
obstacle. When the distance is less than 30
cm, a continuous beep will be heard. Due to
3
environmental factors, the detection
performance of radar sensors of parking
assist system may be degraded in hot,
extremely cold or humid weather.
When the System Cannot Work 4
Normally
Please be aware that the radar sensor of
parking assist system may not alarm or may
give wrong alarms under the following
conditions: 5
When barriers cannot be detected
7
• The radar sensor of parking assist
system cannot detect net-shaped
8
Starting and Driving

barriers like iron wires, mooring ropes

and blocking net.

• The parking radar system sensor cannot

detect soft objects like snow, cotton,
sponge which can absorb the ultrasonic
• The radar sensor of parking assist
wave.
system cannot detect low barriers like
stone, wood blocks, etc.

• The radar sensor of parking assist

system cannot detect barriers of some
• The radar sensor of parking assist
special shapes.
system cannot detect vehicles with a
1. Post
high chassis.
2. Small tree
3. Bicycle
4. Angle section
5. Footstone
6. Corrugated paper

166
 Starting and Driving

Situations in which false alarm may be

given
1

• The reversing radar system may give a

wrong alarm when vehicle is fitted with 3
high-frequency radio or antenna or they
• The parking assist system may give a
are used nearby.
wrong alarm when there is ice on the
surface of radar sensor of parking assist
system.
4

• Parking assist system may give a wrong

alarm when horn sound of other vehicles, 6
roar of engine or exhaust sound of
• Parking assist system may give a wrong
vehicle is too close to the radar sensor of
alarm when the vehicle is on steep hill.
parking assist system.

167
Starting and Driving
• The parking assist system may give a
wrong alarm when the vehicle is running
in snow or rain. If the system still does
not alarm when the vehicle approaches
to the obstacle, and it is confirmed that it
is not caused by the above situation,
please contact Geely Service for
maintenance.
The radar sensor of parking assist
system only can detect closest barrier
when there are several barriers. Please note
whether the radar sensor of parking assist
system at another side detects other barrier
when vehicle moves.
Do not use water gun to directly spray
high pressure water to wash the
surface of radar sensor of parking assist
system and do not squeeze or impact the
surface of radar sensor of parking assist
system in other ways. Otherwise, it is likely
to cause faults.
Panoramic Image System
Through 4 wide-angle cameras mounted
around the vehicle to cover all fields of view,
the multi-way video images collected
simultaneously are processed into a 360-
degree top view of the vehicle surrounding
168
and displayed on multimedia display. The
panoramic image system allows the driver in
vehicle to monitor the front/rear, left/right
video images outside the vehicle in real
time, and assists the driver in parking.
The panoramic image system cannot
replace the vision of driver. Although
the vehicle is fitted with panoramic image
system, it is still necessary to inspect the
situation behind and around vehicle before
parking.
The wide-angle camera is easily
affected by environmental factors,
such as fog, rain and snow, night and other
low illumination environments. Please use
the panoramic image system meticulously in
such environments, and ensure the
surrounding environment is safe before use.
Due to the physical layout limitation of
wide-angle cameras, blind spots exist
in the panoramic image. The black area
below the vehicle model is the blind spot.
Please ensure the surrounding environment
is safe before use.
 Starting and Driving

Enter the Panoramic Image operations (excluding the toggle of left/

Interface right turn signal lamp), when the turn
signal lamp is turned off, the panoramic
1
• If the steering linkage function has been
enabled in the panoramic image setting image automatically exits.
interface, when the gear is in the non-R Setting Interface
position and the navigation is not working
The driver can tap the specific area of the
in the foreground, turn on the turn signal
lamp.
screen to show different pictures as 2
demand.
• If the custom button function is already
set to 360-degree panoramic image in
the multimedia display, press the custom
button on steering wheel.
• Touch the 360 panoramic soft button on
3
multimedia display.
• Use the voice "Hello Geely, open 360
panoramic image".
• Shift the gear to R position and it
automatically enters the panoramic
4
image system.
Only when the vehicle speed is less
than 30 km/h, will it enter the 1. Return
panoramic image interface in the way Exit the Panoramic Image Interface
above. 2. Parking guiding lines 5
Touch this button to turn on/off the
Exit the Panoramic Image parking guiding lines. The button
Interface
operation state is memorized when the
• Touch the "return" button of panoramic system is activated next time.
image interface on multimedia display. 3. 3D view 6
• Shift the gear from R, N and D to P. If no Switch to 3D view.
operation within 5 seconds, the 4. Multi-view mode
panoramic image exits. Open the multi-view selection menu for
• When it is in non-R gear, the panoramic more optional views.
image exits when the vehicle speed 5. Settings 7
exceeds 30 km/h. It's available to set the top view zoom-in,
• Use the voice "Hello Geely, close 360 obstacle detection, steering linkage, 3D
panoramic image". surrounding effect, and transparent
• If the panoramic image is turned on via vehicle model effect.
turn signal lamp, and the view of 6. Radar alarm sound 8
panoramic image is not toggled by other Turn on/off radar alarm sound.

169
Starting and Driving
In addition to function buttons above,
directly touch camera icons around the
panoramic image vehicle model to quickly
change the viewpoints of images.
This vehicle adopts wide-angle
cameras, and the imaging model is
bowl-shaped, resulting in the stretching
deformation of 3D images at the splices,
and overlapping of objects at the far end of
the edge. The panoramic image function
allows you to observe road conditions in a
small area around the vehicle without
getting off, and whether any obstacles exist.
When using the panoramic image system,
please pay attention to the surrounding of
vehicle, and judge the actual road
conditions. Do not rely entirely on the
panoramic image system, which can only be
used as an auxiliary means for vehicle.
Automatic Parking System*
System Description
Parking in
The automatic parking system can
automatically search parking spaces on
both sides of the vehicle, and prompt the
driver to stop when available parking spaces
are found. After stopping the vehicle, the
driver should operate according to system
prompts. The automatic parking system will
calculate the route and control the vehicle's
steering, speed, gear, etc. to slowly drive
into the selected parking space.
Parking out
When the vehicle is stationary, the driver
should operate according to system
prompts. The automatic parking system will
calculate the route and control the vehicle's
170
steering, speed, gear, etc. to slowly drive
out of the parking space.
Cautions
Although this system can assist the driver
when parking, it cannot fully replace the
driver for parking. The driver should still
monitor the parking process. Be sure to be
careful! Pay attention to the vehicle
surrounding during parking. Control the
vehicle speed by brake pedal, and actively
intervene if necessary to interrupt or quit the
automatic parking.
• Blind spots may exist in the radar sensor
of parking assist system. Please pay
attention to the people, animals and
obstacles around the vehicle.
• The radar sensor of parking assist
system can't recognize some objects that
don't reflect the signals of automatic
parking system or people wearing such
clothes.
• Exterior environmental noise sources
may cause interference to the automatic
parking system, and the sensors of the
system may not be able to identify
corresponding objects or people.
• Before using the automatic parking,
confirm that no obstacle exists in the
parking space, such as parking space
lock, pit, stone and thin pole. The system
may not be able to detect such
obstacles.
• When parking into parking spaces
horizontal to the roadside with automatic
parking, tires may touch the curb during
parking. Please pay attention to the
vehicle surrounding, control the vehicle
speed, and intervene if necessary.

• The system may not be able to recognize
obstacles such as wire net, fence or
others with similar structures. Please
check whether such obstacles exist in
the parking space before parking.
• Please pay attention to the distance
warning information during parking,
otherwise accidents may occur. When it
is too close to the obstacle, the alarm
information may disappear due to the
blind spot of the radar sensor of parking
assist system, which tends to occur when
the detected obstacles are too high or
too low.
• Please keep the surface of the radar
sensor of park assist system clean. If it is
covered by snow, dust, mud, etc., please
clear it timely to avoid affecting its
function.
• Do not clean the wide-angle camera and
the radar sensor of parking assist system
with a high-pressure cleaning machine.
Flush it with small water flow and keep a
cleaning distance of 10 cm at least.
• Other lanes may be occupied during the
automatic parking. Please pay attention
to the traffic and pedestrians.
• When using automatic parking in a
horizontal parking space, please ensure
that the distance between the front and
rear vehicles is 0.8m greater than your
vehicle's length. And in a vertical parking
space, the distance between the left and
right vehicles is 0.8m greater than your
vehicle's width. Otherwise the system
may not be able to recognize the parking
space.
171
Starting and Driving
• Please check whether the tire pressure is
normal before using automatic parking,
to avoid affect the function.
1
System Operation
Intelligent recommendation for parking
2
3
The intelligent recommendation for parking 4
is enabled by default. To disable it, click in
turn on the multimedia display: Vehicle
Settings → Assist Driving and Safety →
Parking. Then select and disable the
function in this interface. After the intelligent 5
recommendation for parking is enabled, the
automatic parking system will automatically
judge to park in or out based on the
environment. In case of parking into a
vertical parking space, it will automatically 6
judge it's the front-end park-in or the rear-
end park-in. If the intelligent
recommendation for parking is off, park-in or
park-out should be selected by the driver. In
case of parking into a vertical parking 7
space, the front-end park-in or the rear-end
park-in should be judged by the driver.
8
Starting and Driving

Automatic Parking
1. Activate the automatic parking function
via the automatic parking APP on the
multimedia display, and the system
automatically judges that the current
scene is park-in (if the intelligent
recommendation for parking is off, park-
in should be selected by the driver) and
directly enters the parking interface;

3. When an available parking space is

found, the system prompts to stop and
press the brake, and the searched
parking space will be displayed on the
screen. When multiple parking spaces
are found, the system will recommend
the best one after the vehicle stops, or
touch to select another parking space;

2. Drive the vehicle forward at less than 22

km/h to search for parking spaces. The
system automatically searches for
available parking spaces on both sides.
If the speed exceeds 22 km/h, the
system will prompt to slow down. Then
return the speed below 18 km/h within
10 seconds to resume the search.
When the speed exceeds 22 km/h for
more than 10 seconds or exceeds 30
4. After the vehicle stops, touch the
km/h, the automatic park-in function will
Confirm button to start parking. For
exit;
vertical parking spaces, if intelligent
recommendation for parking is on, the
system will automatically recommend
the park-in mode; If intelligent
recommendation for parking is off, the
driver should select front-end park-in or

172
 Starting and Driving

rear-end park-in. For horizontal parking

spaces, only rear-end park-in is
supported;
1

Automatic Parking-out
3
1. Activate the automatic parking function
via the automatic parking APP on the
5. Release the steering wheel and brake
multimedia display, and the system
pedal, and the automatic parking starts.
automatically judges that the current
The system prompts to pay close
scene is park-out (if the intelligent 4
attention to vehicle dynamics and be
recommendation for parking is off, park-
ready to take control at any time;
out should be selected by the driver)
and directly enters the park-out
interface;

6. When the automatic parking is finished,

the system prompts that the parking has
succeeded.
7
2. Select the park-out direction as demand.
Vertical park-out supports the front-end
park-out and rear-end park-out, while
horizontal park-out only supports front-
end park-out;
8

173
Starting and Driving
3. Release the steering wheel and brake
pedal, and the automatic park-out
starts. The system will prompt to pay
close attention to vehicle dynamics and
be ready to take control at any time;
4. When the automatic park-out is finished,
the system prompts that the parking has
succeeded.
174
Parking Termination
Under the following situations, the automatic
parking will be interrupted and forced to exit.
The multimedia display will show the
corresponding interruption information and
prompt the driver to take over the vehicle
control right.
• Associated systems fails.
• Park assist system fails.
• Stall of engine.
• Driver response timeout.
• Parking space is limited.
• Parking route is out of plan.
• Electronic stability control (ESC) system
is active.
• Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
• G-Pilot is active.
• Parking overspeed.
• Parking overtime.
• Excessive parking steps.
• Excessive parking interruptions.
• Gearshift is intervened.
• Electric Parking Brake (EPB) is
intervened.
• Steering wheel is interfered.
• Accelerator pedal is intervened.

• Radar is covered.
• The camera is dirty.
Under the following situations, the automatic
parking will be interrupted, and the
multimedia display will show
corresponding interruption information.
Operate according to the displayed
information and the automatic parking can
be resumed.
• Obstacle is detected.
• Door is detected open.
• Trunk is detected open.
• Front compartment hood is detected
open.
• Seat belt is detected not fastened.
• Car coming from the front side is
detected.
• Car coming from the rear side is
detected.
• Rearview mirror is detected folded.
Starting and Driving
Intelligent Driving System
Intelligent Driving System 1
Introduction
the Medium-range radar*
2
3
1. Front medium-range radar
2. Rear side medium-range radar 4
The medium-range radar is the core
component to realize the G-Pilot, adaptive
cruise control system (ACC), forward pre-
collision assist (CMSF) and rear side radar
assist system (LCA, DOW, RCTA, CMSR). 5
As it offers great comfort and safety to the
driver, in daily use of vehicle, please pay
attention:
• Keep the medium-range radar clean, and
no obstacles (such as license plate 6
frame) in the visual field of medium-
range radar. Otherwise the G-Pilot/ACC/
CMSF/LCA/DOW/RCTA/CMSR
performance will be affected.
• Medium-range radar needs special 7
performance to detect related targets.
When it is affected by the environment,
the detection will be interfered and its
performance will be degraded.
8
175
Starting and Driving
• Don't change its position without
authorization. The calibration of medium-
range radar will be affected by strong
vibration or slight impact.
If the visual field of medium-range radar is
dirty or blind, the combination instrument
display will prompt in text and audio alarm to
remind the driver to wipe or drive on road for
some time.
Blindness of medium-range radar is a
normal reaction of vehicle under
specific road conditions. Ensure the surface
of medium-range radar is clear and drive the
vehicle under normal road conditions for
some time, and the medium-range radar
can automatically return to normal. If it
cannot automatically return to normal,
please go to Geely Service for maintenance.
Under the following situations, be sure to go
to Geely Service for professional calibration
of medium-range radar:
• The medium-range radar has been
removed and installed.
• The toe-in and/or rear axle camber have
been adjusted during four-wheel
alignment.
• After a collision.
• G-Pilot/ACC/CMSF/LCA/DOW/RCTA/
CMSR is degraded or abnormal.
If the plastic mounting clip of medium-
range radar is removed, it should be
replaced to ensure the installation accuracy
of medium-range radar.
176
Front Camera*
1. Front Camera
The front camera is mounted behind the
front windshield of vehicle. The front camera
is the core component of G-Pilot, adaptive
cruise control system (ACC), collision
mitigation support front (CMSF), lane
keeping assist (LKA), traffic sign
identification system (TSI), and active high
beam control system (AHBC).
In daily use of vehicle, keep the front
camera clean, and the visual field of
front camera shall not be blocked by
pollutants (such as rain, snow, fog, water
vapor, ice and frost, leaves, bird droppings,
etc.) or interfered by strong light. Otherwise,
the performance of G-Pilot/ACC/CMSF/
LKA/TSI/AHBC will be affected.
• When the front camera is affected by the
environment, the detection will be
interfered. For example, under bad
weather such as rainstorm, blizzard and
dense fog, the recognition capability of
front camera will be affected, which may
degrade the system performance.
• If a system failure occurs in the front
camera, the combination instrument
 Starting and Driving

display will prompt in text. Please go to Cruise Control (CC) System

Geely Service for maintenance. Through the cruise control system, the
• In order to protect the electronic vehicle speed can be kept at any speed
1
components, the system function will be between 30-180km/h without constantly
temporarily unavailable when the front applying the accelerator pedal.
camera is at extremely high temperature.
Do not use cruise control on winding
The combination instrument display will
road or when traffic is heavy. Or it will
prompt in text. When the temperature 2
be dangerous. When the cruise control
drops sufficiently, the front camera unit
system is used on wet and slippery road,
will automatically restart and the system
sharp change of tire traction will cause
function will return to normal.
unnecessary spinning of wheels and vehicle
• If the visual field of front camera is may be out of control.
blocked, or in a dark environment, or 3
interfered by strong light, the Function Selection
combination instrument display will
prompt in text.
• Do not change the position of front
camera without authorization, because 4
the calibration of front camera will be
affected by vibration or collision. Under
such circumstance, the front camera may
need to be recalibrated.
Blindness of front camera is a normal 5
reaction of front camera under special
environments. Without blocking the view of
front camera, the driver may avoid dark In the combination instrument display,
environment and direct sunlight, and then select the cruise control system via the
the system will recover itself. If it cannot be menu switch button on the left side of 6
recovered, please go to Geely Service for steering wheel. After selection, the cruise
maintenance. control system will be on standby, and the
indicator of cruise control system (CC) will
When the whole vehicle is powered
be on in white.
on, the intelligent driving system
needs to be initialized, and it cannot work 7
normally within 10 seconds.

177
Starting and Driving
Steering Wheel Control
The cruise control button is on the left side
of the steering wheel.
1. Cruise control resume button: resume
cruise at the last exit speed.
2. Speed adjustment and confirm button:
• Push the button up
Short push: cruise speed +1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed +5km/h.
• Push the button down
Short push: cruise speed -1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed -5km/h.
• Press the button
CC function is activated.
3. CNCL button: cancel Cruise Control
related functions.
If the cruise control system is selected
in the current combination instrument
display, it may accidentally trigger the button
and enter the cruise state. You may get
startled and the vehicle may be out of
control.
Speed Setting
When the cruise control is enabled, push
up/down the speed adjustment and confirm
button to adjust to the required cruise
178
speed, and press this button to set the
speed as the cruise speed.
Set Speed Restore
If the cruise control is already set at the
required speed, then depress the brake
pedal. This cancels the cruise control. To
restore to preset vehicle speed, when the
vehicle speed is 30km/h or higher, press the
cruise control resume button to activate it.
The system controls as per the preset
vehicle speed.
Accelerate in cruise control
Acceleration can be performed in two ways:
• Press the accelerator pedal to increase
the speed.
• If the cruise control is enabled, push up
and hold the speed adjustment and
confirm button, and the speed will
increase constantly at 5 km/h until the
vehicle accelerates to the desired speed
or reaches the maximum set speed of
180 km/h, and then release it. To slightly
accelerate, push the button up. One
short up-push and the vehicle speed will
increase by 1km/h. One long up-push
and the vehicle speed will increase by
5km/h.
Decelerate in cruise control
If the cruise control system is enabled,
• push down and hold the speed
adjustment and confirm button, and the
speed will decrease constantly at 5 km/h
until the vehicle decelerates to the
desired speed or reaches the minimum
set speed of 30 km/h, and then release it.

• To slightly decelerate, push the button
down. One short down-push and the
vehicle speed will decrease by 1km/h.
One long down-push and the vehicle
speed will decrease by 5km/h.
Overtaking when Using Cruise
Control
Speed up via the accelerator pedal. When
the foot leaves the accelerator pedal, the
vehicle will decelerate to preset cruise
control speed.
Use of Cruise Control at the
Ramp
The performance of the cruise control
system at the ramp depends on the vehicle
speed, load and the gradient of the ramp. At
upslope, it may be needed to press and hold
the accelerator pedal to maintain vehicle
speed. When going down a hill, braking may
be needed to maintain vehicle speed. When
the brake is applied, cruise control will turn
off.
End Cruise Control
Cruise control can be ended in three ways:
• Press CNCL button, and the indicator of
cruise control system (CC) will change
from green to white, and the cruise will
be on standby.
• Press the brake pedal, and the indicator
of cruise control system (CC) will change
from green to white, and the cruise will
be on standby.
• Press CNCL when the cruise is on
standby, and the cruise turns off.
179
Starting and Driving
Clear Speed Memory
When cruise control is turned off or the start- 1
and-stop switch is set to OFF, the cruise
control set speed memory will be cleared.
Automatic Speed Limit
Control System (LIM)
With the automatic speed limit control
2
system (LIM), the driving speed will not
exceed the preset speed limit.
Be sure to turn off the automatic
speed limit control system after use to
avoid accidental adjustment of vehicle 3
speed.
• Although the vehicle features automatic
speed limit control system, the driver
must control the speed according to the
situation. Do not press deeply on the 4
accelerator pedal if not necessary.
• It is extremely dangerous to use the
automatic speed limit control system in
bad weather conditions, which may
cause serious casualties when driving on 5
roads with water, ice and snow or leaves.
Therefore, the automatic speed limit
control system can only be used when
both road conditions and weather
conditions permit. 6
7
Starting and Driving
Function Selection
In the combination instrument display,
select the automatic speed limit control
system via the menu switch button on the
left side of steering wheel. After selection,
the system will be on standby, and the
indicator of automatic speed limit control
system (LIM) will be on in white.
Steering Wheel Control
Type 1
The automatic speed limit control button is
on the left side of steering wheel, and the
setting range of speed limit is 30~180 km/h.
180
1. Automatic speed limit control resume
button: resume automatic speed limit
control at the last exit speed.
2. Speed adjustment and confirm button:
• Push the button up
Short push: cruise speed +1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed +5km/h.
• Push the button down
Short push: cruise speed -1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed -5km/h.
• Press the button
LIM function is activated.
3. CNCL button: cancel related functions of
automatic speed limit control system.
Type 2
The automatic speed limit control button is
on the left side of steering wheel.
1. Automatic speed limit control resume
button: resume automatic speed limit
control at the last exit speed.
2. Speed adjustment and confirm button:
• Push the button up
Short push: cruise speed +1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed +5km/h.
• Push the button down
Short push: cruise speed -1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed -5km/h.

• Press the button
LIM function is activated.
3. CNCL button: cancel related functions of
automatic speed limit control system.
Setting Speed Limit
When the automatic speed limit control is
enabled, push up/down the speed
adjustment and confirm button to adjust to
the required speed limit, and press this
button to set the speed as the speed limit.
Resume Speed Limit
Deeply press the accelerator pedal during
driving, and the automatic speed limit
control enters the driver's control state, and
the indicator of automatic speed limit control
system lights up in yellow. But the speed
limit is still memorized. When the
accelerator pedal is released, the automatic
speed limit control resumes, and the
indicator of automatic speed limit control
system (LIM) is on in green.
Use of Automatic Speed Limit
Control at Ramp
When the vehicle runs downhill, the
automatic speed limit control system cannot
limit the vehicle speed, and the vehicle will
accelerate under its own gravity. At the time,
the vehicle speed should be reduced
immediately by pressing the brake pedal.
End of Automatic Speed Limit
Control
• Press CNCL button, and the indicator of
automatic speed limit control system
(LIM) will change from green to white,
and the automatic speed limit control will
be on standby.
181
Starting and Driving
• Press CNCL when the automatic speed
limit control is on standby, and the
automatic speed limit control turns off.
1
Clear Speed Memory
When the automatic speed limit control or
the start and stop button is turned off, the
vehicle speed memory set by the automatic 2
speed limit control will be cleared.
Adaptive Cruise Control
System (ACC)*
The adaptive cruise control system (ACC)
can control the vehicle speed based on the 3
set speed and the inter-vehicle time
distance in the range of 0~150 km/h.
ACC mainly provides driving assistance for
the driver on highways or elevated roads
with good road conditions. The driver should 4
keep control of the vehicle at all times.
5
6
The sensors used by ACC system include:
1. Front Camera
2. Front medium-range radar 7
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system uses
medium-range radar to detect the vehicle
ahead, and maintain the inter-vehicle time
distance set by the driver through automatic
speed adjustment. The driver can control 8
Starting and Driving
the vehicle at any time according to driving
conditions.
When the vehicle is powered on, the
adaptive cruise control system will
start self-check, and the system function is
not available at this stage.
ACC is a comfort system, not an
emergency warning and collision
avoidance system. The driver must always
keep control of vehicle and take full driving
responsibility for vehicle operation. The
driver should drive according to laws and
regulations.
Adaptive Cruise Control System does
not work for vehicles or objects
crossing carriageway.
The change of vehicle posture due to
excessive load in the luggage area
will degrade or invalidate the target
recognition of ACC system.
If another vehicle jumps the line to the
front of vehicle at low speed, ACC
may be too late to respond. The driver is
required to brake in time.
When suddenly accelerating and
approaching the vehicle ahead at high
speed (an obvious speed difference with the
vehicle ahead), the driver should brake in
time.
The driver should adjust the following
distance according to the traffic flow
ahead, the weather conditions, such as rain
and snow, and make proper settings for
ACC system. The driver should be able to
actively control the vehicle at any time to
ensure driving safety.
182
It is the driver's liability to keep the
distance from the vehicle ahead.
When driving on a steep downslope, it
may be difficult for this function to
keep a proper distance from the vehicle
ahead. Under such circumstances, be
especially careful and be ready to brake at
any time. Do not use ACC under heavy
load.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System
cannot recognize pedestrians,
tricycles and vehicles loaded with irregularly
shaped goods or vehicle variants.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System
cannot recognize stationary or slow
vehicles, as well as oncoming vehicles.
If ACC is activated when the vehicle is
stationary, the system will recognize
the static obstacle ahead as vehicle and
keep still, so as to ensure the safe starting
of vehicle and avoid the collision with the
stationary target due to unexpected starting.
Static targets include but are not limited to
speed bumps, trees, people, railings, etc.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System
can assist the driver, but can't drive
instead of the driver. Even if the Adaptive
Cruise Control System is active, the driver
shall drive carefully and observe traffic
rules.
When ACC system works, if the driver
applies the accelerator pedal, the
vehicle will be taken over by the driver, and
respond to the driver's acceleration desire.
The Adaptive Cruise Control System's
control function will not work.

When entering/exiting a curve, the
target selection may be delayed or
disturbed. The Adaptive Cruise Control
System may have unexpected braking or
late braking.
In some cases (the speed of
preceding vehicle is too low relative to
your own vehicle, and the preceding vehicle
jumps into the lane closely, etc.), ACC
system does not have enough time to
reduce the relative speed. In this case, the
driver must respond appropriately.
If the preceding vehicle suddenly
brakes, the Adaptive Cruise Control
System may fail to respond timely or react
too slowly. In this case, the driver will not
receive the takeover request. Active braking
is required.
At a sharp turn, e. g. a serpentine
road, ACC system cannot detect the
preceding vehicle normally due to the visual
field limit of medium-range radar, which may
lead to the acceleration of ACC vehicle. The
driver is required to respond appropriately
based on actual conditions.
If the distance between the ACC
vehicle and the adjacent lane is too
small (or the vehicle on the adjacent lane is
too close to the lane of ACC vehicle), ACC
system may react to the vehicle and brake.
When the vehicle ahead in the
adjacent lane jumps into the route of
ACC vehicle, detection may be affected or
delayed in some environments such as low
reflection intensity of targets (pedestrians,
two-wheeled vehicles, tricycles),
183
Starting and Driving
electromagnetic interference, etc., resulting
in ACC system unable to identify targets or
accurately calculate the distance from the
1
vehicle ahead. Under such circumstances,
the Adaptive Cruise Control System will
have no response or have brake delay. The
driver is required to actively control the
vehicle. 2
The visual field of medium-range
radar shall not be blocked by
pollutants. Especially, when it's completely
covered by snow, the ACC system will exit,
3
and the information of system exiting will be
displayed to the driver through combination
instrument.
The installation of front camera and
front medium-range radar may be 4
affected by vibration or impact, which will
degrade the system performance. In that
case, it is necessary to recalibrate the front
camera and front medium-range radar.
In following situations, the driver must 5
be especially alert:
• When the Adaptive Cruise Control
System is activated and confirmed to
start with the vehicle stationary, if there
6
are pedestrians, children, animals, two-
wheeled vehicles, tricycles or obstacles
ahead, the Adaptive Cruise Control
System cannot detect and identify them,
and there is a serious collision risk. The
driver must confirm the area ahead is
7
safe before activating the Adaptive
Cruise Control System to control the
vehicle to start.
• In case that the vehicle speed is high, if
the left turn signal lamp is turned on 8
Starting and Driving
when overtaking from the left, the
Adaptive Cruise Control System will
automatically accelerate the vehicle and
shorten the distance to the preceding
vehicle. If the vehicle enters the
overtaking lane and there is no vehicle
ahead, the Adaptive Cruise Control
System will automatically accelerate to
the set cruise speed.
• ACC system cannot detect the items
loaded or accessories mounted on the
target vehicle that protrude from its side,
rear end or roof. If the preceding vehicle
has the above-mentioned special load or
equipment, ACC system must be turned
off when overtaking such vehicles.
• Metal objects, such as rails or metal
plates for road construction, may
interfere with the medium-range radar
and cause it to malfunction.
• Towing a trailer will reduce the dynamics
of the Adaptive Cruise Control System.
• For safety concern, do not use ACC
system when the visibility is poor, or
when driving along slopes and curved
sections, or on slippery roads (such as
snow, ice, moisture or water sections).
• After the system requires the driver to
take over the vehicle, if the vehicle
continues to move, the driver must apply
the brake pedal to brake.
• If the driver is prompted to take over the
vehicle on the combination instrument
display, the driver must immediately
control the distance from the preceding
vehicle.
184
• The driver must always be ready to
control the vehicle by acceleration or
braking.
• The medium-range radar is mounted
under the front bumper. If ACC system
cannot work because the medium-range
radar is covered with dirt, there will be a
text prompt on the combination
instrument display. Please clean it in time
or go to Geely Service for inspection and
maintenance.
• Objects (such as license plate frame)
shall not block the front and surrounding
of front medium-range radar. Otherwise
the Adaptive Cruise Control System may
be affected.
• For structurally modified vehicles, for
example, lowering the chassis height or
changing the front license plate mounting
board may affect the Adaptive Cruise
Control System.
• If the front camera has a system failure,
in low light, directly under strong light,
blocked by objects, or under alternating
light conditions, the adaptive cruise
system may be affected and cannot be
used.
 Starting and Driving

Function Selection 3. Speed adjustment and confirm button:

In the combination instrument display,
select the Adaptive Cruise Control System
via the menu switch button on the left side of
steering wheel. After selection, the system
will be on standby, and the indicator of
Adaptive Cruise Control System will be on in
white.
Steering Wheel Control
• Push the button up
Short push: cruise speed +1km/h.
1
Push and hold: cruise speed +5km/h.
• Push the button down
Short push: cruise speed -1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed -5km/h.
• Press the button
2
ACC function is activated.
4. CNCL button: Exit ACC activation state.
To activate the Adaptive Cruise Control
System, the following conditions must be
met at least: 3
• Adaptive Cruise Control System has
been selected.
• Shift position is D.
• Engine is running.
• Four doors, trunk and front compartment
4
hood are all closed.
• The vehicle is in motion, and the brake
pedal is not applied.
• Brake system has no fault.
5
• Front camera and front medium-range
radar have no problems such as high
temperature, dirt or fault.
• Electronic Stability Control System (ESC)
is active.
• EPB is released.
6
• The driver fastens the seat belt.
• Drive mode is matched.

Activation and Speed Setting

ACC button is on the left side of steering
1. When the vehicle is stationary, activate 7
wheel.
and set the vehicle speed as follows:
1. Intelligentdriving button: Activate,
resume ACC system. • Select and activate the Adaptive
Cruise Control System. The indicator
2. Inter-vehicle time-distance adjustment
of Adaptive Cruise Control System
button: adjust the cruise following
8
distance.

185
Starting and Driving
(ACC) on combination instrument
display lights up in white.
• Press the brake pedal or activate
AUTO HOLD function.
• Press the intelligent driving button or
the speed adjustment and confirm
button to activate the Adaptive
Cruise Control System. The indicator
of Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) on combination instrument
display lights up in green.
• When the brake pedal is released,
ACC system can continue to keep
the vehicle stationary;
• The driver needs to press the
intelligent driving button or press the
accelerator pedal to make the
Adaptive Cruise Control System
control the vehicle to start.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control System
controls the vehicle as per the set
cruise speed.
2. When the vehicle is in motion, activate
and set the vehicle speed as follows:
• Select to activate the Adaptive
Cruise Control System. The indicator
of Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC) on combination instrument
display lights up in white.
• Press the intelligent driving button or
the speed adjustment and confirm
button to activate the Adaptive
Cruise Control System; The set
cruise speed is 30 km/h. The
indicator of Adaptive Cruise Control
System (ACC) on combination
instrument display lights up in green.
When the vehicle speed is below 30
186
km/h, the set cruise speed is 30 km/
h; When the vehicle speed is above
30 km/h, the set cruise speed is the
current vehicle speed;
3. Push the speed adjustment and setting
button to set the desired cruise speed.
During cruising, as the relative vehicle
speed varies, the combination instrument
will display different distance states away
from the preceding vehicle to remind the
driver.
In the active safety interface, the distance to
the preceding vehicle is displayed on
combination instrument interface in real
time. The size of the preceding vehicle's
image 1 will change with the distance. If the
preceding vehicle's image 1 is the target
followed by the Adaptive Cruise Control
System, the preceding vehicle's image 1 is
blue; If the distance between the vehicle
and the preceding vehicle is too close, the
preceding vehicle's image 1 is yellow; When
the distance between the two vehicles is too
close and the driver's active control is
required, the preceding vehicle's image 1 is
red; If the driver is pressing the accelerator
pedal to control the vehicle, the preceding
vehicle's image 1 is gray.

If the adaptive cruise control system is
inactive, the indicator 3 of adaptive cruise
control system (ACC) is in white.
If the adaptive cruise control system is
active, the indicator 3 of adaptive cruise
control system (ACC) is in green. If the
adaptive cruise control system is active, the
indicator 3 of adaptive cruise control system
(ACC) is in green .
If the adaptive cruise control system is
faulty, the indicator 3 of adaptive cruise
control system (ACC) is in gray.
If the adaptive cruise control system is
inactive, the set speed 2 is in white.
If the adaptive cruise control system is
active, the set speed 2 is in green.
In addition, if ACC or G-Pilot is not activated
in this trip, after pressing the menu switch
button on the left side of steering wheel, and
after the first function selection, the set
speed will not be displayed.
When the active safety interface is blocked
by other interfaces, a small interface will
appear to display functional information.
187
Starting and Driving
1
2
When the adaptive cruise control system is
not activated, if no vehicle ahead, the
preceding vehicle 1 will not be displayed; If
a target vehicle appears ahead, the
preceding vehicle 1 is in gray.
3
When the adaptive cruise control system is
activated, if no vehicle ahead, the preceding
vehicle 1 will not be displayed; When a
target vehicle appears ahead and it is
followed, the preceding vehicle 1 is in blue; 4
When the vehicle is close to the preceding
vehicle, the preceding vehicle 1 is in yellow;
When the distance between the two
vehicles is too close and the driver's active
control is required, the preceding vehicle 1 5
is in red.
Inter-vehicle time distance 2 is the inter-
vehicle time distance selected by the driver.
Set Inter-vehicle Time Distance
6
It is the driver's responsibility to
choose a safe inter-vehicle time
distance.
The driver can adjust the inter-vehicle time
distance of ACC following, based on current
7
road environment. Inter-vehicle time
distance refers to the time required for the
vehicle to travel to the current position of
preceding vehicle at the current speed, i. e.
the inter-vehicle distance divided by the
8
vehicle speed.
Starting and Driving

The driver can decrease/increase the time

distance to the preceding vehicle by
pressing the adjustment button of inter-
vehicle time distance. Inter-vehicle time
distance has three levels: Near, medium
and far. Every time the engine is ignited, the
default inter-vehicle time distance of
adaptive cruise control system is far.
Different options for inter-vehicle time
distance are displayed on combination
instrument display
When inter-vehicle time distance is near.
HUD displays different inter-vehicle
time distances via different distance
cells

When inter-vehicle time distance is far.

When inter-vehicle time distance is medium.
When the adaptive cruise control system
(ACC) detects a preceding vehicle, the
vehicle pattern will be displayed at Area 1 in
the figure.
The number of cells at Area 2 in the figure
shows the set inter-vehicle time distance
between the vehicle and the preceding
vehicle.
Area 3 shows the indicator of adaptive
cruise control system (ACC).
Area 4 shows the set speed of adaptive
cruise control system (ACC).

In any case, the driver must keep

sufficient braking distance from the
preceding vehicle, and be aware of relevant

188

requirements of local highway traffic
regulations on the minimum distance or the
shortest time. It is the driver's responsibility
to abide by the law.
Use the ACC Speed Control
Acceleration when using ACC system
Acceleration can be performed in two ways:
• Depress the accelerator pedal for active
acceleration. In case of active
acceleration, the driver takes control of
vehicle, and the combination instrument
shows the active vehicle acceleration.
After the driver releases the accelerator
pedal, ACC system continues to control
the vehicle to cruise.
• If the cruise control system is already
enabled, to slightly accelerate, push the
speed adjustment and confirm button.
Every short push, the vehicle speed will
increase by 1 km/h; For a long push, the
vehicle speed will keep increasing at 5
km/h until the button is released. The set
speed maximum is 150 km/h.
Overtaking assist mode
In cruise mode, when following the
preceding vehicle and turning on the left
turn signal lamp, the adaptive cruise control
system accelerates/decelerates the vehicle
before it reaches the overtaking lane to
assist the driver overtake or change the
lane, until the vehicle finishes changing the
lane or turns off the left turn signal lamp.
To enable the overtaking assist mode, the
following conditions must be met at least:
• There must be a target vehicle ahead;
• The current vehicle speed exceeds 60
km/h;
• The current lane is dotted.
189
Starting and Driving
• The set speed should be high enough for
a safe overtaking;
• Turn on the left turn signal lamp.
1
In the overtaking assist mode, unexpected
acceleration may occur in the following
situations, which requires special
awareness of the driver. Therefore, at the
overtaking assist mode, the driver should 2
prepare for sudden change of conditions
and control the vehicle in time.
• The vehicle is approaching the turning
exit, and the exit direction is the same as
that of usual overtaking; 3
• Before the vehicle passes through and
enters the overtaking lane, the speed of
preceding vehicle decreases;
• The speed of vehicle in the overtaking
lane decreases. 4
At the overtaking assist mode, unexpected
deceleration may occur in the following
situations, which requires special
awareness of the driver. Therefore, at the
5
overtaking assist mode, the driver should
prepare for sudden change of conditions
and control the vehicle in time.
• The speed of vehicle in the overtaking
lane is lower than your vehicle speed.
• The longitudinal distance between the 6
vehicle in the overtaking lane and your
own vehicle is close;
• The vehicle in the overtaking lane is
large with long body, and parallel to your
own vehicle. 7
At overtaking assist mode, the driver
needs to control the lane change on
their own.
Please note that this function can be
enabled in more situations besides 8
Starting and Driving
overtaking. E. g., when the left turn signal
indicator is turned on to change lanes or
enter another road, the vehicle will briefly
accelerate.
Start-stop mode
In the cruise following mode, if the
preceding vehicle brakes and stops
gradually, your own vehicle will follow the
preceding vehicle to stop gradually, and
keep a safe distance from it.
• Within 10 seconds after stopping, if the
preceding vehicle resumes traveling, the
cruise will resume automatically.
• When it's more than 10 s after stopping,
if the preceding vehicle resumes, the
driver needs to apply the accelerator
pedal or press RES/+ button to resume
cruising.
• In ACC start-stop mode, the longest time
to keep the vehicle stationary is 3
minutes. After 3 minutes, the adaptive
cruise control system is deactivated.
• In ACC start-stop mode, if the driver
actively exits the adaptive cruise control
system, the vehicle will not start
automatically. If the accelerator pedal is
pressed at this time, the vehicle starts,
and the driver needs to take control of
the vehicle and drive safely.
The adaptive cruise control system cannot
recognize stationary vehicles, and cannot
brake against stationary vehicles.
After stopping, the adaptive cruise
control system can still control the
vehicle to move, which may result in
uncontrolled vehicle movement. If the
vehicle moves uncontrolled, traffic accident
190
may occur and result in serious injury or
death.
The adaptive cruise control system
will have unexpected acceleration in
the following situations. Please be highly
alert and take active braking:
• When ACC system follows another
moving vehicle and the target changes
from a moving vehicle to a stationary
vehicle, ACC system will ignore the
stationary vehicle and continue cruising
at the speed set by the driver.
• At an intersection, when following the
preceding vehicle to turn at low speed,
the following target disappears due to the
turning of preceding vehicle, so the
adaptive cruise control system will
accelerate based on the set speed.
Deceleration when using ACC system
If the cruise control system is already
enabled, to slightly decelerate, push the
speed adjustment and confirm button. Every
short push, the vehicle speed will decrease
by 1 km/h; For a long push, the vehicle
speed will keep decreasing at 5 km/h until
the button is released. The set speed
minimum is 30 km/h.
Set Speed Restore
If the driver has set the adaptive cruise
control system to the required speed, and
depresses the brake pedal or presses
CNCL button, then the adaptive cruise
control system will be deactivated, and the
set speed will be pre-stored, and the set
speed will continue to be shown on the
combination instrument display. To activate
the adaptive cruise control system and

cruise as per the last set speed, push the
intelligent driving button for activation.
End Adaptive Cruise Control
The following methods can deactivate ACC:
• Depress the brake pedal to exit ACC;
• Press CNCL switch button to exit the
adaptive cruise control system.
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
the operation of other systems, such as the
electronic stability control system (ESC). If
any of these systems stop working, ACC will
be automatically deactivated.
In case of automatic deactivation, a sound
signal is given and the combination
instrument display shows a text message.
The driver must intervene to match the
speed of and the distance to the preceding
vehicle.
If the front camera has a system failure, in
low light, directly under strong light, blocked
by objects, or under alternating light
conditions, the adaptive cruise control
system may be affected and cannot be
used.
Possible reasons for disabling ACC
(including but not limited to):
• Any door, front compartment hood or
trunk is opened.
• Driver's seat belt is unfastened
• The wheels losses roadholding.
• The brake system performance
degraded or faulty.
• Parking brake is applied
• Front medium-range radar and front
camera is covered by wet snow or heavy
rain.
Starting and Driving
Detection Problems
The detectable range of front medium-range 1
radar and front camera is limited. In some
cases, the front medium-range radar and
the front camera may fail to detect vehicles
or delay the detection of vehicles.
2
3
4
5
Detection problems may occur in the
following situations:
1. Vehicles move slowly along the driver's
lane. The system can only detect the
6
vehicle that has fully entered the driver's
lane.
2. When the front vehicle is a large truck,
is the time of detecting the vehicle may be
delayed.
7
3. When the driver enters or exits a curve
on the road, detection problems related
to the preceding vehicle may occur.
4. When the whole vehicle is powered on,
the front medium-range radar and front
8
camera needs initialization, and the
191
Starting and Driving
preceding vehicle cannot be accurately
detected within 10 seconds.
Under such circumstances, the driver
should keep alert. Take emergency
measures and temporarily disable the
adaptive cruise control system if necessary.
G-Pilot*
Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system can
simultaneously perform vehicle cruise
control and direction assist control in 0~130
km/h. The system can control the vehicle
speed as per the set speed and the
following inter-vehicle time distance, and
perform the steering wheel assist control
based on the left/right lane lines or by
following the preceding vehicle, and perform
deviation control when overtaking, and give
hands-off alarm prompt. Activate the G-Pilot
lane change assist by operating the
corresponding turn signal lamp via the light
combination switch.
The G-Pilot mainly provides driving assist
for the driver on highways or elevated roads
with good road conditions.
The sensors used by G-Pilot include:
1. Front medium-range radar
2. Rear side medium-range radar
192
3. Front Camera
When the vehicle is powered on, the
G-Pilot will start self-check, and the
system function is not available at this
stage.
Ensure the front camera and the
medium-range radar are clean. Dirty
front camera and medium-range radar, and
environmental conditions such as rain and
fading lane lines, may affect the
performance of G-Pilot.
The G-Pilot is a function that requires
hands-on operation. The driver must
always hold the steering wheel with both
hands.
The advanced driving function is only
suitable for the use on expressways
and roads with limited access, and the
driver should be concentrated on driving.
When using the G-Pilot, hold the steering
wheel and pay attention to the road and
surrounding traffic. Do not use this function
in urban streets, construction areas or roads
where cyclists or pedestrians exist. Do not
rely on the G-Pilot to determine an
appropriate driving route. Be always ready
to take immediate actions. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in property
damage, serious personal injury or death.
G-Pilot is a comfort system, not an
emergency warning and collision
avoidance system. The driver should drive
according to laws and regulations.
The G-Pilot function does not work for
vehicles or objects crossing
carriageway.

The change of vehicle posture due to
excessive load in the luggage area
will degrade or invalidate the target
recognition of ICC system.
If another vehicle jumps the line to the
front of vehicle at low speed, ICC may
be too late to respond. The driver is required
to brake in time.
When suddenly accelerating and
approaching the vehicle ahead at high
speed (an obvious speed difference with the
vehicle ahead), the driver should brake in
time.
The driver should adjust the following
distance according to the traffic flow
ahead, the weather conditions, such as rain
and snow, and make proper settings for G-
Pilot system. The driver should be able to
actively control the vehicle at any time to
ensure driving safety.
It is the driver's liability to keep the
distance from the vehicle ahead.
When driving on a steep downslope, it
may be difficult for this function to
keep a proper distance from the vehicle
ahead. Under such circumstances, be
especially careful and be ready to brake at
any time. Do not use the advanced
intelligent driving control system under
heavy load.
G-Pilot system cannot recognize
pedestrians, tricycles and vehicles
loaded with irregularly shaped goods or
vehicle variants.
193
Starting and Driving
G-Pilot system cannot recognize
stationary or slow moving vehicles, as
well as oncoming vehicles.
1
If G-Pilot is activated when the vehicle
is stationary, the system will
recognize the static obstacle ahead as
vehicle and keep still, so as to ensure the
2
safe starting of vehicle and avoid the
collision with the stationary target due to
unexpected starting. Static targets include
but are not limited to speed bumps, trees,
people, railings, etc.
3
When G-Pilot system works, if the
driver applies the accelerator pedal,
the vehicle will be taken over by the driver,
and respond to the driver's acceleration
desire. G-Pilot system's speed control 4
function will not work.
When entering/exiting a curve, the
target selection may be delayed or
disturbed. G-Pilot may have unexpected
braking or late braking. 5
In some cases (the speed of
preceding vehicle is too low relative to
your own vehicle, and the preceding vehicle
jumps into the lane closely, etc.), G-Pilot
6
system does not have enough time to
reduce the relative speed. In this case, the
driver must respond appropriately.
If the preceding vehicle suddenly
brakes, G-Pilot system may fail to 7
respond timely or react too slowly. In this
case, the driver will not receive the takeover
request. Active braking is required.
At a sharp turn, e. g. a serpentine
road, G-Pilot system cannot detect 8
Starting and Driving
the preceding vehicle normally due to the
limit of front camera and front medium-
range radar, which may lead to the
acceleration of G-Pilot vehicle. The driver is
required to respond appropriately based on
actual conditions.
If the distance between the G-Pilot
vehicle and the adjacent lane is too
small (or the vehicle on the adjacent lane is
too close to the lane of G-Pilot vehicle), G-
Pilot system may react to the vehicle and
brake.
When the vehicle ahead in the
adjacent lane jumps into the route of
ACC vehicle, detection may be affected or
delayed in some environments such as low
reflection intensity of targets (pedestrians,
two-wheeled vehicles, tricycles),
electromagnetic interference, etc., resulting
in G-Pilot system unable to identify targets
or accurately calculate the distance from the
vehicle ahead. Under such circumstances,
G-Pilot system will have no response or
braking delay. The driver needs to actively
control the vehicle.
The visual field of front camera, front
medium-range radar, rear side
medium-range radar shall not be blocked by
pollutants. Especially, when it's completely
covered by snow, G-Pilot system will exit,
and the information of system exiting will be
displayed to the driver through combination
instrument display.
The installation of front camera, front
medium-range radar, rear side
medium-range radar may be affected by
vibration or impact, which will degrade the
194
system performance. At this time, it is
necessary to recalibrate the medium-range
radar.
In following situations, the driver must
be especially alert:
• When G-Pilot system is activated and
confirmed to start with the vehicle
stationary, if there are pedestrians,
children, animals, two-wheeled vehicles,
tricycles or obstacles ahead of vehicle,
G-Pilot system cannot detect and identify
them, and there is a serious collision risk.
The driver must confirm the area ahead
of vehicle is safe before activating G-Pilot
system to control the vehicle to start.
• If the left turn signal lamp is turned on
when overtaking from the left, G-Pilot
system will automatically accelerate the
vehicle and shorten the distance to the
preceding vehicle. If the vehicle enters
the overtaking lane and there is no
vehicle ahead, G-Pilot system will
automatically accelerate to the set cruise
speed.
• G-Pilot system cannot detect the items
loaded or accessories mounted on the
target vehicle that protrude from its side,
rear end or roof. If the preceding vehicle
has the above-mentioned special load or
equipment, G-Pilot system must be
turned off when overtaking such
vehicles.
• Metal objects, such as rails or metal
plates for road construction, may
interfere with the medium-range radar
and cause it to malfunction.
• Towing a trailer will reduce the dynamics
of G-Pilot system.

• For safety concern, do not use G-Pilot
system when the visibility is poor, or
when driving along slopes and curved
sections, or on slippery roads (such as
snow, ice, moisture or water sections).
• After the system requires the driver to
take over the vehicle, if the vehicle
continues to move, the driver must apply
the brake pedal to brake.
• If the driver is prompted to take over the
vehicle on the combination instrument
display, the driver must immediately
control the distance from the preceding
vehicle.
• The driver must always be ready to
control the vehicle by acceleration or
braking.
• The medium-range radar is mounted
under the front bumper. If G-Pilot system
cannot work because the medium-range
radar is covered with dirt, there will be a
text prompt on the combination
instrument display. Please clean it in time
or go to Geely Service for inspection and
maintenance.
• Other objects (such as license plate
frame) shall not block the front and
surrounding of medium-range radar.
Otherwise G-Pilot system may be
affected.
• Structural modification of vehicle, such
as lowering the chassis height or
changing the front license plate mounting
board, may affect G-Pilot system.
• If the front camera has a system failure,
in low light, directly under strong light,
blocked by objects, or under alternating
light conditions, G-Pilot system may be
affected and cannot be used.
195
Starting and Driving
Under the following road conditions,
the performance of G-Pilot direction
assist will degrade or fail to work. The driver
1
should keep alert:
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to roads
with excessively small curve radius.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to roads
with invisible lane lines
2
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to
intersections of roads.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to roads
with vehicle marks (e.g., tire marks).
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to roads of
3
which the lanes increase or decrease.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to roads
that the original lane and the new lane
have large difference.
• G-Pilot system may recognize road
4
edges (wall, guardrail, curb, grassland,
green belt, asphalt seam connection) as
lane lines to work.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to
pavements with potholes, bumps, 5
undulations.
• G-Pilot system cannot recognize road
signs (cones), so it is not applicable to
construction pavement.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to ultra- 6
wide/ultra-narrow roads.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to zigzag
roads.
• G-Pilot system is inapplicable to bad
weather with reduced visibility. 7
When G-Pilot system follows the
preceding vehicle to cross the
intersection, your vehicle will move laterally
with the preceding vehicle. There is risk of
side collision with the adjacent lane. The 8
Starting and Driving

driver needs to supervise and take control of Function Selection

the function.
At the entrance of highway or trunk road,
due to the change of road, G-Pilot system
cannot change lane and the function may be
degraded. Only G-Pilot is available.
G-Pilot system cannot work under complex
road conditions, e. g.: Severely congested
road, complicated traffic changes, crossing,
intersections, ramps, lost lane lines, etc.
The driver needs to supervise and take
control of the function. G-Pilot system only
provides comfort experience under suitable In the combination instrument display,
road conditions. The driver should is fully select the advanced intelligent driving
responsible for safe driving. function via the menu switch button on the
The front camera is mounted behind left side of steering wheel. After selection,
the front windshield of vehicle. Be the advanced intelligent driving will be on
aware that the visual field of front camera standby, and the indicator of G-Pilot will be
shall not be blocked by pollutants or on in white.
interfered by strong light. Otherwise, the Steering Wheel Control
function will fail. A text prompt will be shown
on the combination instrument display to
remind the driver to wipe the windshield
area ahead of front camera, or avoid dark
environment and direct sunlight. Blindness
of front camera is a kind of normal
protection and reminder under specific
situations. Without blocking the view of front
camera, the driver may avoid dark
environment and direct sunlight.

Advanced intelligent driving control button is

on the left side of steering wheel.
1. Intelligentdriving button: Activate,
resume G-Pilot system.
2. Inter-vehicle time-distance adjustment
button: adjust the cruise following
distance.

196

3. Speed adjustment and confirm button:
• Push up the button
Short push: cruise speed +1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed +5km/h.
• Push down the button
Short push: cruise speed -1km/h.
Push and hold: cruise speed -5km/h.
• Press the button
Activate the G-Pilot control function.
4. CNCL button: Exit G-Pilot activation
state.
To activate G-Pilot system, the following
conditions must be met:
• The advanced intelligent driving control
system is activated.
• Shift position is D.
• Engine is running.
• Four doors, trunk and front compartment
hood are all closed.
• The vehicle is in motion, and the brake
pedal is not applied.
• No fault on brake disc.
• Front camera and medium-range radar
have no problems such as high
temperature, dirt or fault.
• Electronic Stability Control System (ESC)
is active.
• EPB is released.
• The driver fastens the seat belt.
• Drive mode is matched.
Activation and Speed Setting
1. When the vehicle is stationary, activate
and set the vehicle speed as follows:
• Select and activate the G-Pilot. The
indicator of G-Pilot on combination
instrument lights up in white.
197
Starting and Driving
• Press the brake pedal or activate
AUTO HOLD function.
• Press the intelligent driving button or
1
the speed adjustment and confirm
button to activate the G-Pilot system;
The set cruise speed is 30 km/h. The
indicator of G-Pilot on combination
instrument display lights up in green. 2
• When the brake pedal is released,
G-Pilot system can continue to keep
the vehicle stationary.
• The driver needs to press the
intelligent driving button or press the 3
accelerator pedal to make the G-Pilot
system control the vehicle to start.
• G-Pilot system controls the vehicle
according to the set cruise speed.
2. When the vehicle is in motion, activate 4
and set the vehicle speed as follows:
• Select and activate the G-Pilot. The
indicator of G-Pilot on combination
instrument lights up in white.
• Press the intelligent driving button or 5
the speed adjustment and confirm
button to activate the G-Pilot system.
The indicator of G-Pilot on
combination instrument display lights
up in green. When the vehicle speed 6
is below 30 km/h, the set cruise
speed is 30 km/h; When the vehicle
speed is above 30 km/h, the set
cruise speed is the current vehicle
speed; 7
The maximum cruise speed is 130
km/h. The driver is liable to cruise at a
safe speed based on road conditions and
speed limits.
8
Starting and Driving
• G-Pilot system controls the vehicle
according to the set cruise speed.
3. Push the speed adjustment and setting
button to set the desired cruise speed.
During cruising, as the relative vehicle
speed varies, the combination instrument
will display different distance states away
from the preceding vehicle to remind the
driver.
In the active safety interface on combination
instrument display, the distance to the
preceding vehicle is displayed in real time.
The size of the preceding vehicle's image 1
will change with the distance. If the
preceding vehicle image 1 is the target
followed by G-Pilot system, then the
preceding vehicle image 1 is blue; If the
distance to the preceding vehicle is too
close, the preceding vehicle image 1 is
yellow; If the driver is applying accelerator
pedal to control the vehicle, the front vehicle
image 1 is gray; If G-Pilot system fails, the
front vehicle image 1 is not displayed.
If G-Pilot system is inactivated, the set
speed 2 is white.
If G-Pilot system is activated, the set speed
2 is green.
198
In addition, if G-Pilot system is not activated
in this trip, after pressing the intelligent
driving button and after the first function
selection, the set speed will not be
displayed.
When the active safety interface is blocked
by other interfaces, a small interface will
appear to display functional information.
When the G-Pilot system is inactivated, if no
vehicle ahead, the preceding vehicle 1 will
not be displayed; If a target vehicle appears
ahead, the preceding vehicle 1 is in gray.
When the G-Pilot system is activated, if no
vehicle ahead, the preceding vehicle 1 will
not be displayed; When a target vehicle
appears ahead and it is followed, the
preceding vehicle 1 is in blue; When the
vehicle is close to the preceding vehicle, the
preceding vehicle 1 is in yellow; When the
distance between the two vehicles is too
 Starting and Driving

close and the driver's active control is When inter-vehicle time distance is far.
required, the preceding vehicle 1 is in red.
Inter-vehicle time distance 2 is the inter-
1
vehicle time distance selected by the driver.

Set Inter-vehicle Time Distance

It is the driver's responsibility to
choose a safe inter-vehicle time 2
distance.
The driver can adjust the inter-vehicle time
distance of G-Pilot following, based on
current road environment. Inter-vehicle time
distance refers to the time required for the
When inter-vehicle time distance is medium. 3
vehicle to travel to the current position of
preceding vehicle at the current speed, i. e.
the inter-vehicle distance divided by the
vehicle speed.
The driver can decrease/increase the time 4
distance to the preceding vehicle by
pressing the control button of inter-vehicle
time distance. Inter-vehicle time distance
has three levels: Near, medium and far.
Every time G-Pilot switch is started, the 5
default inter-vehicle time distance of the
system is far.
Different options for inter-vehicle time When inter-vehicle time distance is near.
distance are displayed on combination HUD displays different inter-vehicle
instrument display time distances via different distance
cells 6

199
Starting and Driving

When the G-Pilot detects a preceding steering wheel and concentrate on driving.
vehicle, the vehicle pattern will be displayed
at Area 1 in the figure.
Release Alarm
The number of cells at Area 2 in the figure
shows the set inter-vehicle time distance
between the vehicle and the preceding
vehicle.
G-Pilot status indicator is displayed at Area
3 in the figure.
G-Pilot setting speed is displayed at Area 4
in the figure.

In any case, the driver must keep

sufficient braking distance from the
preceding vehicle, and be aware of relevant
requirements of local highway traffic
regulations on the minimum distance or the
shortest time. It is the driver's responsibility
to abide by the law.
Deviation Control*
For vehicles with deviation control function,
when the G-Pilot is activated, and the
vehicle is going to overtake the preceding
truck, trailer or other large vehicles (or to be
overtaken by large vehicles), the system
controls the vehicle to deviate to the
opposite direction of the truck position for a
certain distance in its lane, i. e., to actively
keep away from the large vehicle, and after
overtaking (or being overtaken) for a certain
distance, it controls the vehicle back to the
middle of its lane, without any operation by
the driver.
This function can only be
automatically activated when the
vehicle speed is greater than 50 km/h, and
the driver is liable to keep holding the
When the G-Pilot is activated, please hold
the steering wheel. If your hands are not
detected on the steering wheel for a long
time, a reminder message will appear on the
combination instrument display.
The G-Pilot detects the driver's hands by
identifying the slight resistance when the
steering wheel turns or the resistance
generated when the driver slightly turns the
steering wheel.
When both hands are detected, this
message disappears and the G-Pilot
continues to work.
If the G-Pilot does not detect your hands on
the steering wheel, the request will be
upgraded and it will buzz with a reminder
message still displayed.
If you still ignore the reminder of G-Pilot and
don't put your hands on the steering wheel,
the G-Pilot function will automatically exit at
the end of buzzer alarm.
During the buzzer alarm, if both hands
are detected, this message will

200

disappear and the G-Pilot continues to work.
When the G-Pilot exits, a prompt
sound will be given.
End of G-Pilot
The following methods can release the G-
Pilot:
• Depress the brake pedal to exit the G-
Pilot.
• Press CNCL switch button to exit the G-
Pilot.
The G-Pilot is dependent on the operation of
other systems, such as the electronic
stability control system (ESC). If any of
these systems stop working, the G-Pilot will
be automatically deactivated.
In case of automatic deactivation, a sound
signal is given and the combination
instrument display shows a text message.
The driver must intervene to match the
speed of and the distance to the preceding
vehicle.
Possible reasons for disabling the G-Pilot
(including but not limited to):
• Any door, front compartment hood or
trunk is opened.
• Driver's seat belt is unfastened
• The wheels losses roadholding.
• The brake system performance
degraded or fails.
• Parking brake is applied
• Front medium-range radar and front
camera is covered by wet snow or heavy
rain.
Starting and Driving
Display of G-Pilot
1
2
3
Preceding vehicle 1: Gray when G-Pilot
system is not activated; Blue when G-Pilot
system is activated; Yellow when G-Pilot
system is activated, and too close to your
own vehicle.
Preceding vehicle 2/3: Gray when G-Pilot
4
system is not activated; White when G-Pilot
system is activated; Not displayed when G-
Pilot system fails;
Lane shading 4: Low light when G-Pilot
system is not activated; High light when G- 5
Pilot system is activated.
Lane line 5: When the system does not
detect any lane line, no lane line is
displayed; When the lane keeping assist
system is not activated, the lane line is 6
displayed in gray; When the lane keeping
is assist system is intervened by the steering
wheel torque, the lane line is displayed in
blue; When the lane keeping assist system
alarms, the lane line is displayed in red. 7
The curvature of lane line may be
detected inaccurate due to limited
sensor performance, e. g., straight road is
displayed as curved road.
8
201
Starting and Driving

When the vehicle is powered on, the

G-Pilot will start self-check, and the
system function is not available at this
stage.
G-Pilot status indicator 6: White when G-
Pilot system is not activated; Green when
G-Pilot system simultaneously performs
cruise control and lane keeping control;
Yellow-green when G-Pilot system only
performs cruise control; Gray when G-Pilot
system fails.
Set speed 7: If G-Pilot system function is not
activated, the set speed 7 is gray; If G-Pilot
system function is activated, the set speed 7
is white; In addition, if ACC or G-Pilot is not
activated in this trip, after pressing the menu
switch button on the left side of steering
wheel, after the first function selection, the Detection problems may occur in the
set speed will not be displayed. following situations:
1. Vehicles move slowly along the driver's
System Limitation
lane. The system can only detect the
The detectable range of front camera, front vehicle that has fully entered the driver's
medium-range radar and rear side medium- lane.
range radar is limited. In some cases, it may 2. When the front vehicle is a large truck,
be unable to detect vehicles, or the the time of detecting the vehicle may be
detection of vehicles is delayed. delayed.
3. When the driver enters or exits a curve
on the road, detection problems related
to the preceding vehicle may occur.
Under such circumstances, the driver
should keep alert. Take emergency
measures and temporarily shut down G-
Pilot system if necessary.
The detectability of front camera is limited.
In some cases, the front camera may not be
able to accurately judge lane lines, and it's
easy to be interfered by the environment.
Lane line detection problems may occur in
the following situations:

202

1. Lane lines are not constructed
according to national standards and
cannot be recognized.
2. Lane lines are unrecognizable due to
low clearness and contrast.
3. The surface of lane lines is covered by
dust, water, snow, etc., and cannot be
recognized.
4. In rain and snow days, the wheel marks
and braking marks of preceding
vehicles may be recognized as lane
lines.
5. Road boundaries, curbs, etc., may be
recognized as lane lines.
6. Continuous lane-line-shaped shadows
on road, such as the shadow of railings,
may be recognized as lane lines.
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)*
The lane keeping assist system can
recognize lane lines, pedestrians, curbs,
front/rear incoming vehicles, and calculate
the distance from the vehicle to the left/right
lane line and front/rear incoming vehicles
via front camera, front medium-range radar
and rear side medium-range radar at
65~200 km/h. When the vehicle deviates
from the lane or is about to collide with
pedestrians, vehicles in the adjacent lane,
the system will give a corrective assist force
to prevent the lane deviation, mitigate or
avoid collision, or remind the driver to keep
the vehicle in the lane. Lane keeping assist
(LKA) system consists of lane departure
warning, lane departure assist and lane
keeping assist.
203
Starting and Driving
1
2
The sensors used by LKA system include:
1. Rear side medium-range radar 3
2. Front Camera
3. Front medium-range radar
When the vehicle is powered on, the
lane keeping assist system will start
4
self-check, and the system function is not
available at this stage.
Ensure the front camera and the
medium-range radar are clean. Dirty
front camera and medium-range radar, and 5
environmental conditions such as rain and
fading lane lines, may affect the
performance of lane keeping assist system.
When using the lane keeping assist 6
system, the driver must always hold
the steering wheel with both hands.
The lane keeping assist system is
only suitable for the use on
7
expressways and urban main roads, and the
driver should be concentrated on driving.
When using the lane keeping assist system,
hold the steering wheel and pay attention to
the road and surrounding traffic. Do not use
this function in urban streets, construction
8
Starting and Driving

areas, narrow paths, or roads where cyclists
or pedestrians exist. Do not rely on the lane
keeping assist system to determine the
appropriate driving route. Be always ready
to take immediate actions. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in property
damage, serious personal injury or death.
When the electronic stability control
system (ESC) is off, the lane
departure prevention (LDP) and emergency
lane keeping assist (ELKA) cannot work.
Function Types
Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) warns the
driver when the vehicle deviates from the
lane unconsciously. Unconscious lane
departure includes the already happened
lane departure and the imminent lane
departure.
Lane Departure Prevention (LDP)
As for Lane Departure Prevention (LDP),
when the vehicle approaches lane lines and
there is a risk of deviation, the system will
assist the driver to control the vehicle back
to the lane by applying torque to steering
wheel.
Emergency lane keeping assist (ELKA)
*
A vehicle with emergency lane keeping
assist (ELKA) can help the vehicle back to
its own lane in the following situations:
• The vehicle is about to rush out of the
road or collide with the edge of
traversable roads.
• Unintentional deviation from the lane and
collision with the opposite vehicle.
• Unintentional deviation from the lane and
collision with the rear vehicle (this is only
for vehicles with rear side medium-range
radar).
• Unintentional deviation from the lane and
collision with pedestrians in the adjacent
lane.
ELKA cannot cope with all situations
under all kinds of traffic, weather and
road conditions.
This function cannot detect fences,
railings or similar obstacles on the
roadside.
ELKA is only enabled when a high risk
of collision exists, so do not wait for
this function to intervene.
The driver shall always keep their
attention and judgment to ensure the
safe travelling of vehicle at 65 km/h, keep a
proper distance from other vehicles, and
adhere to current traffic laws and
regulations.
Function Selection
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Lane Keeping Assist, and then
enable/disable the lane departure warning

204

and lane departure prevention in this
interface.
If any function of lane departure warning
(LDW) and lane departure prevention (LDP)
is enabled, the lane keeping assist (LKA)
status indicator on the combination
instrument display lights up in green.
The emergency lane keeping assist
(ELKA) is enabled by default every
time the vehicle is started. Lane departure
warning (LDW) and lane departure
prevention (LDP) will memorize the driver's
selection.
Lane Keeping Assist System
Display
The curvature of lane line may be
detected inaccurate due to limited
sensor performance, e. g., straight road is
displayed as curved road.
The lane keeping assist system will display
the information of system working status on
combination instrument.
When the lane departure warning or lane
departure prevention is activated, the lane
keeping assist (LKA) system indicator 1
lights up in green; When the lane departure
205
Starting and Driving
prevention system has any fault, the lane
keeping assist system (LKA) indicator 1
lights up in yellow.
1
When the lane keeping assist system does
not detect the lane lines, the lane lines 2 are
not displayed.
When LKA system is not activated, the lane
lines 2 are displayed in gray. 2
When LKA system is on standby, the lane
lines 2 are displayed in white.
When the lane departure warning system
works, the lane lines 2 are displayed in red.
When LKA system is intervened with 3
steering wheel torque, the lane lines 2 are
displayed in blue.
Release Warning
4
5
6
When the lane keeping assist system is
activated, the driver shall always keep two
hands on the steering wheel. If your hands
are not detected on the steering wheel by
the system at the first activation of the lane
keeping assist, no reminder message will
7
appear on the combination instrument. If the
lane keeping assist is activated again in the
next period of time, and the system still does
not detect the driver's hands on the steering
wheel, the system requests and gives an 8
Starting and Driving
audible warning, and displays a reminder on
the combination instrument.
When both hands are detected, the
reminder displayed on the
combination instrument will disappear and
the system will continue to work.
Abnormal tire pressure, incorrect four-
wheel alignment parameters,
inconsistent tires and incorrect tire model,
etc., may result in abnormal performance of
LKA system. The driver shall use the assist
system when the vehicle is in normal
condition.
System Limitation
Under the following road conditions, the
LKA performance will degrade or fail to
work. The driver should keep alert:
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to roads with excessively
small curve radius.
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to roads with invisible lane
lines
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to intersections of roads.
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to roads with vehicle marks
(e.g., tire marks).
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to roads of which the lanes
increase or decrease.
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to roads that the original
lane and the new lane have large
difference.
206
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to pavements with potholes,
bumps, undulations.
• The lane keeping assist system cannot
recognize road signs (cones), so it is not
applicable to construction pavement.
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to ultra-wide/ultra-narrow
roads.
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to zigzag pavements.
• The lane keeping assist system is
inapplicable to bad weather with reduced
visibility.
• The visual field of front camera, front
medium-range radar, rear side medium-
range radar shall not be blocked by
pollutants. Especially, when it's
completely covered by snow, the lane
keeping assist system will exit, and the
information of system exiting will be
displayed to the driver through
combination instrument display.
• The installation of front camera, front
medium-range radar, rear side medium-
range radar may be affected by vibration
or impact, which will degrade the system
performance. At this time, it is necessary
to recalibrate the front camera, front
medium-range radar and rear side
medium-range radar.
Collision Mitigation Support
Front (CMSF)*
The collision mitigation support front system
can warn the driver to pay attention to
pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles via sound,
image and braking, etc. In case of late
braking by driver, excessively small braking
force or no braking action at all, the system

will act to assist the driver to avoid or
mitigate the collision, and help the driver.
Usually, the driver or passengers will only
notice the function of CMSF when the
vehicle is about to collide.
The sensors used by Collision Mitigation
Support Front (CMSF) system include:
1. Front Camera
2. Front medium-range radar
When the vehicle is powered on, the
collision mitigation support front
(CMSF) system will start self-check, and the
system function is not available at this
stage.
This function is a driver assistance
function to improve the driving
convenience and safety of vehicle, but it
cannot cope with all situations under all
traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver is recommended to read all
the chapters related to this function in
this manual to understand the factors such
as function limitation and all the knowledge
required before the use of this system.
The collision mitigation support front
system cannot substitute the attention
207
Starting and Driving
and judgment of driver. The driver shall
always ensure the safe travelling of the
vehicle at a proper speed, keep a proper
1
distance from other vehicles, and adhere to
current traffic laws and regulations.
No automatic system can guarantee
100% normal operation under any
2
circumstances. Therefore, please do not
intentionally drive the vehicle toward people
or objects to test the FCW/CMSF
performance. Otherwise, accidents may
occur and result in casualties.
3
For safety concern, the system cannot
work when the driver doesn't wear the
seat belt.
Usually, CMSF system works in the
background unnoticeable to the 4
driver. When the system recognizes a
danger, it will warn or brake to protect the
occupants. Due to system performance
limitations, false triggers may occur. The
5
driver must pay close attention to the
surrounding at all times.
The system will not react to animals,
small vehicles (such as tricycles),
vehicles with irregular appearance,
6
pedestrians, oncoming and crossing
vehicles.
When the vehicle is impacted or
strongly vibrated, the position of
medium-range radar may deviate, resulting 7
in degraded system performance. In severe
cases, the system will give a fault prompt.
Then the driver should contact Geely
Service for maintenance as soon as
possible.
8
Starting and Driving
For the effective target recognized by
the system, due to different vehicles,
pedestrians, scenes and road conditions,
the system cannot always achieve the same
performance.
This function will not be enabled at
low vehicle speed, so the system will
not intervene and brake when the vehicle
approaches the preceding vehicle or
pedestrian at low speed, for example, when
parking. For example, when parking.
Function Settings
The collision mitigation support front is a
safety system, and the function is enabled
by default every ignition cycle.
If CMSF has faults, this indicator
on the combination instrument lights
up. The driver shall contact Geely Service
for maintenance as soon as possible.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Pre-collision Assistance, and set
the sensitivity in the interface. The driver's
sensitivity selection will be memorized, no
need to choose every time when the driver
gets in the vehicle.
208
The sensitivity has four levels: no alarm,
low, medium and high.
No alarm: indicates that no alarm is
required.
Low sensitivity: indicates a short alarm
distance and the alarm time is relatively late.
Medium sensitivity: indicates a moderate
alarm distance and the alarm time is
between low and high.
High sensitivity: indicates a far alarm
distance and the alarm time is relatively
early.
If the driver thinks the alarm is too frequent,
a lower sensitivity can be selected to reduce
the total alarms.
Functions
When a danger is judged by the system, the
system will assist the driver in the following
ways:
• Safe distance alarm
The safe distance alarm works in a non-
emergency situation. When the vehicle
speed reaches 65 km/h or above, it
reminds the driver that the following
distance is too small, and the driver
should adjust the driving behavior and
keep a proper distance.
• Collision warning (FCW)
When the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h
or above, the system considers that there
is potential collision risk, and it will
prompt the driver of potential collision
risk through alarm sound, alarm picture
on combination instrument interface, etc.
• Emergency brake assist (DBS)
When the vehicle speed reaches 30 km/h
or above, if a danger occurs, but the
driver's current braking force is too small,
 Starting and Driving

the system will assist the driver to

increase braking force to avoid or
mitigate the collision.
1
• Automatic emergency braking (AEB)
When a danger occurs but the driver fails
to perform effective braking, the system
will intervene timely by automatic
emergency braking to avoid or mitigate 2
collision. Automatic emergency braking
can decrease 60 km/h at most.

Function Activation
CMSF working speed
The target ahead is a vehicle: When the
vehicle speed is 4 km/h~150 km/h, the
CMSF system will work. Beyond this range,
the CMSF system will not work.
The target ahead is pedestrian and two-
wheeled vehicle: When the vehicle speed is
4 km/h~90 km/h, the CMSF system will
work. Beyond this range, the CMSF system
will not work.
Vehicle collision mitigation assist
The vehicle collision mitigation assist can
avoid or mitigate the collision with vehicles.
Main application scenario: Vehicle straight
rear-end collision.
When the front collision warning function
detects a collision risk, it will remind the
driver to react in time through sound,
pictures on combination instrument and
short braking to reduce the collision risk.
If the driver applies insufficient braking or no
braking, the brake assist or collision 3
mitigation support front will actively
intervene to mitigate or avoid collision, and
there will be pictures and text prompts on
the combination instrument, as well as
sound alarm. 4
Pedestrian collision mitigation assist
The pedestrian collision mitigation assist
can avoid or mitigate the collision with
pedestrians. Main application scenes:
Pedestrians cross the road. 5
When the front collision warning function
detects a collision risk, it will remind the
driver to react in time through sound,
pictures on combination instrument and
short braking to reduce the collision risk.
6

209
Starting and Driving
If the driver applies insufficient braking or no
braking, the brake assist or collision
mitigation support front will actively
intervene to mitigate or avoid collision, and
there will be pictures and text prompts on
the combination instrument, as well as
alarm sound.
Cyclist collision mitigation assist
Cyclist collision mitigation assist can avoid
or mitigate the collision with cyclists. Main
application scenario: Cyclist crossing/rear-
end collision.
When the front collision warning function
detects a collision risk, it will remind the
driver to react in time through sound,
pictures on combination instrument and
short braking to reduce the collision risk.
If the driver applies insufficient braking or no
braking, the brake assist or collision
mitigation support front will actively
intervene to mitigate or avoid collision, and
there will be pictures and text prompts on
the combination instrument, as well as
sound alarm.
Obstacle Detection
Collision mitigation support front (CMSF)
can detect such obstacle targets as
210
passenger cars, trucks, buses and
pedestrians.
Vehicles
Collision mitigation support front (CMSF)
can detect most vehicles that are stationary
or running in the same direction as the
vehicle.
Only when the front combination lamps of
vehicle turn on normally can the vehicles
within a certain range be detected at night.
Pedestrians*
Only when the system detects the
unmistakable information of the pedestrian's
shape, can it achieve the best working
effect. It means that the system can clearly
recognize human's head, arms, shoulders,
thighs, upper body, lower body, etc., in
combination with standard human
movement.
The system can detect the pedestrians in
contrast to the background, for example, the
clothing color of pedestrians is in sharp
contrast with the environment color.
If the contrast is low, the pedestrian will be
detected late or not detected at all. It means
that the warning and braking will be delayed
or unachieved.
If a pedestrian is partially blocked, the
clothes worn are not easy to be judged as
body shape, and if the height is less than
0.8 m, or a large object is carried, he/she
can't be detected, which means that braking
cannot be achieved.
Cyclist*
The cyclist must be an adult, and the bicycle
must be designed for adults. Only when the
system detects the unmistakable outline
information of human body and bicycle, can
it achieve the best working effect. It means

that the system can clearly recognize
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, thighs,
upper body, lower body, etc., in combination
with standard human movement.
Partial block, poor background contrast or
cyclists loaded with large goods cannot be
detected by the system, which means that
braking cannot be realized.
Function Limitation
The collision mitigation support front system
may be limited in some cases.
Surroundings
Be aware that the front camera and
medium-range radar cannot detect
dangerous obstacles ahead in all cases.
Severe weather conditions, such as rain,
snow, fog, etc., will degrade the system
performance. In such cases, some targets
will not be detected, or detected too late by
the system.
Strong sunlight, reflection and
extreme light contrast may make it
difficult for the driver to see visual warning
signals, and may also affect the detection of
front camera.
On slippery roads, the braking
distance of vehicle is lengthened,
which will reduce the anti-collision
performance of CMSF.
If the temperature in passenger
compartment is very high, the front
camera may be temporarily turned off and
the system may not give a warning.
Under complicated driving conditions,
the system may brake unnecessarily.
For example, when there is water spraying
211
Starting and Driving
or splashing at construction site, railway
track, manhole cover, underground garage
or ahead of vehicle.
1
The visual field of front camera and
front medium-range radar
In some scenes, the detection of
medium-range radar may be affected, 2
such as roads with fences, tunnels, vehicles
driving in and out ahead, sharp turns.
Be sure to keep the front camera,
medium-range radar and the
3
surrounding clean to ensure the normal
operation of system. Do not place or paste
anything ahead of front camera and middle-
range radar. Otherwise, the system will not
work properly.
4
In some cases, the vision of front
camera and front medium-range radar
is limited. The system may detect vehicles,
pedestrians or cyclists later than expected,
or fail to detect them at all. 5
The automatic emergency braking
may be degraded and even
unavailable when the front camera is
blocked or the front camera function is
limited. 6
In order for a vehicle to be detected at
night, its headlights and taillights must
be turned on and exceptionally bright.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 90 7
km/h, the warning and braking
intervention for pedestrians and cyclists will
be turned off.
8
Starting and Driving

Driver intervention When the vehicle is powered on, the

traffic sign identification system will
If the driver applies the accelerator
start self-check, and the system function is
pedal or steers to intervene during the
not available at this stage.
automatic emergency braking of vehicle, the
system will exit the automatic emergency Speed Limit Information
braking, even if the collision is inevitable. Identification
While the automatic braking is being
triggered, the driver needs a larger
force to depress brake pedal.

When reversing, the system is in

suspended.

Traffic Sign Identification

System (TSI)*
Traffic Sign Identification System (TSI)
obtains road traffic sign information such as
speed limit sign and several prohibitory
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
traffic signs via front camera, map and
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
navigation information, and prompts the
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring, and
driver of current road sign information via
then the speed limit identification alarm
the combination instrument in real time. If
mode and speed limit deviation setting can
the vehicle exceeds the current speed limit
be set in the interface.
of the road, the system will give an alarm in
Display of speed limit sign
time to assist the driver's proper driving.

After passing the speed limit sign, the speed

The sensors used by
identification system include:
1. Front Camera
traffic sign
limit value is displayed, and the display ends
after a certain distance. Display of speed

212

camera information: When passing a speed
camera, the system will display the speed
limit information to the driver in advance.
If the road speed limit sign is unclear,
distorted, inclined, irregular, partially
blocked or covered, etc., the recognition of
front camera will degrade, resulting in
misrecognition or unrecognizable.
In case of other non-standard signs
and positions, it may be identified as
speed limit signs, resulting in
misrecognition.
Speed Limit Alarm
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring, and
then select the alarm mode in the speed
limit alarm interface.
Off: The combination instrument only
displays the speed limit sign.
Flash: The speed limit sign on combination
instrument flashes.
Beep: The speed limit sign on combination
instrument flashes with an audible reminder.
213
Starting and Driving
Second speed limit alarm
When the vehicle speed exceeds the speed
limit plus deviation value recognized by the
1
system, an alarm is triggered, and the
system gives the first alarm. When the
vehicle speed is less than the speed limit
plus the deviation value recognized by the
system, the first alarm is released. When 2
the vehicle speed drops to the alarm trigger
value minus 5 km/h or more, and the vehicle
speed exceeds the alarm trigger value
again, the system will give a second alarm.
Otherwise, the alarm will not be triggered, 3
until the speed limit value is updated.
The speed limit alarm function only
serves as a speed limit reminder. The
driver shall actively control the vehicle
speed. The visual field of front camera shall
4
not be blocked by pollutants or interfered by
strong light, rain, snow, etc. For brief
blocking and strong light interference, the
function can restore itself. For long-term
blocking and strong light interference, the 5
function will quit. Please go to Geely Service
for maintenance.
The speed limit alarm function is
influenced by the visual field of front
6
camera, the relative position between front
camera and speed limit sign, etc., and the
speed limit sign may be wrongly recognized
or not recognized. Do not rely on this
function to determine the driving speed.
7
Starting and Driving

Speed Limit Deviation Setting Road Sign Identification

On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring, and
then select the required alarm deviation
value in the speed limit deviation interface.
An alarm is given when the vehicle speed
exceeds the speed limit plus the deviation
value.
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring. Then
enable/disable the function in the road sign
identification interface.

After the alarm appears, when the

vehicle speed is kept above/below the
speed limit plus the deviation value, no
overspeed alarm may be given. The alarm
will be given only after the vehicle speed is
lower than the displayed value within a
certain range and it overspeeds again.

The current function can only recognize

some of road signs and show them on the
combination instrument display to assist the
driver. The recognizable road signs include:
overtaking prohibition, overtaking prohibition
release, and beware of children.

The road sign identification function is

influenced by the visual field of front
camera, the relative position between front
camera and speed limit sign, etc., and the

214

road sign may be wrongly recognized or not
recognized. Do not rely on this function to
determine the driving mode.
If the road speed limit sign is unclear,
distorted, inclined, irregular, partially
blocked or covered, etc., the recognition of
front camera will degrade, resulting in
misrecognition or unrecognizable.
In case of non-standard signs or
positions, they may be identified as
road signs, resulting in misrecognition.
Rear Side Radar Assist
System*
The system detects the rear side of the
vehicle based on the rear medium-range
radar on both sides of rear bumper, to
realize lane change safety warning (LCA)
(including blind spot monitoring function),
collision mitigation support rear (CMSR),
door opening warning (DOW) and rear cross
traffic alert (RCTA).
1. Rear side medium-range radar
When the vehicle is powered on, the
rear side radar assist system will start
215
Starting and Driving
self-check, and the system function is not
available at this stage.
1
2
3
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring. Enable/
disable the functions as demand in this
interface. The enable/disable state of all
4
functions remain as the previous setting.
The system will prompt the driver of driving
safety via the on/flashing of blind spot
monitoring indicator on the exterior rearview
mirror, combination instrument prompt, 5
sound alarm, flashing of hazard warning
lamp, etc.
When the start and stop button is in Mode II
or the engine is started, the blind spot
monitoring status indicator on the 6
combination instrument display lights up
and turns green, and the system works
normally. When the blind spot monitoring
status indicator lights up in red, the
system is faulty. 7
• Please keep the both sides of rear
bumper surface clean; 8
Starting and Driving
• This system is only for driver assist, and
it cannot replace the driver's safe driving.
• Do not dismantle or exchange the rear
side medium-range radar.
Lane Change Warning (LCA)
The lane change warning function covers
the blind spot area and the rear side quick
oncoming car area, to assist and alert the
driver against blind spots and rear oncoming
cars when driving, especially when turning
or changing lanes. The warning function
works when changing lane at 15~150 km/h.
1. Blind spot area
2. Areas with quick oncoming cars
216
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring. Enable/
disable the function in the lane change
warning assist. In addition, the sound
warning function can be turned on/off in this
interface.
When the warning condition is met, the blind
spot monitoring indicator on the exterior
rearview mirror lights up or flashes. If the
sound warning function is turned on in
advance in the multimedia display, the
system will also give a sound warning.
In some cases, it's difficult for the lane
change warning function to assist the driver.
Possible situations include:
• Bad weather such as rain or snow.
• It doesn't work on stationary targets.
• It doesn't work on pedestrians and
bicycles.
• Sharp turns and open areas.
Collision Mitigation Support Rear
(CMSR)
The collision mitigation support rear function
can monitor the targets behind the vehicle.
When a vehicle is detected quickly

approaching behind, the hazard warning
lamp turns on to remind the rear vehicle to
slow down or keep a safe distance. When a
risk of rear-end collision exists, if the vehicle
features the active pretension seat belt, then
the driver's seat belt will be actively
tensioned. When the vehicle is stationary,
with the shift lever in N/P position, if a risk of
rear-end collision exists, the vehicle will
perform braking to reduce the risk of the
vehicle slipping forward after rear-end
collision and avoid the secondary collision
between the vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The collision mitigation support rear function
works in P/N/D gear, and the vehicle does
not slip backwards. The detection of the rear
approaching targets includes the following
targets, etc.
• Motor vehicle
• Electric vehicle or motorcycle
217
Starting and Driving
1
2
On the multimedia display, click in turn:
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and 3
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring. Enable/
disable the function in the collision
mitigation support rear interface.
In some cases, it's difficult for the collision
mitigation support rear function to help. 4
Possible situations include:
• The rear vehicle changes lane at the last
minute.
• Too late to detect a vehicle coming from
behind in scenes such as sharp bends 5
and ramps.
• The relative speed of rear vehicle
exceeds 72 km/h or the relative speed is
less than 10 km/h.
Collision mitigation support rear 6
function cannot avoid collision. The
driver should pay attention to the warning
and take actions accordingly for safe drive.
Door Opening Warning (DOW) 7
When the vehicle is stationary or at low
speed, the rear side middle-range radar
detects the approaching movable targets at
the rear side. When a potential collision risk
exists to open the door, the blind spot
8
Starting and Driving

monitoring indicator on the exterior rearview Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
mirror lights up or flashes and gives a sound
warning to remind the driver of the risk to
open the door.
The door opening warning function mainly
detects the following targets:
• Motor vehicle
• Electric vehicle or motorcycle
• Bicycle
• Pedestrians (detection performance is
not guaranteed)

The rear cross traffic alert uses the rear side

medium-range radar to monitor approaching
targets. When a collision risk is detected
between the vehicle and rear vehicles,
motorcycles, bicycles, pedestrians, etc., the
rear cross traffic alert gives an clear and
accurate alarm to remind the driver of the
risk. When the vehicle reverses and the risk
is high, the vehicle will perform emergency
braking. If the vehicle features the active
On the multimedia display, click in turn: pretension seat belt, the seat belt pretension
Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and will also be triggered when braking.
Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring. Enable/
disable the function in the door opening
warning interface.
In some cases, it's difficult for the door
opening warning function to assist the
driver. Possible situations include:
• Bad weather such as rain or snow.
• It doesn't work on stationary or slow
targets.
• Vehicles approaching or leaving quickly.
After the start and stop button is
turned off for 3 minutes or the vehicle On the multimedia display, click in turn:
is locked and powered off, the door opening Vehicle Settings → Assist Driving and
warning function stops working. Safety → Driving Safety Monitoring. Enable/

218
 Starting and Driving

disable the function in the rear cross traffic sources are detected to avoid the glare of
alert interface. high beam to surrounding traffic
participants. After the vehicles meet,
1
overtake or there is no ambient light source
around, the low beam is automatically
toggled to high beam.

3
This function works in the low-speed
reversing scene. When a possible collision
is detected, the rear cross traffic alert will
provide the driver with light alarm (the blind
spot monitoring indicator on exterior Sensors used by AHBC system include:
4
rearview mirror/danger warning on 1. Front camera
multimedia display) and sound alarm
When the vehicle is powered on, the
(warning sound from multimedia display), to
active high beam control system will
prevent the vehicle from colliding with the
start self-check, and the system function is 5
rear crossing vehicles when leaving the
not available at this stage.
parking area.
Active High Beam Control Function Enable/Activation
System (AHBC)*
1. In the automatic light mode (i.e., AUTO),
Active high beam control system (AHBC)
turn the light control switch in direction B
can automatically toggle between high 6
until the mark points to the position
beam and low beam at night. Based on the
. The active high beam control system
light source information detected by the
is activated, the knob automatically
front camera above the windshield, the
returns to AUTO, and the active high
system automatically toggles between high
beam (AHBC) status indicator on the
beam and low beam according to the light of 7
combination instrument lights up in
vehicles in the same or opposite direction,
white.
as well as the ambient light. Generally, this
function automatically toggles the high
beam to low beam when the headlamps of
the oncoming vehicle, the taillights of the
8
forward preceding vehicle or other light

219
Starting and Driving
2. At night, after the front combination
lamps automatically turn on, AHBC
system is activated automatically.
After AHBC system is activated, if all the
following conditions are met, the AHBC
system will recommend to turn on the high
beam:
1. Vehicle speed is greater than or equal to
40 km/h;
2. Relevant traffic participants or other light
sources are detected.
If any of the following conditions are met,
the AHBC system will recommend to turn on
the low beam:
1. Vehicle speed is less than or equal to 35
km/h;
2. Relevant traffic participants or other light
sources are detected.
When AHBC system has
recommended to turn on the high
beam, and the vehicle speed maintains in
35~40 km/h, the AHBC system can still
remain the high beam until the light source
information is detected and AHBC will
recommend to turn on the low beam.
220
Function Display
When the active high beam control system
controls the high/low beam of front
combination lamps, the active high beam
lamp (AHBC) indicator lights up in white;
When the active high beam control system
is faulty, the active high beam lamp (AHBC)
indicator lights up in yellow.
When the driver operates the light
combination switch to select the high
beam, the driver's selection prevails.
AHBC system is an auxiliary function
of lamp control. It is recommended to
use this function when driving on highway,
but the system cannot completely substitute
the driver instead. The driver should always
switch the high/low beam according to the
requirements of road laws and regulations
as well as road changes.
In the following examples, the active
high beam control system does not
work or only works to a limited extent, which
may require the driver's response:
• Under climatic conditions such as heavy
fog or heavy rain, which are extremely
unfavorable for driving.
• Traffic participants (such as pedestrians,
cyclists) with poor illumination, railway or
waterway traffic near the road, and the
road infested with wild animals.
• In the environment with strong reflective
views (such as traffic signs on highways).
• When the windshield is covered with fog,
dirt or covered by labels and ornaments.

Hazard Warning Device
Hazard warning indicator
Under special circumstances when the
vehicle needs to be decelerated or stopped
in an emergency, press the hazard warning
lamp switch. Then the indicator on the
switch flashes along with the left and right
turn signal indicators to warn others.
Warning Triangle
The warning triangle is placed in the storage
box under the trunk and can be seen by
pulling open the trunk.
221
Fault during Drive
1
On normal roads, the warning triangle shall
be placed 50m-100m behind the vehicle. On 3
the highway, the warning sign shall be
placed more than 150m behind the vehicle.
In rainy or foggy weather, the distance shall
be 200m.
Fire Extinguisher* 4
The fire extinguisher is placed in front of the
front passenger seat.
In case of an emergency, please
ensure your own safety first, organize
7
fire fighting, and contact the fire department.
Fault during Drive

First Aid Kit*

Insert the tire pressure gauge into the tire

The first aid kit is stored in the glove box and
can be seen by opening the glove box.
The first aid kit contains medical gauze
blocks, elastic bandages, breathable tapes,
band-aids, safety scissors and other items.
valve, and the tire pressure value is
displayed at the rear of the tire pressure
gauge.

The first aid kit can be used to stop

bleeding in an emergency, please
seek medical attention as soon as possible.
In an emergency, please contact
emergency personnel for treatment
immediately.

Tire Pressure Gauge*

The tire pressure gauge is placed in the

glove box, together with the first aid kit.

222
 Fault during Drive

Jumper starting Do not connect jump wires to any

parts of the fuel system or to any
Jump Starting of the Vehicle 1
moving parts.
If the battery is drained, try to start the
Be careful not to touch the high temperature
vehicle by another vehicle with jump wire.
area of the front engine compartment.
Be sure to operate in accordance with the
Do not use booster batteries with voltages
following steps for safety.
greater than 12V.
Improper use of battery may cause Be careful when connecting jump wires to 2
personal injury. The battery is avoid short circuit with other parts of the
dangerous because: front engine compartment.
• The acid inside may result in burns.
• The gases inside is explosive or
flammable. 3
• The electricity in it may result in burns.
Failure to operate strictly in accordance with
the following steps, above injuries may
occur.

Ignoring these steps may result in 4

severe damage to the vehicle. Repair
incurred thereby is not covered by warranty.
The vehicle cannot be started by pushing or
pulling, it may be even damaged.
1. Turn off the ignition switch. Turn off all
lamps and electric accessories, except
hazard warning lamp (if necessary).
Cooling fans and other running parts
of the engine can cause personal
injury. Do not touch the cooling fan and
engine with your hands, clothes and tools
when the engine is running or not running.
The use of open fire near the battery
may explode the gases in the battery
and cause severe casualties. The acid in
the battery may result in burns. Do not
splash acid on your body. If acid is splashed
into eyes or on the skin, flush with water
immediately and go to the hospital.
2. Connect one end of red positive (+)
cable to positive (+) terminal (A) of the 5
vehicle whose battery is drained.
3. Do not let another end of red positive (+)
cable touch metal. Connect it to positive
(+) terminal (B) of the battery which has
sufficient electricity. 6
4. Connect one end of the black negative
wire to the negative (-) terminal (C) of
the battery with electricity.
Do not let another end touch anything
7
before proceeding to next step.
8

223
Fault during Drive

1. Disconnect black negative (-) cable on

vehicle whose battery is drained.
2. Disconnect black negative (-) cable on
vehicle whose battery has sufficient
electricity.
3. Disconnect red positive (+) cable on
vehicle whose battery has sufficient
electricity.
4. Disconnect red positive (+) cable on
vehicle whose battery is drained.

5. Connect the other end of the black

negative (-) cable to the grounding point
(D) on the body of vehicle whose battery
is drained, as shown in the above figure.
Pay attention to check and make sure
that the jumper terminal and charging
terminal are firmly connected to prevent
sparks when trying to start.
6. Start the engine on the vehicle whose
battery has sufficient electricity and
keep the engine idle for at least four
minutes.
7. Try to start the vehicle whose battery is
drained. If it fails to start with a few
attempts, the vehicle possibly needs to
be required.

If jump wires are connected or

removed in a wrong sequence, it is
possible to cause an electric short circuit
and damage the vehicle. Repair caused
thereby is not covered by warranty.
Therefore, it is necessary to connect or
remove the jump wire in the correct
sequence, and ensure the jump wire will not
touch each other or contact other metal.
To disconnect the jump wires between the
two vehicles, it is required to:

224

Vehicle Towing
Towing of All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle
All towing operations must be performed by
using the safety chain system and
complying with national and local laws. The
wheels and axles in contact with the ground
must be in good condition. If any of them is
damaged, a towing trolley must be used.
1. It is recommended to place the vehicle
on a platform trailer.
2. It is recommended to lift the rear wheel
of the vehicle and place the front wheel
on the tug (off the ground).
3. It is forbidden to tow with the front
wheels rolling backwards.
4. Do not lift body/chassis parts other than
the wheels.
225
Fault during Drive
Towing Warning
A warning sign is affixed to the edge of the 1
rear trim panel tail gate: all-wheel-drive
models, no two-wheel trailers.
2
For vehicles equipped with all-wheel-
drive systems, two-wheel trailers are 4
prohibited under any circumstances.
Towing Instructions
All towing operations must be performed by
using the safety chain system and 5
complying with national/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axles in contact with
the ground must be in good condition. If any
of them is damaged, a towing trolley must
be used.
6
1. When using a flexible coupling towing
device (such as a towing rope), the
distance between the towing vehicle
and the towed vehicle should be greater
than 4 meters and less than 10 meters.
7
For the towed vehicle that fails to brake,
a hard coupling towing device (such as
a towing bar) should be used for towing.
2. Hazard warning indicators of the towing
vehicle and the towed vehicle shall be
turned on.
8
Fault during Drive

3. If you want to tow a vehicle equipped
with an automatic transmission, you
need to:
• Engage the shift lever in neutral (N),
and the vehicle remains powered
during towing.
• Do not tow at a speed higher than 50
km/h.
• The forward towing distance shall not
exceed 50 kilometers, and the
vehicle speed shall not exceed 50
km/h.
• The reverse towing distance shall not
exceed 100 meters, and the vehicle
speed shall not exceed 30 km/h.
• There is no hardware damage to the
transmission, no damage to the
transmission parts of the whole
vehicle, and no fault alarm prompt on
the instrument panel.
• It is forbidden to accelerate from 0 to
more than 50 km/h within 14
seconds.
Under the following circumstances, it
is not allowed to tow a vehicle, it is
required to be transported by a special
carrier vehicle or trolley:
• The transmission of this vehicle has no
lubricating oil.
• A vehicle equipped with an automatic
transmission has a towing distance of
more than 50 kilometers.
Towing ring
The towing ring is located in the driver’s
toolkit in the trunk and can be used to tow
the vehicle that has broken down.
When using the tow eye, be sure to follow
the instructions in this section "Precautions
for Using the towing ring" and "Towing a
Broken down Vehicle".
Precautions for Using the
Towing ring
• Make sure that the towing ring is
screwed firmly and reliably into the
mounting hole.
• It is recommended to install an approved
towing bar or towing rope on the towing
ring.
• Do not use the towing ring to draw the
vehicle onto the flatbed rescue vehicle.
• Do not use the towing ring to rescue a
trapped vehicle.
When using the towing ring to tow a
vehicle, make sure to keep a safe
distance from other vehicles.
• Do not use the drag chain/belt on the
towing ring. The drag chain/belt may
break, resulting in personal injury or
death.
• Failure to correctly follow towing ring
instructions may cause parts to break,
resulting in personal injury or death.
The towing ring is for road rescue use
only and must not be used for other
purposes.
• When using the towing ring, be sure to
use the corresponding equipment (such
as a rigid towing bar or towing rope) that
complies with road traffic laws to tow the
vehicle for a short distance on flat ground
to the nearest service center.
• Do not use a towing ring to tow vehicles
on off-highroads or roads with obstacles.

226

• When the towing ring is used for towing,
the towing vehicle and the towed vehicle
must be on the same centerline as much
as possible. Failure to follow the above
instructions may result in damage to the
vehicle.
Installing Front Towing ring
The front towing ring mounting hole is
located on the right side of the front bumper.
To install the front tow eye, pry up the
towing hole at the lower edge of the tow
hole cover, then screw the tow eye into the
mounting hole, making sure the tow eye is
fully tightened.
227
Fault during Drive
Drive slowly, otherwise excessive
tractive force will damage the vehicle.
1
Installation of Rear Towing ring
The mounting hole of rear towing ring is
located on the right side of the rear bumper.
2
4
To install the rear towing ring, pry up the
towing hole cover at the upper edge of the
towing hole cover, then screw the towing
ring into the mounting hole, making sure the
towing ring is fully tightened. 5
Fault during Drive

Replace tires • Tire overload;

• Premature or irregular wear;
Tire
• Poor controllability;
Overview • Reduced economical efficiency of fuel.
Please refer to the Warranty and In case of over-inflation, the following
Maintenance Manual for details if you have situations will occur:
any doubts on tire warranty and
• Abnormal wear:
maintenance points. For other information,
• Poor controllability;
please consult with the tire manufacturer.
• Poor ride comfort;
Tires which lack maintenance or are • Unnecessary damage resulted from
used improperly are very dangerous. dangerous road condition.
Overload or under-inflation can cause
excessive tire deflection, resulting in serious
injury or death.
It is necessary to inspect all tires frequently
to keep the recommended pressure value.
It is necessary to inspect the tire pressure
when the tires are in the cold state. Please
refer to “Tire Pressure (Cold State)” in
“Technical Data”.
Over-inflation will make tires easier to get
scratched, punctured or burst due to sudden
collision. Thus, it is necessary to keep the
This vehicle is affixed with a tire pressure
recommended pressure value for tires.
label. The label is located above the outside
Damaged or used tires will result in
of the left center column and indicates the
accidents. It is necessary to replace the tire
front and rear wheel pressure and spare tire
timely if the tire tread is worn seriously or
pressure of the vehicle.
the tire is damaged.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure
(TPMS)
Tires can work effectively only when they
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
have the correct inflation pressure.
detects the tire pressure by radio waves and
Under-inflation or over-inflation of tires sensing technology. Alert the driver to check
may affect the tires and the running of tire pressure by illuminating the TPMS
the vehicle. In case of under-inflation, the status indicator lamp. When the tires are at
following situations will occur: a cold state and inflated to the tire pressure
• Excessive deflection; recommended on the tire pressure label, the
• Overheating; tire pressure of each tire (including the

228

spare tire) should be checked once a
month.
If the TPMS status indicator lamp is always
on, it indicates that one or more tires are
suffering abnormal tire pressure. At this
moment, it is necessary to park the vehicle
as soon as possible, inspect tire pressure
and inflate the tire to correct pressure value.
The cold tire pressure is marked at the tire
pressure label on the vehicle. Tire pressure
monitoring system of the vehicle can remind
you of abnormal tire pressure but it cannot
substitute normal tire maintenance. Please
see the section “Tire Inspection and
Transposition” in this chapter.
When the TPMS status indicator lamp
lights up, please reduce the speed
immediately and avoid sharp turns and
sudden braking. Get off the road as soon as
possible, stop safely, and check your tires
and tire pressure. Under certain driving
conditions (such as sport mode, winters or
soft roads), the TPMS status indicator lamp
may light up with a delay or may not light up.
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the vehicle runs in winter, if all
four tires are replaced with snow tires
(sensors not fitted), the ECU will prompt the
sensor to be lost and report the system
failure alarm. You can disactivate the TPMS
at Geely Service, then every time the start-
and-stop switch is in Mode II or the engine
starts, the instrument pack display will
prompt the TPMS disactivated.
229
Fault during Drive
Tire Inspection
When to check tires 1
Check the tires once a month at least. See
the section “Tire Pressure (Cold State)”
in “Technical Data”.
How to check tires
Use a high-quality compact tire pressure
2
gauge to check the tire pressure. It is
impossible to determine whether tire
pressure is appropriate merely by visual
inspection. A radial tire seems normal even
when it is not inflated sufficiently. Check tire
pressure when the tire is in a cold state.
3
Cold tire means the vehicle has stopped for
over three hours or traveled less than 1.6
km. Remove valve cap from tire valve core.
Connect tire pressure gauge to tire valve
and measure the pressure. If the cold tire 4
inflation pressure complies with the
pressure value recommended on the tire
pressure label, it is unnecessary to make
adjustments. If the inflation pressure is too
low, continue inflating to the recommended 5
pressure value. If the tire is inflated
excessively, deflate by pressing the metal
valve core at the center of tire valve.
Recheck the tire pressure with a tire
pressure gauge. Be sure to re-install the 6
valve cap on the valve core. The valve cap
can prevent dust and moisture from entering
the tire.
When to use a new tire
All kinds of factors like maintenance, 7
temperature, running speed, vehicle load
and road conditions will affect the time for a
new tire to be needed.
8
Fault during Drive
One way to determine when to use a new
tyre is to check the tread wear mark, which
will appear when the wheel is worn to the
point where only 1.6 mm or less of the tread
is left.
Under any of the following conditions, it is
necessary to use a new tire:
• Wear marks are exposed in at least three
places on the tire.
• Cord thread is seen or cord fabric is
exposed through tire rubber.
• Tread or sidewall is ruptured, cut open or
cracked, and it is so deep that the cord
thread or cord fabric can be seen.
• Tire swells, upheavals or is layered. Tire
is punctured, cut open or has other
damage and cannot be repaired
completely due to damage in some area
or position.
Quality of rubber in tires will reduce with the
time even if these tires are not used. The
same is true for spare tires. Many conditions
will affect such aging speed, including
temperature, loading situation and inflation
pressure holding, etc. If tires cannot be
maintained properly, they will be so worn
that they cannot be used before the rubber
quality deteriorates due to aging. If you are
230
not sure when to replace with new tires
when the tires are used for a long time,
please consult with tire manufacturer to
learn more information.
Please dispose of used tires in
accordance with relevant
environmental protection laws.
Purchase of new tires
When you purchase new tires, it is
necessary to ensure that the size, load
range, rated speed and structure type are
the same as those of the original tires. It is
recommended that the four tires should be
replaced at the same time. Please see the
section “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in
this chapter to learn information about tire
rotation.
Using different tires on the same
vehicle will cause the vehicle to be out
of control during running. If the tires of
different sizes or types (radial tire or bias
tire) are used, traffic collision may occur due
to poor controllability. Using tires of different
sizes and types may damage the vehicle as
well. All the wheels should use tires of
correct size and type.
If bias tires are used on vehicle, the
rim flange will have cracks after
vehicle running for certain distance. Tires
and/or wheels will be out of control
suddenly, resulting in traffic collision.
Therefore, the vehicle can only be fitted with
radial tires.
Tires and wheels of different sizes
Using wheels or tires of sizes different from
the original wheels and tires might affect the

vehicle's performance, including: braking,
riding & controllability, stability and rollover
resistance etc. Besides, if the vehicle is
equipped with electronic systems, such as
anti-lock brake system, airbag, traction
control system and electronic stability
control system, these systems will be also
affected.
If tires of specifications
recommended in this manual are
selected, the vehicle may be unable to
provide satisfactory performance and safety
and will increase possibility of traffic collision
and serious injuries.
If a front tire has fault and is to be
replaced, please be sure not to
replace the front tire with the spare tire. For
driving safety, please replace the faulty front
tire with a normal rear tire, and then install
the spare tire to the removed rear tire
position. After adjusting the normal rear
wheel of the vehicle to the front wheel or
replacing the spare tire, the tire pressure
display value on the combination instrument
will not be correct because the tire pressure
monitoring system has not self-learned. To
reflect the actual tire pressure value of the
current tire, please drive the vehicle to
Geely Service to self-learn the tire pressure
monitoring system to ensure driving safety.
Tire Rotation
It is recommended to inspect regularly
whether all tires have wear or damage
signs. Please see “When to Use a New
Tire” in this chapter for details. The tires
shall be transposed after each travel of
Fault during Drive
10,000 km. Periodic tire rotation is aimed to
make the wear of all tires is even. It can
ensure the most similar performance as that
1
of brand new tires. Upon any abnormal
wear, rotate the tires as soon as possible
and check the wheel alignment. Also, check
the tires and wheels for damage. Please
see the sections “When to Use a New 2
Tire" and “Replacement of Tires” in this
not
chapter.
3
4
To do it, be sure to rotate tires correctly as
5
shown in this figure. Do not use compact
spare tire during tire rotation. After tire
rotation, adjust the inflation pressure of
front/rear tires as shown in the tire pressure
label on the vehicle. Please see “Tire
Pressure” in this chapter. 6
Rust or dirt on wheels or wheel
connecting parts will make wheel nuts
loose after a certain period of use. Wheels
may fall off and result in an accident. When
7
replacing wheels, clear the rust or dirt where
the wheels connect with the vehicle. In case
of emergency, clear with cloth or tissue; But
be sure to clean all rust or dirt with scraper
blade or wire brush later if necessary.
8
231
Fault during Drive
Wheel Alignment and Wheel
Balance
To extend the service life of tires and
provide the best overall performance, tires
and wheels have been carefully aligned and
balanced before the vehicle is delivered. It is
unnecessary to conduct wheel alignment
and tire balancing regularly. However, if
abnormal wear of tires has been found or
the vehicle is off-tracking, it is necessary to
inspect wheel alignment. It is necessary to
re-balance tires and wheels if the vehicle
jolts when running on a smooth road
surface. Please contact Geely Service for
maintenance as soon as possible.
Replacement of Tires
It is necessary to replace bent, cracked or
severely rusted or corroded wheels. It is
necessary to replace wheels, hubs and
wheel nuts if wheel nuts often become
loose. It is necessary to replace a tire if it
has air leakage. Please consult Geely
Service if any of the above cases appears.
New wheels shall have the same loading
capacity, diameter, width and eccentricity as
replaced wheels, and the installation
method shall also be the same. If it is
necessary to replace any wheel, wheel nut
or Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS), only use the original spare parts
provided by Geely. This can ensure that the
wheel, wheel nut and Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) match this
vehicle.
It will be very dangerous to use
inappropriate wheels or wheel nuts on
this vehicle. It will affect the braking
232
performance and controllability of the
vehicle, make tires leak and cause the
vehicle to be out of control. It may cause an
accident, resulting in personal injury or
death. Therefore, be sure to replace correct
wheels and wheel nuts.
Using a wrong wheel will also cause
problems on bearing’s service life,
brake cooling, speedometer or odometer
calibration, front headlamp leveling, bumper
height, ground clearance, and the clearance
between tires or tire chains and the vehicle
body & chassis.
Use of old wheel
It will be very dangerous to install old wheel
on this vehicle. Because it's unknown how
the old wheel has been used and how many
mileages it has traveled. It will has fault
suddenly and result in accident. Be sure to
use new OEM wheel in case of replacing
wheel.
Winter Tire
It is recommended to use winter tires if you
often drive the vehicle on roads with ice or
snow. All-weather tires may not provide the
desired friction or the same performance
level as winter tires on snow-covered roads.
Using winter tires is to increase friction force
on a road surface covered with ice or snow.
After using winter tires, the vehicle traction
on dry roads may drop, road noise may
increase and tire tread's service life may be
shortened. Pay attention to changes in
vehicle control and braking.
Please consult Geely Service for details
about the supply and selection of applicable
winter tires. If you choose to use winter tires:

• You shall use tires of the same brand
and the same tread pattern on all four
wheels' positions.
• Only radial tires of the same size, loading
range and rated speed as original tires
can be used.
• If you choose winter tires with lower rated
speed, be sure not to drive at a speed
exceeding the maximum rated speed of
the tires.
Tire Chain
The tire chain is not a device provided
with this vehicle. The following
information is for reference only.
Please decide whether it is necessary to fit
tire chains according to actual road
conditions.
When tire chains are used, try not to fully
load the vehicle. Besides, drive carefully at
a low speed. Otherwise, it is possible to
damage the vehicle and affect its
controllability.
When installing tire chains, it is necessary to
select tire chains corresponding to tire size
of the vehicle, and please install tire chains
strictly in accordance with the instructions of
manufacturer.
233
Fault during Drive
Do not use tire chains on dry roads.
1
Flat Tire
When a tire bursts during driving, the
following phenomena will occur. Please take
actions accordingly:
1. If a front tire bursts, the dragging of the 2
flat tire will cause the vehicle to deviate
towards the side of the burst tire. Please
release the accelerator pedal and hold
the steering wheel tightly. Steer and
keep the vehicle on the original lane, 3
and then press the brake pedal gently to
park the vehicle on a safe road as
possible as you can.
2. Please release the accelerator pedal if a
rear tire bursts. Effect of tire burst on the 4
curve road is similar to side sliding, and
the same measures for side slipping
shall be taken. Turn the steering wheel
to your expected running direction to
maintain the vehicle under control. 5
Vehicle may jolt and there will be noise,
but the steering still can be controlled.
And then step on the brake pedal gently
to park the vehicle on a safe road as
possible as you can.
6
If you find that the tire is leaking slowly,
please follow the steps below:
1. Drive the vehicle slowly to a safe and flat
place to avoid further damage to the
tires and wheels.
7
2. Turn on the hazard warning indicators.
3. Replace vehicle tires.
Replacing tires may be dangerous.
Vehicle may slide off from the jack, tip
over or crush on personnel, resulting in 8
Fault during Drive

casualties. Replace tires at a flat place. To Spare tire

prevent the vehicle from moving, take the
following measures:
• Activate the parking brake.
• Put the transmission shaft lever to park
(P) gear.
• Shut down the engine and do not restart
the engine while the vehicle is being
lifted.
• Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle.
• Before replacing the wheels, you may put
stoppers on the front and rear of other 1. Lock knob
tires. The spare tire is under the floor mat in the
Replacement of Spare Tire trunk.
Park the vehicle on a flat ground that After removing the floor mat, remove the
does not affect traffic and facilitates driver's tool kit attached to the spare tire pit
safe wheel replacement. Before an and turn the lock knob counterclockwise
emergency wheel replacement, turn on the (direction of arrow) to remove the spare tire.
hazard warning indicators and place the The spare tire is a T-type small spare
warning triangle on the road at a proper tire. When in use, the maximum
distance based on road conditions, to avoid speed is 80 km/h. Please drive the vehicle
traffic accidents. to Geely Service as soon as possible to
Taking out the Spare Tire and replace a new tire.
Tool Kit Remove Flat Tire and Mount
Jack and tool kit Spare Tire
The jack and tool kit are placed in the trunk. 1. Carry out safety inspection before
Please use the specific jack equipped operations.
with the vehicle. Do not use other
non-compliant jacks. Otherwise the vehicle
may slip off due to jack quality problems,
resulting in personal injury or death.

234

2. Take out the wheel wrench to put the
wrench on the wheel nut. Then turn
counterclockwise and loosen all the
wheel nuts for about one turn, but do
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
3. For placing the jack head, as shown in
the figure, adjust the jack to the
appropriate height before placing the
jack under the lifting point.
The vehicle is lifted, the vehicle will be
damaged and even may roll over if the
supporting position of the jack is incorrect
when. To avoid personal injury and vehicle
damages, before lifting the vehicle, be sure
to place the jack head at the correct
position.
235
Fault during Drive
It is dangerous to get under a jacked
vehicle. If the vehicle slips off the jack,
you may be seriously injured or even killed.
1
Do not go below the vehicle merely
supported by the jack.
It is dangerous to lift the vehicle and
get under it for maintenance or repair
2
without proper safety equipment and without
training. The jack equipped for the vehicle
can only be used to replace flat tires. If used
for other purposes, you or others may be
seriously injured or even killed when the
3
vehicle slides off the jack.
4. Connect the jack handle.
5. Turn the jack handle clockwise as
shown in the figure. Jack up the vehicle 6
to a sufficient height away from the
ground for the installation of the spare
tire.
6. Remove all wheel bolts.
7. Remove the flat tire. 7
8. Remove rust or dirt on wheel bolts,
mounting surface and spare wheel.
9. Install the spare tire.
10. Reinstall the wheel bolts. Turn each
wheel bolt clockwise using the wheel 8
Fault during Drive
wrench until the wheel is fixed to the
hub.
11. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise
to lower the vehicle. Fully lower the jack.
Do not use oil or grease on bolts;
otherwise, the bolts will become
loose. The wheels may fall off, resulting in a
crash.
12. Tighten the wheel bolts in the order
shown.
If the front tire fails, and a spare tire
needs to be used, please be sure not
to replace the front tire with the spare tire.
For driving safety, please replace the faulty
front tire with a normal rear tire, and then
install the spare tire to the removed rear tire
position.
Store Spare Tire and Tool Kit
Place the spare tire in the trunk with the
inner side facing up, screw in the knob and
tighten it completely. Put the jack and other
tools back into the driver's tool kit, then
place the kit in the trunk and secure it
properly.
236
Replacement of Fuse
Fuse Position and
Identification
By blowing the fuse, it can prevent
overloading of electrical appliances in the
circuit and protect the electrical equipment
of the vehicle. Blown fuse indicates the
circuit the fuse protects has fault and stops
working. If it is doubted that the fuse has
problem, take it out from the fuse box and
check whether the metal wire in fuse is
blown.
A - Fuse is intact
B - Fuse is blown
The fuse box of front engine compartment is
located on the left side of the front engine
compartment, and the interior fuse box is
located under the driver's seat. There are
two types of fuses:
1. Strip fuse - Relatively thin, plug-in type,
rated current 5~25 A.
2. Slow-blow fuse - Square, plug-in type,
rated current 20~60 A.
Color indicates the amperage of the fuse.
This amperage is also marked on the fuse.
Do not try to repair any blown fuse. Do
not substitute any blown fuse with a
 Fault during Drive

fuse of different color or amperage.

Otherwise, the electric system will get
damaged or cause fire due to the overload
1
of wires.

Before replacing or checking the fuse,

turn off the start-and-stop switch and
all electrical equipment, and disconnect the
2
negative battery cable.

Front engine compartment

fuse box
1. Open the front engine compartment
hood.
2. Take out the retaining nails upwards and
take out the upper trim panel 1 of the
front engine compartment fuse box.
All electrical parts and components in
3
vehicle may be damaged by liquid
splash. Be sure to secure the covers of all
electrical parts and components.

3. To check the fuse, release the securing 6

latch of fuse box lid and remove the
fuse box lid.

237
Fault during Drive

Fuse No. Name Ampere Description

EF04 Front wiper motor fuse 30A -

Vehicle dynamic domain main engine 40A -

EF07
fuse
Vehicle dynamic domain main engine 60A -
EF08
fuse

EF16 Fuse of FR headlight cluster 20A -

EF17 Fuse of FL headlight cluster 20A -

EF27 Forward radar fuse 5A If equipped

EF28 Headlight unit fuse 20A -

EF29 Brake switch fuse 5A -

EF35 Headlight unit fuse 20A -

EF41A Chassis component fuse 5A -

238
 Fault during Drive

Fuse No. Name Ampere Description

EF41B
Power fuse for parking distance control 5A If equipped 1
terminal
Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
EF42 5A -
module fuse
Headlight height adjustment control
EF44A 5A -
sensor fuse 2
EF44B Accelerator pedal sensor fuse 5A -

EF51 Horn power fuse 20A -

EF52 Windshield washer motor fuse 25A -

EF55 Front windshield heating fuse 40A If equipped 3

EF56 Front windshield heating fuse 40A If equipped

EF60 Engine cooling water pump fuse 60A -

EF61 Engine cooling fan fuse 60A Type 1

4
EF61 Engine cooling fan fuse 80A Type 2

EF63 Starter motor fuse 30A -

EF65 Engine sensor fuse 10A -

EF66 ECM power fuse 20A - 5

EF67 Engine solenoid valve fuse 15A If equipped

EF69 Engine control module fuse 5A -

EF70 Transmission control module fuse 15A 8AT

EF71A Ignition coil fuse 15A - 6

EF71B Oxygen sensor fuse 15A -

Transmission actuator control module

EF74 30A -
fuse

EF76
Transmission actuator control module
30A - 7
fuse

Fuses with fuse numbers beginning with SF mean spare fuses.

239
Fault during Drive

Indoor Fuse Box

Fuse box in auxiliary box is located under

the driver's seat. The fuse can be viewed by
uncovering the bottom plate pad under the
driver's seat.

240
 Fault during Drive

Fuse No. Name Ampere Description

CF01 Driver's door module fuse 30A -

4
CF02 Front passenger's door module fuse 30A -

CF03 Temperature control module fuse 10A -

CF04 Taillight fuse 5A If equipped

Fuse of center console switch module, 5

CF05 center console display and passenger's 7.5A -
side display

Fuse of driver information module, driver

CF06 5A -
information screen (DIS)

CF08
Fuse of steering wheel module and BLE
5A -
6
NFC communication module
Fuse of gear selector module, drive
CF10 mode switch module and center console 5A -
switch module
Fuse of telematics and interconnection 7
CF11 antenna module, rainwater and light 5A -
sensor, and radio frequency antenna

CF12 Vehicle gateway module fuse 5A -

CF13 Infotainment mainframe fuse 15A -

8
CF14 Blower module fuse 40A -

241
Fault during Drive

Fuse No. Name Ampere Description

CF15 Passenger's seat connector fuse 30A If equipped

CF16 Driver's seat connector fuse 30A If equipped

CF17 Steering wheel module fuse 15A If equipped

CF26 OBD II diagnostic socket fuse 10A -

CF27 PDC module fuse 5A Type 1

CF27 PDC module fuse 10A Type 2

CF28 Relay coil fuse 5A -

Fuse of left and right obstacle detection

CF32 5A If equipped
control modules
CF33 RL door module fuse 25A -

CF35 Active safety domain controller fuse 5A If equipped

CF36 RR door module fuse 25A -

CF39 Audio control module fuse 20A If equipped

CF43 Power tail gate module fuse 30A If equipped

CF44 Rear seat module fuse 30A If equipped

CF46 Central electronic module fuse 40A -

CF48 +side coil filter fuse 30A -

CF49 Central electronic module fuse 40A -

CF52 SRS module fuse 5A -

CF54 Fuel pump module fuse 20A -

CF56 Rear wiper motor fuse 15A -

CF59 Differential electronic module fuse 15A If equipped

CF63 Center console 12V socket fuse 15A -

CF64 Trunk 12V socket fuse 15A If equipped

CF65 Rear-row USB fuse 10A If equipped

CF68 USB/wireless charging fuse 10A -

CF69 IP component fuse 7.5A -

CF70 Rear console switch module fuse 5A If equipped

242
 Fault during Drive

Fuse No. Name Ampere Description

CF71 Sunroof module fuse 20A If equipped 1

CF72 HUD module fuse 5A If equipped

CF73 Front camera fuse 5A If equipped

243
Fault during Drive

Inspection or Replacement of
Fuse
1. Turn off the ignition switch and all
electrical appliance. Disconnect the
negative cable of battery.

2. Clamp the fuse head with one end of the

fuse removing plier, and pull to remove
the fuse. Check whether the metal wire
is blown, to identify a blown fuse.
3. Replace the blown fuse with a new fuse
of the same amperage. If the fuse blows
immediately after replacement, contact
Geely Service for maintenance as soon
as possible.

244
 Fault during Drive

Replacement of Bulb
Bulb Specifications 1
Replacing light bulbs usually requires the removal of certain vehicle parts, so professional
skills are required to perform the related operations. It is recommended that you go to Geely
Service to replace the light bulb.

Component name Bulb Name Bulb Model Power

2
High beam lamp LED —

Low beam lamp LED —

Front combination lamp Daytime running lamp LED —

Front turn signal lamp LED —

3
Front position lamp LED —

Brake lamp LED —

Rear turn signal lamp LED —

Tail lamp
Rear position lamp LED — 4
Rear reverse lamps LED —

Side turn signal lamp Side turn signal lamp LED —

Rear fog lamp Rear fog lamp LED —

5
High mount brake lamp High mount brake lamp LED —

License plate lamp License plate lamp LED —

Front reading lamp Reading lamp LED —

Rear reading lamp Reading lamp LED —

6
Lower storage box lamp of Lower storage box lamp
LED —
console moulding* of console moulding

Ambient lamp* Ambient lamp LED —

Trunk lamp Trunk lamp LED —

7
Glove box lamp Glove box lamp LED —

Make-up mirror lamp Make-up mirror lamp LED —

245
Fault during Drive

Emergency Handling For the filling method, see "How to Add

Coolant to the Coolant Expansion Tank"
Vehicle Overheating
in Chapter 7 “Repair and
Vehicle overheating actually means that the
Maintenance".
engine coolant temperature is too high. If
6. When the engine coolant temperature
the high coolant temperature warning
falls to a normal level, recheck the
indicator on the combination instrument
coolant level in the expansion tank
flashes, it indicates that the engine is
again. If necessary, add to the scale
overheated, and the following procedures
between MAX and MIN. Serious loss of
should be followed:
coolant indicates that there is leakage in
1. Turn off the air conditioner, drive the
the system. Please contact Geely
vehicle safely off the road to a safe and
Service for maintenance as soon as
shady place, then stop and turn on the
possible.
hazard warning lamp, engage Park (P),
7. After the vehicle is parked in summer,
and activate the electronic parking
the cooling fan usually operates
brake (EPB).
automatically even for a long time. This
2. If coolant or steam is sprayed from the
is normal. The cooling fan will
expansion tank, shut down the engine.
automatically turn off after the engine
Open the front engine compartment
temperature drops to a temperature at
hood after the steam subsides. If there
which the cooling fan does not need to
is no coolant or steam ejected, keep the
work.
engine running and confirm that the
cooling fan is working. If not, stall the When the engine is in a warm state,
engine and contact Geely Service for the pressure in the cooling system is
maintenance as soon as possible. extremely high, and the coolant reservoir
3. Visually check whether there is obvious cap can be opened only after the engine has
coolant leakage in the radiator, hose or been fully cooled. Do not touch the cooling
under the vehicle. However, it is normal fan when the engine is stopped to avoid
if there are water drops from the personal injury.
working air conditioner.
In order to avoid personal injury, the
4. If the engine coolant leaks, stall the front engine compartment hood shall
engine immediately, and contact Geely
remain closed till there is no steam. The
Service for maintenance as soon as
outflow of steam or coolant indicates high
possible.
pressure.
5. If there is no obvious water leakage, When the engine is running, keep hands
check the coolant expansion tank. If the and clothes away from the cooling fan and
coolant level is lower than the MIN line the engine drive belt. When the engine and
of the expansion tank, please add the radiator are at a high temperature, the
coolant of the correct brand reasonably.

246

expansion tank cover must not be removed.
High-temperature steam and liquid ejection
can cause serious injury.
Vehicle Stalls
1. Slowly reduce the speed of the vehicle,
keep driving in a straight line, carefully
drive off the lane and park in a safe
place on the side of the road.
2. Turn on the hazard warning indicators.
3. Restart the engine.
If the engine cannot be started, please refer
to the section of "Vehicle Cannot Start" in
"Starting and Driving".
If the engine does not run, the brakes
and steering gear assisting devices
do not work. At this time, steering and
braking will be more difficult than usual.
When the Vehicle Is Stuck
When the vehicle is stuck in snow, mud pit,
sands or other soft roads, please get out as
per the following steps:
1. Turn the steering wheel left/right to grind
the area around the front wheels.
2. The vehicle goes forward/backward
repeatedly. Try not to idle wheels as
much as possible. Gently apply the
accelerator pedal.
3. If you can't get it out after several
attempts, the vehicle needs to be
towed.
Before getting out of the trapping, be
sure to check whether there are
people or obstacles around the vehicle to
avoid injury.
If you want to crank the vehicle, in
order to prevent damage to the
247
Fault during Drive
transmission and other components, the
following precautions must be observed:
1
• Do not step on the accelerator pedal
before the shaft lever is engaged in the
drive or reverse gear.
• Do not idle the engine and wheels. In
order to prevent the front engine 2
compartment from catching fire and
puncture, causing personal injury or
death.
• If the vehicle is still trapped after cranking
for a period of time, it is necessary to use 3
methods such as towing.
Road Accident Emergency
Response System*
Through the built-in controller of vehicle, the
system monitors the vehicle's collision
4
emergency and the manual calling
operation, and sends the location of the
vehicle collision, the vehicle traveling
direction, vehicle data (VIN code, vehicle
type, power type), etc., to the control center
5
via network, to obtain rescue service
provided by PSAP through the control
center.
Triggering Conditions of the
Road Accident Emergency 6
Response System
1. The controller monitors the vehicle's
collision emergency.
2. Long press the SOS switch
After the system is activated, the information 7
is sent to the control center via voice
channel, and meanwhile an emergency call
is dialed. The control center confirms the
accident information and requests rescue
service from PSAP. After the relevant 8
Fault during Drive

information is confirmed, the control center

hangs up the call.

1. SOS switch
2. SOS indicator
When starting the emergency call system,
open the transparent flap and press the
SOS switch on the sunroof control panel,
and the SOS indicator will indicate the
system status and call status accordingly.
When the system works normally, the voice
call can be completed.

248

Maintenance and Service
Regular Maintenance
"Warranty and Maintenance Manual"
is an important part of this manual.
Maintenance interval, inspection, repair and
recommended oils, liquids and lubricants
specified in this manual are essential to
keep the vehicle in a good state. Any
damage arising from failure to comply with
regular maintenance will not be covered by
the vehicle warranty.
Proper vehicle maintenance is conducive to
the vehicle state as well as the environment.
All recommended maintenance items are
very important. Improper vehicle
maintenance will even affect air quality.
Improper liquid level or incorrect tire
pressure will increase the emission of the
vehicle. To protect the environment and
keep the vehicle in a good state, it is
necessary to maintain the vehicle properly.
If the vehicle is used under the
following severe conditions, it is
recommended to appropriately increase the
maintenance items, maintenance times, or
shorten the regular maintenance interval:
• The vehicle repeatedly runs for short
distances (less than 10 kilometers) when
the engine is in cold condition (after
stopping for more than 1 hour).
• Long-term use of vehicles in hot areas
with temperatures above 30° C, or long-
term use of vehicles in cold areas with
temperatures below -15°C.
• Excessive idling or long-term low-speed
long-distance driving.
• Continuous high-speed long-time driving.
249
Repair and maintenance
• Often stop and go on urban roads with
poor traffic.
1
• Often drive on sandy or dusty roads.
• Often drive on rugged, muddy or snow-
melt roads.
• It is often used as special vehicles such
as taxi and police car.
• Fuel that does not meet the quality
2
requirements was filled.
If the vehicle is used under severe
conditions for a long time, it is
recommended to appropriately increase the
maintenance frequency or shorten the 3
maintenance interval.
If the vehicle often travels repeatedly
for short distances (less than 10
kilometers) or often travels for short periods
4
of time under cold and severe conditions
(-15° C), drive it in the following conditions
once to extend the service life of the engine
oil.
• Urban conditions: the average speed is 5
30-40 km/h. The driving time is greater
than 50 minutes.
• Highway conditions: the average speed
is greater than 80 km/h, and the driving
distance is more than 30km. 6
In high-altitude areas (>4000 meters)
with the ambient temperature below
-20°C, due to lack of oxygen at the plateau
and the engine oil is viscous at low
temperatures, after a long period of parking, 7
there may be a risk of difficulty in starting
the cold engine. It is recommended that try
to let the vehicle stay in a warm and
sheltered place when staying overnight in
such an environment, and it is 8
Repair and maintenance

recommended to park in the garage when necessary tools and devices can he carry
conditions permit. out the maintenance operations on his own.
Otherwise, go to Geely Service for
In the extremely cold environment of
maintenance.
the plain area, -35℃ is the cold start
Please use correct oils and fluids when
temperature limit that the vehicle can
maintaining the vehicle. See
support. Because the engine oil viscosity is
"Recommended Fluids and Capacity" in
very high in such an environment, the
"Technical Data". Before driving the vehicle,
engine is subject to a large resistance force,
the driver shall check all relevant parts and
and it may be successfully started after
components and complete all necessary
multiple attempts. It will fail when starting
repairs. It is recommended to use parts and
below -35℃. In extremely cold areas (-30°C
components originally provided by Geely
and below), it is recommended to park the
Service.
vehicle in the garage to ensure normal use.
Maintenance Log
Use Maintenance Schedule Please see the Warranty and Maintenance
Manual for details. After each maintenance,
Ways of using the vehicle vary so that
be sure to ask Geely Service to sign and
maintenance requirements are different.
seal on the page of the maintenance log.
Drivers might need to increase the
frequency of inspection and replacement. Exhaust Emission Control
Please consult Geely Service if the driver
This vehicle is equipped with exhaust
has any doubts on how to keep the vehicle
emission and evaporation control devices
in a good state. This maintenance schedule
that comply with laws and regulations.
applies to the following vehicles:
Incorrect engine settings may have a
• Vehicles carrying passengers and goods negative impact on exhaust emissions,
within the specified load range. engine performance and fuel consumption,
• Vehicles running on appropriate roads and can also generate high temperatures,
within the speed limit specified in which can lead to damage to the catalytic
regulations. converter and the engine.
• Vehicles using the recommended fuel.
No one is allowed to replace, modify
Refer to the "Fuel System" section in
and adjust the three-way catalytic
"Starting and Driving".
converter without authorization. Nor can any
Vehicle maintenance is complicated
adjustments be made to the settings of the
and may be dangerous. If some
engine, otherwise, it will affect the vehicle's
maintenance operations are performed on
emission indicators.
one's own, the driver may get seriously
injured. Only when the driver has sufficient
technical experience in maintenance and

250
 Repair and maintenance

Maintenance and Service by the Eight Rules for Preventing

Owner Accidental Fire in Vehicles
1
Please go to Geely service for
maintenance immediately in case of
an obvious or sudden drop of liquid level, or
uneven tire wear.
In addition to the above-mentioned
2
maintenance, the driver shall also do some
simple inspections frequently. Here are
some suggestions for the owner.
Daily inspection
• The functions of lamps, horns, wipers,
3
washer and warning indicators.
• The functions of seat belts and brakes. 1. Do not store flammable items in the
• Check the bottom of the vehicle for liquid vehicle. Combustible and explosive
marks that indicates leakage. items (lighter, etc.) may expand or
• Inspect the appearance of tires. explode due to the high temperature of
Weekly inspection the environment and thus cause a fire. 4
• Engine oil level. 2. When parking, prevent the exhaust gas
• Coolant level. from directly contacting leaves or
branches. If the exhaust pipe is stuck
• Brake fluid level.
with these substances, it may cause a
• Windshield washer fluid level.
fire. 5
• Tire pressure and state.
3. Do not install decorative lamps other
• Operations of A/C system.
than the original configuration. When
If the vehicle often travels at high
using electrical appliances beyond the
speed for a long time, the engine oil
rated capacity, the harness may be
should be checked frequently.
short-circuited and cause fire due to 6
excessive load.

251
Repair and maintenance

Toxic Liquid
Liquids used on the vehicle are toxic and
shall not be swallowed or contact with the
unhealed wound.
Toxic liquids include: acid in the battery,
antifreeze, brake fluid, gasoline (methanol),
engine oil and windshield washer fluid, etc.
For driver's safety, please read and observe
all instructions printed on labels and
containers.

4. When retrofitting multimedia and adding Used Engine Oil

wires, the heat generated between Long-time contact with engine oil may cause
wires of different capacities may cause serious skin diseases. Wash thoroughly
a fire. after accidental contact, and seek medical
5. Do not use bulbs other than those attention if necessary. The used engine oil
specified. When using a bulb whose shall not be discharged at will, so as not to
capacity exceeds the rated capacity, the pollute the environment.
wire load may be excessive and cause
a fire.
6. It is forbidden to press the accelerator
pedal for a long time when idling.
Otherwise, the muffler will overheat and
flammable materials on the ground will
catch a fire.
7. The front engine compartment is
contaminated with oil (regular
inspections are required). Oil residues
and paper or leaves sticking to the
machine can also cause fires, so the
front engine compartment should be
kept clean.
8. After smoking, make sure that the
cigarette butt is completely
extinguished. If the cigarette is not
completely extinguished, it may cause a
fire.

252

Front Engine Compartment
Front Engine Compartment
Hood
Open the Front Engine
Compartment Hood
1. Pull the release handle of the front
engine compartment hood in the
vehicle. It is located under the
instrument panel on the driver's side of
the vehicle. Pull twice, the front engine
compartment hood can be opened.
2. Slightly lift the front engine compartment
hood, under the action of the air springs
on the left and right sides, the front
engine compartment hood will be
opened to the maximum position.
253
Repair and maintenance
1
2
Close the Front Engine
Compartment Hood 3
Before closing the front engine
compartment hood, check whether
any tool, rag, etc., are left in the front engine
compartment and ensure that all filler caps
4
are properly closed.
Close the front engine compartment hood
down and hear a click to indicate that the
front engine compartment hood is locked.
After closing the front engine compartment
5
hood, verify that it is fully locked by trying to
lift the front edge of it.
If it is not completely locked, release and
open the front engine compartment hood
again, and then close the front engine
compartment hood. Do not press directly to
6
close the front engine compartment hood.
Do not drive the vehicle with the hood
not properly closed. The hood may
suddenly open and block the driver's sight, 7
resulting in personal injury or death and
property loss.
Repair and maintenance

Front Engine Compartment

1. Coolant expansion tank 5. Front engine compartment fuse box

2. Engine fuel tank cap 6. Air filter
3. Brake fluid reservoir 7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
4. Battery

For any type of engine, any parts in the front engine compartment should meet specific
temperature requirements and are not allowed to be replaced at will. Otherwise, the
parts may have insufficient temperature resistance due to changes in the temperature field or
different materials, resulting in thermal damage.

254

Engine Oil and Filter Element
Check and Add Engine Oil
The engine oil and oil filter must be
inspected and replaced regularly in
accordance with the "Warranty and
Maintenance Manual", otherwise, it will
accelerate bearing wear and even cause
engine performance deterioration.
It is best to check the engine oil level at
each refueling To obtain accurate readings,
check before the engine oil has cooled
down and the vehicle should be on flat
ground. The engine is equipped with a
temperature and pressure sensor, and the
oil level can be read by the Geely Auto
diagnostic instrument.
After starting the vehicle, you can check
whether the oil level is normal through the
instrument pack.
1. Start the vehicle, if the low oil pressure
warning lamp lights up, this may
indicate that the vehicle's engine oil is
too low.
Do not drive the vehicle with the low
oil pressure warning lamp on,
otherwise the engine will be damaged.
2. Stall the engine, unscrew the engine oil
filler cap, and add engine oil.
3. Wait for 10 minutes to start the vehicle
again and check the oil level through the
instrument pack settings. If the oil
pressure is low, add an appropriate
amount of engine oil until it is suitable.
4. Finally, close the engine oil filler cap. If
enough engine oil is added and the low
oil pressure warning lamp is still on,
another system may be faulty.
255
Repair and maintenance
The new engine will consume more oil
during the breaking-in period. This is
1
normal. Please maintain the engine in
accordance with the "Warranty and
Maintenance Manual".
Please use the engine oil recommended by
the Company, see "Recommended Fluid
and Volume" in "Technical Data". 2
Please dispose of used engine oil as
per relevant environmental protection
laws.
Engine Air Filter/Filter Element 3
The engine air filter is located in the front
engine compartment on the driver's side of
the vehicle.
When to check the engine air filter
element 4
Please refer to the "Warranty and
Maintenance Manual" for the interval of
checking the engine air filter element.
To check the air filter element, remove the
element from the vehicle and gently shake 5
the element to shake off the dust and dirt. If
there is still agglomerated dirt on the filter
element, replace the filter element with a
new one. The air filter should be cleaned
regularly in accordance with the 6
maintenance regulations. The air-tightness
of the intake system and exhaust system
should be checked frequently during use.
7
8
Repair and maintenance
Replace the engine air filter/filter
element
1. Loosen the screws around the housing
of the air filter.
2. Open the upper housing by hand and
take out the air filter element.
3. Check or replace the air filter element.
4. Put in the filter element, insert it back
into the upper shell and adjust the
position.
5. Tighten the screws to ensure that the
cover is locked in place.
The air filter can purify the air to
prevent dust from entering the engine
and avoid open flames when the engine is
backfiring. If running the engine leads to
backfire, personal injury or death or property
damage may be caused.
256
Cooling System
Cooling System Introduction
The function of the cooling system is to
ensure that the engine works at the optimal
temperature under all working conditions.
For the replacement schedule of coolant,
see the relevant content in the Warranty and
Maintenance Manual.
Even when the engine is not started,
the cooling fan under the front engine
compartment hood may run and cause
injury. Therefore, all parts of the body,
clothing and tools shall be kept away from
the cooling fan under the hood.
Do not touch the radiator, radiator
hose and other parts and components
of the engine. Otherwise, you may get
burned. Do not run the engine with coolant
leaks; otherwise, the engine may catch fire,
resulting in personal injury or property
damage.
Please dispose of used antifreeze as
per relevant environmental protection
laws.
Check the Coolant

Be sure to park the vehicle on flat ground
when checking the coolant level. Check and
ensure that the coolant level in the
expansion tank is between MAX and MIN
scales. If the coolant in the expansion tank
is boiling, do not perform any operation until
it cools down. If the coolant level is below
the MIN line, refill the coolant into the
expansion tank according to specified
procedures.
Refill Coolant
Before opening the pressure cap of coolant
expansion tank, ensure the cooling system
(including the pressure cap of coolant
expansion tank and the upper hose of
radiator) has completely cooled down.
1. Turn the pressure cap counterclockwise
slowly. If you hear any “fizz” sound,
don't open it until the “fizz” sound
disappears. The sound indicates there
is still pressure inside.
2. Continue turning the pressure cap and
take it down.
Under the pressure of the steam and
boiling liquid in the high-temperature
cooling system, once the coolant expansion
tank cap is unscrewed, the boiling liquid will
257
Repair and maintenance
splash out and cause burns. Do not
unscrew the pressure cover while the
cooling system, including the pressure cap
1
of coolant expansion tank, is still hot. If you
need to open the coolant expansion tank
cap, you must wait for both the cooling
system and the coolant expansion tank cap
to cool. 2
3. Fill the coolant slowly until the coolant
volume in the coolant expansion tank
reaches about 80% and the liquid level
no longer drops. 3
The coolant contains glycol. If the
coolant is splashed on hot parts, the
glycol will burn. Therefore, do not spill
coolant on hot components.
4
Please refill the ethylene glycol-type
coolants certified by Geely. Damage
or failure caused by the use of inferior
coolant or non-compliant coolant mixture is
not covered by Geely's warranty.
Do not mix and use coolants of different
5
brands and specifications. Coolants of
different brands contain different types of
preservatives, antirust agents, etc.
Chemical reaction may occur if they are
mixed, resulting in deposition, scaling and 6
corrosion etc., and affecting the service life
of vehicle.
4. With the coolant expansion tank cap
open, start the engine and keep it 7
running until the upper radiator hose
begins to heat up. Watch out for cooling
fans. At this time, the coolant level in the
coolant expansion tank may drop. If the
coolant level is below the MIN line, add 8
a proper amount of coolant to the
Repair and maintenance

coolant expansion tank until the coolant If the coolant expansion tank cap is
level stabilizes and reaches the position not tightened, it may cause the loss of
between the MAX and MIN lines of the coolant and damage the engine. Ensure that
coolant expansion tank. the coolant expansion tank cap is properly
fastened. If the coolant level drops obviously
Cooling fans under the front engine
in a short time, it indicates there may be a
compartment hood can operate and
leakage in the cooling system. Please
cause injury, even when the engine is not
contact Geely Service for maintenance as
running. If the coolant level remains
soon as possible.
constant and there is no coolant outflow
from the vent of the coolant expansion tank,
the engine needs to be restarted and the
radiator water outlet hose needs to be
squeezed to empty forcibly.

5. Observe the drop of the coolant in the

coolant expansion tank and replenish
the coolant in time. The coolant level in
the coolant expansion tank should be
kept between the MAX line and the MIN
line.
6. Observe the vent of coolant expansion
tank. When the coolant continuously
flows out of the vent and the coolant
level in expansion tank no longer drops,
tighten the cover of expansion tank.
Then the coolant refilling is completed.

258

Brake System
Overview
A vehicle with good braking performance
shall be decelerated or stopped in time in a
very short time and distance when the brake
is applied at any driving speed. Excellent
braking efficiency plays an important role in
ensuring driving safety.
The worn brake pad cannot perform
effective braking to the vehicle. The wear of
the brake pad mainly depends on the use
conditions of the vehicle and driving mode.
If you often drive in urban area or for short
trips, it is recommended to increase the
frequency of brake pad thickness check as
per the maintenance schedule specified in
the Warranty and Maintenance Manual.
Replace it as per the maintenance schedule
specified in the Warranty and Maintenance
Manual. If the brake fluid is in the braking
system for too long, air resistance may
occur in the system pipelines when braking,
and greatly worsen the braking effect.
Do not apply emergency braking on
narrow roads, or roads with rain,
snow, ice or mud.
Before going down a long slope, engage a
low gear, and make use of the anti-drag
force of the engine to control the speed of
the vehicle.
After the vehicle runs through the water,
slightly apply the brake pedal several times
to clear the water on the brake pad, so as to
restore the bake performance.
Be sure to replace the brake pad at
Geely Service to ensure optimal
braking performance between brake pad
and brake disc, and minimized wear.
259
Repair and maintenance
During the first 200~300 km, new brake pad
does not have the best friction property.
1
Thus, running-in is necessary. During this
stage, braking performance will decrease
slightly. It can be supplemented by
increasing the force applied on brake pedal.
Newly replaced brake pad should also
2
perform running-in as per above
requirements.
When driving with new tires and new brake
pads, do not tailgate the vehicle ahead too
close or brake urgently to avoid traffic
accidents. 3
Travel of Brake Pedal
If the brake pedal cannot be returned to the
normal height or the brake pedal travel
increases too fast, the brake system may
4
need repair, please contact the Geely
Service as soon as possible.
Braking Squealing
When the brake pedal is depressed, the
front and rear brakes work simultaneously. If 5
occasional squealing occurs at braking, it is
normal due to environmental factors such as
wet or cold road surface, rain and snow. The
probability is high especially in rain and
snow, low temperature, low speed and 6
when the braking is about to stop. It is
normal but unavoidable. The reliability of
brake system will not be affected.
Brake Creeping Sound When
Starting 7
It is normal if there is the friction between
the brake pads and the brake disc when the
brake is released. Before an automatic
transmission vehicle starts, the shift lever is 8
in the D gear, and there is power take-off to
Repair and maintenance
pull the vehicle to start and move forward. At
this point, the vehicle remains stationary
under the action of the brake, then the
braking torque is greater than the starting
torque. When the brake is released, the
energy stored in the brake is released,
triggering a creaking sound at the front
wheels. If the vehicle is washed and the
brake disc is wet, the sound will be more
obvious.
Steering Noise When Applying
Brake Pedal in Place
When the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel and vehicle wheels will turn
as well. If the brake pedal is depressed, the
wheels will be stopped from turning. Under
the simultaneous effect of the steering force
and braking force, energy is accumulated
which makes the clamped brake disc creep
to release the accumulated energy. That's
why the vehicle creaks. It is normal and
does not affect the performance and the use
of vehicle.
Brake Disc Heats up after Use
Braking is realized by friction between brake
disc and brake pad, a process of converting
kinetic energy into heat energy. Thus, it is
normal for the brake disc to generate heat
after braking.
Do not touch the brake disc by hand
after parking, to avoid burns.
Brake fluid
Refill DOT4 brake fluid into brake fluid
reservoir.
260
There are two reasons for brake fluid level
dropping in brake fluid reservoir:
1. The brake fluid level will drop due to
normal wear of brake pad. The brake
fluid level will recover after a new brake
pad is installed.
2. Brake fluid leakage in the brake
hydraulic system can also cause the
brake fluid level to drop. Then it is
necessary to repair the brake hydraulic
system because the brake fluid leakage
will result in the malfunction of brake.
If excessive brake fluid is added, it
may splash on the high-temperature
parts of front compartment. If the
temperature is high enough, a fire may
occur and cause personal injury and
property loss. Therefore, the brake fluid can
only be added to the MAX line after the
repair of brake hydraulic system.
Refilling brake fluid cannot solve
leakage problem. If the brake fluid is
refilled when the brake pad is worn, the
brake fluid in the reservoir will be excessive
after a new brake pad is installed. Add or
reduce brake fluid as required only after
finishing the repair of brake hydraulic

system. The brake system status indicator
lights up when the brake fluid drops to a low
level.
Do not splash the brake fluid on the
paint of the vehicle. If any, clean it
immediately.
The brake fluid level must remain between
MAX and MIN marks.
Using a wrong type of brake fluid will
severely damage the parts and
components of hydraulic brake system.
261
Repair and maintenance
Operation of steering
system
1
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
The performance of steering system is one
of the main performances of a vehicle. The
performance of the steering system directly
affects the handling stability of the vehicle. It 2
plays an important role in the safe running of
the vehicle, reducing traffic accidents and
protecting the driver.
EPS is electricity-powered. In the case of
undervoltage, vehicle speed failure or 3
specific internal fault, it enters the power
protection mode. At this time, the steering is
harder (there is still power assist), and the
electric power steering system (EPS) status
indicator lamp lights up and grows yellow. 4
Prompt on the instrument pack display:
Steering assist/protection/performance
temporarily reduced. In special cases, the
thermal protection function will be
disactivated . When the steering system
5
cannot safely provide power assist due to
an internal fault judgment, it enters the
power assist off mode. At this time, the
power assist completely disappears, and
the electric power steering system (EPS)
6
status indicator lights up and turns red.
Prompt on the instrument pack display: the
steering assist system abnormal, please
stop safely.
If the driver feels it difficult to steer, contact
Geely Service for maintenance as soon as
7
possible.
Repair and maintenance

Front combination lamp Battery

Fogging On Front Headlamps
The front headlamps feature the ventilation
design to adapt to the normal pressure
change in lamps. Thus, fogging is a natural
phenomenon of this design. When vapor
enters the front combination lamps through
the vent, it may cause fogging if the ambient
temperature is too low. In case of fogging, a
thin layer of fog will form inside the front
combination lamp lenses. Under normal
operating conditions, fog in lamps will
dissipate after the vehicle runs or the lamps
are turned on for a while.
The following conditions are acceptable:
• A thin layer of fog exists (no stripped
water stains, drips or droplets).
• The coverage of fog on the front
combination lamp lens is less than 50%.
The following conditions are unacceptable
(usually caused by water leakage of front
combination lamp):
• Water puddle in the front headlamps.
• A large amount of water drops, drips or
stripped water stains in front combination
lamp lens.
If above unacceptable situation exists,
contact Geely Service for maintenance as
soon as possible.
Maintenance of Battery
This vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. Please see the
section “Front Engine Compartment” in
this chapter for the position of the battery.
The binding posts, terminals and
accessories of the battery contain
lead and lead compounds that may affect
health. After contacting them, please
neutralize with soap and rinse thoroughly
with water.
To extend the service life of the battery and
ensure the normal operation of the electric
system, the following suggestions are given:
• Avoid overcharge or long-term power
loss of the battery.
• In case of undervoltage of the battery,
charge it in time via a exterior power
supply.
• Keep the battery away from the heat
source and open fire. When it is charged
or used, ensure the ventilation to prevent
burning and hurting people.
• To prevent the battery from discharging
at a high current for a long time, the
starting time for each use should not be
more than 5 seconds, and the interval for
two consecutive starts should be 10~15
seconds.
• The battery shall be installed securely in
the vehicle. And reduce vibration.
• Inspect whether the clamps of the battery
terminals are secure and well contacted,
so as to avoid sparks which may explode
the low-voltage battery. Be sure to
scrape off the oxides and sulfates

262

generated by the battery clamp and
apply vaseline.
When driving in a cold region, prevent the
battery from full discharge to avoid
electrolyte frozen.
Inspection of Battery
This vehicle features a maintenance-free
battery. Thus, it is unnecessary to refill the
low-voltage battery electrolyte solution.
Please regularly go to Geely Service to
check the status of the battery.
Replacement of Battery
When replacing the battery, be sure to use
the battery of the same model and
specifications. Please contact Geely Service
for the removing, replacement and
installation of the battery.
After the battery is replaced, hand
over the used battery to Geely service
for disposal, or deliver it to the collection
depot meeting relevant environmental
protection laws. There is a highly corrosive
and toxic substance in the battery. Please
keep the right side up during transportation
and storage.
The acid of battery may cause burns,
and the gases produced are
263
Repair and maintenance
explosive. Personal injury or death may
occur. For details, see the section "Jump
Starting" in "Fault during Drive".
1
Long-term Parking
There will be weak current consumption in
the electric system when the vehicle is
parked, and the electricity of the battery will 2
be drained when the vehicle is parked for a
long term. Therefore, if the vehicle is to be
stored for a long term, the black negative (-)
wire should be removed from the battery to
prevent the power battery from discharging. 3
The vehicle should be stored in a cool,
ventilated, clean and dry environment. If the
vehicle is parked in a closed and humid
environment for long, the rusting and aging
of vehicle components will be accelerated.
4
Please carry out regular maintenance on the
vehicle in time according to the
recommendations and requirements in the
Warranty and Maintenance Manual.
5
6
7
8
Repair and maintenance
Washer Fluid and Wiper
Blade
Washer Fluid
Washer Fluid Selection
Be sure to read the instructions provided by
the manufacturer before using windshield
washer fluid. If the air temperature where
you are driving may drop below 0° C, it is
necessary to use washer fluid with sufficient
anti-freezing capacity.
The freezing point temperature of the
washer liquid should be 10° C + lower
than the local minimum temperature.
Replenish Washer Fluid
Open the filler cap with a washer sign
printed on it. Add washer liquid to the
specified mark. Please see the section
“Front Compartment” in this chapter for
the location of fluid reservoir.
If concentrated washer fluid is used,
please dilute it with water according to
the specification of manufacturer.
Do not add water to the ready-to-use
washer fluid. Washer fluid may be frozen if
water is added in, and washer fluid reservoir
264
and other components of washer system
may be damaged.
In very cold weather, the washer fluid can
only be filled to the level of three quarters of
the washer fluid reservoir capacity at most.
This offers expansion space when washer
fluid is frozen so that the washer fluid
reservoir will not be damaged after washer
fluid is frozen and expands.
Engine coolant must not be used in the
windshield washer. Otherwise, the
windshield washer system and the paint of
the vehicle will be damaged.
Wiper Blades
Grease, silicon and petroleum
products will weaken the wiping effect
of wiper blades. Wash wiper blades with
warm soap water and regularly check their
state.
Wash and clean the windshield frequently,
and avoid using wiper blades to wipe the
sands on the windshield, or the wiping effect
and service life of wiper blades will be
affected.
Replace the wiper blades if the rubber is
found hardened or cracked, or if the wipers
leave scratches on the windshield or cannot
wipe a certain area.
Clean the windshield regularly with
approved windshield washer fluid, and
ensure that the windshield is thoroughly
cleaned before replacing wiper blades.
Use wiper blades of the same specification
as the original wiper blades.
If the wiper or windshield is covered by ice
or snow or is frozen, clear the ice and snow
on the wiper and windshield before using
the wiper, to avoid damaging the wiper.

Do not use the wipers when the windshield
is dry or there are hard objects on the
surface. Otherwise, it may damage the
wiper blades and windshield.
Front Wiper Service Position
When the start and stop button is not in
Mode 0 and the vehicle is stationary with
wiper combination switch at "O" position, on
the multimedia display, click in turn: Vehicle
Settings → Quick Control → Wiper → Front
Wiper Maintenance Position. Enable/disable
the front wiper maintenance position
function in this interface. After the function is
enabled, the wiper automatically moves to
the maintenance position.
The front wiper will return to its
original position when the front wiper/
front windshield is washed or the rain
sensor is activated.
265
Repair and maintenance
Replacement of Front Windshield
Wiper Blades
1
3
1. Front windshield wiper blade
2. Wiper arms
3. Wiper blade lock button
Check the windshield wiper blades for wear
4
or rupture. To replace the front windshield
wiper blade:
1. Activate the front wiper service position.
2. Pull the windshield wiper blade away
from the windshield.
5
While the windshield wiper blade is
erected, do not open the front
compartment hood. Otherwise, the hood
may collide with the windshield wiper blade
and damage the wiper blade or the hood. 6
Any damages caused thereof will not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Repair and maintenance

Replacement of Rear Windshield

Wiper Blade

3. Pull the windshield wiper blade in the

direction of arrow to release it from the
wiper arm while pressing the wiper
Check the rear windshield wiper blades for
blade lock button.
wear or rupture. To replace the rear
windshield wiper blade:
1. Pull the rear windshield wiper blade
away from the rear windshield.
2. Rotate the wiper blade along the arrow
direction and take it down directly.
3. Install wiper blade in a reversed
sequence of step 1 to 2.

4. Slide the front windshield wiper blade

clip onto the end hook of the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow until a click,
indicating locking in place.

When the wiper blade is not installed,

the windshield will be damaged if the
wiper arm touches it. Any damages caused
thereof will not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.

5. Disactivate the front wiper service

position.

266

Vehicle Cleaning and
Maintenance
Exterior Cleaning
Washing the vehicle frequently is helpful to
protect the vehicle appearance. Turn off the
ignition switch first and wash the vehicle in a
cool place. Do not wash it under direct
sunlight. If the vehicle is left under direct
sunlight for a long time, you need to wait for
the body surface to cool down before
washing.
When using an automatic car washer, be
sure to follow the instructions of the car
washer operator.
To prevent damage to the vehicle
paint, corrosive substances (bird
droppings, resin, insects, asphalt spots,
paving salt, industrial dust, etc.) should be
cleared immediately. If necessary, use
industrial alcohol to remove asphalt spots
and obstinate oil stains, and then
immediately wash with water and mild
neutral soap solution to remove the alcohol.
Cleaning the Vehicle with High-
pressure Washer
• Before washing the vehicle, check and
ensure that the fuel filler cap is properly
closed.
• Be sure to clean the vehicle in strict
accordance with the instructions of the
high-pressure washer. Pay special
attention to the working pressure and
spraying distance. If a pressure washer
is used, the nozzle must be at least 30
cm away from the vehicle body surfaces.
Keep the nozzle moving and do not
267
Repair and maintenance
spray water constantly at one position.
High-pressure water flowing into the
vehicle parts may cause chronic
1
damage.
• Do not use "cluster nozzles" to clean the
vehicle.
• Do not allow the nozzle to directly or
indirectly flush the inside of the front
2
engine compartment. High-pressure
water flow can cause damage to the
electrical components in the front engine
compartment or cause some parts to not
work normally. 3
• Do not aim the nozzle of water gun at the
connector of the chassis and flush
(especially the orange high-voltage
harness connector).
• Do not clean the camera and sensor with 4
a high-pressure washer or a steam
washer, to avoid damage.
• Do not spray to wash the painted bumper
and soft parts such as rubber hoses,
plastic parts, and insulating materials at 5
close range.
Clean the Vehicle with Automatic
Car Washer
• Before automatic vehicle washing,
6
please check together with the car
washer operator for any additional parts
mounted on the vehicle, and follow the
professional advice provided by the
operator.
7
• Fold the exterior rearview mirrors before
washing the vehicle.
• The strength of the paint of the vehicle
body can withstand the washing of the
automatic washer, but the impact on the
paint must be noted. The influence
8
Repair and maintenance

mainly depends on the structure of the Otherwise, the interior trims will be
washer, the cleaning brush, the filtering damaged.
state of cleaning water, and the type of
When you clean the glass surfaces of
the cleaner and wax solvent. If the paint
the vehicle, do not use abrasive
surface of the vehicle body is darkened
cleaners. Otherwise, the glass will be
or scratched after washing, the operator
scratched and/or the rear windshield
should be notified immediately to make
defogger will be damaged.
corrections.
The cleaner contains a solvent which may
• When choosing an automatic car washer
coagulate on vehicle interior trims. Please
to clean the vehicle, give priority to a
read and comply with all safety instructions
non-contact car washer. This type of
on labels before using detergent.
vehicle washer does not have any part
Please open doors and windows to keep
(brushes, etc.) that may touch the vehicle
good ventilation when cleaning vehicle
surface.
interior trims.
Interior Cleaning Please note the following when cleaning the
Regular vehicle interior cleaning helps to
interior trims:
improve the environment inside the vehicle.
• Do not get rid of dirt on trim surfaces with
Dust and dirt will accumulate on interior
a knife blade or other sharp objects.
trims, and cause damage to carpets, fabrics,
• Do not use a scrubbing brush. It might
leathers and plastic product surfaces. Stains
damage the trim surfaces of the vehicle.
should be cleaned quickly, especially on
• Do not press hard or use a cleaning cloth
light-colored interior trims, as they may
to wipe with great force. Wiping hard
become solid rapidly under extremely high
cannot improve the cleaning effect but
temperatures.
will damage the interior trims.
Clear the dust on small buttons and knobs
• Only use mild neutral soap. Avoid using
with a handy soft brush.
strong detergent or degreasing soap.
Only use professional cleaners to clean the
Excessive soap will leave stains and is
interior trim surface of the vehicle.
easy to absorb dirt.
Otherwise, it may cause permanent damage
to the vehicle. To avoid spraying • Do not soak interior trims when cleaning.
excessively, spray cleaners on the cleaning • Do not use organic solvents such as
cloth directly. Wipe the cleaner off naphtha or alcohol, as they will damage
immediately if it is accidentally sprayed on interior trims.
the surface of other objects in the vehicle. Fabric/Carpet
The temperature of the baking gun used to
Clean dust and scum with vacuum dust
paste the glass protective film is extremely
catcher fitted with soft broom head. For
high. It should be noted that the baking gun
obstinate stains, you may try to remove
should never bake the interior trims when
them with freshwater or soda water first.
the protective film is being pasted.

268
 Repair and maintenance

Before cleaning, please choose an Do not use detergents or polishes on

appropriate method to remove stains:
• For liquid stains: Wipe residual stains
gently with a tissue, so that the stains
can fully saturate and be absorbed on
the tissue.
• For solid dry stains: Remove as much as
possible by hand and then remove with a
vacuum cleaner.
Cleaning steps:
1. Soak the clean lint-free white cloth in
water or soda water.
2. Wring the cloth to remove residual
moisture.
3. When removing stains, scrub gently
from edges to the middle until no more
stain marks are left on the cloth.
4. If stains cannot be wiped off thoroughly,
repeat the above cleaning operations
with mild soap water.
If the obstinate stains still cannot be
removed thoroughly, consider using the
synthetic fabric cleaner or detergent. Before
using these products, perform the color
fastness test at an inconspicuous area in
the vehicle. If the cleaning effect is locally
good, then it can be used to clean the entire
surface. After cleaning, the tissue may be
used to absorb residual water on fabrics or
carpets.
leather. Otherwise, the appearance and
hand feel of the vehicle interior trims may be
1
permanently changed. Do not use silicon-
based, wax-based or organic solvent-
containing products to clean the vehicle
interior trims, which may cause uneven
gloss of leather and affect the appearance 2
of the interior trims. Be sure not to use shoe
polish on leather.
Instrument Panel and Other
Plastic Surfaces
3
Do not use detergents or polishes on plastic
surfaces. Otherwise, it may change the
appearance and hand feel of interior trims
permanently. Some commercially available
products may enhance the glossiness of the 4
instrument panel and thus cause reflection
on the windshield, which may severely
affect the visual field of the windshield.
5
6

Leather Cleaning
Soft cleaning cloth dipped in water may be 7
used to remove dust. To clean more
thoroughly, use a soft cleaning cloth dipped
in neutral soap water. Please let the leather
dry in the air naturally. Do not bake it dry. Do
not clean leather with steam.
8

269
Repair and maintenance

270
 Technical Data

Main Parameters of the Vehicle

Main Dimensions of the Vehicle 1
Item Unit Parameters
Vehicle length mm 4770

Vehicle width mm 1895

Vehicle height mm 1689 2
Front wheel tread mm 1610
Rear Wheel tread mm 1610
Wheelbase mm 2845

271
Technical Data

Mass Parameters of the Vehicle

Item Unit JLH–4G20TDB+8AT
Drive type - All-wheel

Number of occupants Persons 5

Curb weight kg 1780

Front axle curb weight kg 1015

Rear axle curb weight kg 765

Full load mass kg 2265

Front axle full load mass kg 1143

Rear axle full load mass kg 1122

Accelerator pedal free travel mm <4

Brake pedal free travel mm 10 - 20

272
 Technical Data

Main Parameters of the Engine

Item Unit JLH–4G20TDB 1
In-line 4-cylinder, water cooling,
Engine model -
turbocharging intercooling

Cylinder diameter × stroke mm×mm 82 × 93.2

Total displacement L 1.969 2

Compression ratio - 10.8:1

Rated power kW 175

Maximum net power kW 175

Rated power/revolution 3
r/min 5500
speed

Maximum torque N•m 350

Maximum torque/
r/min 1800 - 4500
revolution speed
4
Stable idle speed r/min 750±50

Ignition sequence - 1–3–4–2

273
Technical Data

Vehicle Power Efficiency

Item Unit Parameters
Maximum vehicle speed km/h 215

Max Grade Ability % 40

Emission Level
Item Parameters
Emission Level EU V

274
 Technical Data

Wheels and Tires

Type of Tires in Use 1
Item Type 1 Type 2

Rim Specification 19×8J 20×8J

Tire Specification 235/50 R19 245/45 R20

2
Types of the Spare Tire
Rim Specification Tire Specification

T125/80 R18
18x4B
T125/80 D18 3
Tire dynamic imbalance
Rim Tire Dynamic Unbalance

19×8J 235/50 R19 ≤ 8g

4
20×8J 245/45 R20 ≤ 8g

Tire Pressure (Cold State)

Wheels Unit Parameters
Front tire kPa 230
5
Rear tire kPa 230
Spare tire kPa 420

275
Technical Data

Wheel Alignment Parameters (No Load)

Item Parameters
Maximum turn angle of front
36.4°±2.0°/30.5°±2.0°
wheel (inner/outer)

Camber of front wheel -45′±39′ (left-and-right difference ≤39′)

Camber of rear wheel -36′±43.8′ (left-and-right difference ≤43.8′)

Kingpin inclination 13.8°±0.5° (left/right difference ≤0.5°)

Caster 4.7°±0.5° (left/right difference ≤0.5°)

Front wheel toe-in 6.6′±3′ (left-and-right difference ≤6′)

Rear wheel toe-in 6′±3′ (left-and-right difference ≤6′)

276
 Technical Data

Oil and fluid

Recommended Fluids and Volume 1
Item Specification Capacity

Gasoline Refer to the fuel filler cap label 62L

6.8L (dry)
Engine oil VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20
5.6L (wet) 2
Engine coolant Geely-approved ethylene glycol-type coolant 7L

Automatic
transmission oil ATF AW-1 6.65L
(8AT)
3
Brake fluid (vacuum
DOT4 0.86L
booster)

Brake fluid (smart

DOT4 0.73L
booster)

Power take-off 4
75W-90 0.45L
lubricant
Rear main reducer
and differential 75W-90 0.45L
assembly

Torque manager
5
Habot 311 0.59L
lubricant
Aqueous solutions of commercial additives mixing
Windshield washer
water with a hardness of less than 205 g/1000 kg and 4L
fluid
an appropriate amount of additives
6
A/C refrigerant R134a 550g

8AT automatic transmission oil, power-take-off lubricating oil, rear main reducer and
differential assembly, torque manager lubricating oil are maintenance-free all the
service life.
7

277
Technical Data

278
 Index
A D
A/C Ventilation System ................... 83
Active High Beam Control System
(AHBC)* .................................... 219
Adaptive Cruise Control System
(ACC)* ...................................... 181
Air Conditioning Comfort Reminder* .. 87
Air Monitoring System* ................... 87
Air Vent Adjustment and A/C
Maintenance ................................ 86
Airbag Maintenance and
Replacement .............................. 112
Airbag Overview.......................... 106
All-Wheel-Drive System ................ 163
Ambient lamp* .............................. 60
Ambient Light and Sunlight Sensor.... 82
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)...... 159
Assist grips .................................. 68
Automatic Parking System* ........... 170
Automatic Speed Limit Control
System (LIM).............................. 179
Automatic Transmission................ 152
B Exterior Rearview Mirror ................. 46
Backup power supply ..................... 66
Brake Assist System (BA) ............. 160
Brake fluid ................................. 260
Bulb Specifications ...................... 245
C First Aid Kit* ............................... 222
Center Armrest ............................. 65
Charge Port ................................. 68
Check the Coolant ....................... 256
Coat and Hat Hook ........................ 69
Collision Mitigation Support Front
(CMSF)* .................................... 206
Combination Instrument Overview .... 15
Cooling System Introduction .......... 256
Cruise Control (CC) System........... 177
Cup holder ................................... 66
Deployment of the Airbags ............ 110
Dial gauge ................................... 16
Driver Seat Memory Function*.......... 98
Driver Side Overview ..................... 13
Driving ...................................... 142
E
Electric Power Steering (EPS)........ 261
Electronic Braking-force
Distribution (EBD)........................ 159
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
System ..................................... 159
Emergency Braking Double Flash
(HAZ) ....................................... 163
Emission Level ........................... 274
Engine Anti-theft System............... 127
Engine Exhaust........................... 148
Engine Oil and Filter Element ......... 255
Engine Start-Stop System ............. 140
Exhaust Emission Control Device ... 148
Exterior Cleaning......................... 267
Exterior Rearview Mirror Ground
Lamps* ....................................... 62
F
Fire Extinguisher* ........................ 221
Fogging On Front Headlamps ........ 262
Front A/C control system................. 73
Front Engine Compartment ........... 254
Front engine compartment fuse
box........................................... 237
Front Engine Compartment Hood.... 253
Front Interior Lamps....................... 59
Front Seats .................................. 89
Fuel Filler and Refueling ............... 150
Fuse Position and Identification ...... 236
 G M
G-Pilot* ..................................... 192 Main Dimensions of the Vehicle ...... 271
Gear Information ......................... 152 Main Parameters of the Engine ...... 273
Glove box .................................... 63 Maintenance of Battery ................. 262
Glove Box Lamp ........................... 62 Mass Parameters of the Vehicle ..... 272
Graphic Abstracts............................ 8 Multimedia interface....................... 68

H N
Hazard warning indicator .............. 221 Notes to Users ................................ 7
Head-up Display Settings ................ 34 Notice for Use............................. 153
Heads Up Display (HUD)
Introduction .................................. 34
Hill Descent Control (HDC) ............ 162 O
Hill Hold Control (HAC) ................. 162
Horn ........................................... 41 Overview ................................... 259

I P
Indoor Fuse Box.......................... 240 Panoramic Image System ............. 168
Information Center......................... 19 Panoramic Sunroof ........................ 52
Inspection of Battery .................... 263 Parking Assist System .................. 164
Inspection or Replacement of Parking Brake............................. 157
Fuse ......................................... 244 Passenger Side Overview ............... 14
Installation of the Child Restraint Position of the Airbags.................. 107
System ..................................... 119 Position of Vehicle Identification
Intelligent Driving System Number ......................................... 8
Introduction ................................ 175 Power windows............................. 49
Interior Cleaning.......................... 268 Preface ......................................... 1
Interior Rearview Mirror .................. 48 Prompt Message ............................. 8
Introduction of the Three-Way
Catalytic Converter ...................... 147
R
Rear A/C Control System ................ 79
J Rear Interior Lamps ....................... 60
Jump Starting of the Vehicle .......... 223 Rear Seat .................................... 94
Rear Side Radar Assist System ...... 215
Recommended Fluids and Volume.. 277
L Refill Coolant.............................. 257
Regular Maintenance ................... 249
Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)*........... 203 Replacement of Battery ................ 263
Light Combination Switch ................ 35 Replacement of Spare Tire ............ 234
Locking and Unlocking ................. 128 Requirements for Driving .............. 148
Long-term Parking ....................... 263 Requirements for Fuel ............ 147, 149
Requirements for Starting ............. 147
Road Accident Emergency
Response System* ...................... 247
Roof Rack.................................... 71
S Vehicle Power Efficiency ............... 274
Safety Precautions at the
Gasoline Station.......................... 150
Seat Belt Maintenance and
Replacement .............................. 105
Seat Belt Overview ........................ 99
Seat Heating/Ventilation* ................ 96
Selection of Child Restrain System.. 114
Service Brake ............................. 156
Smart key .................................. 125
Start Program Operations ............. 139
Start the Engine .......................... 138
Start-and-stop Switch (PEPS) ........ 137
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............. 42
Steering Wheel Buttons .................. 43
Steering Wheel Heating* ................. 41
Storage Box ................................. 63
String Bag.................................... 69
Sun Visor and Cosmetic Mirror ......... 65
Vehicle Identification Number............. 8
Vehicle Label................................ 10
Vehicle Overheating..................... 246
Vehicle Stalls.............................. 247
W
Warning Triangle......................... 221
Warnings and indicators ................. 28
Washer Fluid .............................. 264
Welcome light*.............................. 62
Wheels and Tires ........................ 275
When the Vehicle Is Stuck ............. 247
Why Seat Belt Can Serve for
Protection .................................. 100
Wiper Blades.............................. 264
Wiper Combination Switch .............. 38
Wireless Charging for Mobile
Phones* ...................................... 67

T
Three-point Seat Belt ................... 103
Ticket holder ................................ 65
Tire .......................................... 228
Tire Pressure Gauge*................... 222
Towing Instructions...................... 225
Towing of All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle .. 225
Towing ring ................................ 226
Traction Control System (TCS)....... 161
Traffic Sign Identification System
(TSI)*........................................ 212
Travel of Brake Pedal ................... 259
Trunk .......................................... 70
Trunk Curtain* .............................. 69
Trunk lamp................................... 62

U
Use of Child Safety Device ............ 116

V
Vehicle Cannot be Started............. 142